Vs. 


LIBRARY 

UNIVERSITY  OF 
CAUFOBNIA 

SAN  DIEGO 


J 


^17 


A  MANUAL  OF  STYLE 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PKESS 
CHICAGO,  ILLINOIS 


THE  BAKER  &  TAYLOR  COMPANY 

NEW    YORK 

THE  J.  K.  GILL  COMPANY 

PORTLAND 

THE  CUNNINGHAM,  CURTISS  &  WELCH  COMPANY 

LOS  ANGELES 


THE  CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

LONDON  AND  EDINBURGH 

THE  MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA 

TOKYO,  OSAKA,  KYOTO,  FUKUOKA,  SENDAI 

THE  MISSION  BOOK  COMPANY 

SHANGHAI 


A  MANUAL  OF  STYLE 


A  COMPILATION  OF 

TYPOGRAPHICAL    RULES    GOVERNING    THE    PUBLICATIONS    OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO,   WITH   SPECIMENS  OF 

TYPES   USED  AT  THE  UNIVERSITY   PRESS 


FIFTH  EDITION 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CHICAGO,  ILLINOIS 


^ 


Copyright  1906,  1910,  1911,  1914,  and  1917  By 
The  University  of  Chicago 


All  Rights  Reserved 


Published  November  igo6 
Second  Edition  March  1910 
Third  Edition  December  191 1 
Second  Impression  August  191 2 
Fourth  Edition  February  1914 
Fifth  Edition  November  1917 


Composed  and  Printed  By 

The  University  of  Chicago  Press 

Chicago,  Illinois,  U.S.A. 


INTRODUCTORY  NOTE 

The  present  work  is  a  codification  of  the  typographical 
rules  employed  by  the  University  of  Chicago  in  connection 
with  its  official  printing  and  publications  issued  through 
its  University  Press.  Having  its  genesis,  over  two 
decades  ago,  in  a  single  sheet  of  fundamentals,  jotted 
down  by  the  first  proofreader  at  odd  moments  for  his 
own  guidance;  added  to  from  year  to  year,  as  oppor- 
tunity offered  or  new  necessities  arose;  revised  and 
re-revised  as  the  scope  of  the  work,  and,  it  is  hoped,  the 
wisdom  of  the  workers,  increased — it  emerges  in  its  present 
form  as  the  embodiment  of  traditions,  the  crystallization 
of  usages,  the  blended  product  of  the  reflections  of  many 
minds. 

Regulations  like  these,  in  the  nature  of  the  case, 
cannot  be  endowed  with  the  fixity  of  unchanging  law. 
They  are  meant  for  the  average  case,  and  must  be 
applied  with  a  certain  degree  of  elasticity.  Exceptions 
will  constantly  occur,  and  ample  room  is  left  for  individual 
initiative  and  discretion.  They  point  the  way  and  survey 
the  road,  rather  than  remove  the  obstacles.  Throughout 
this  book  it  is  assumed  that  no  regulation  contained  therein 
is  absolutely  inviolable.  Wherever  the  peculiar  nature  of 
the  subject-matter,  the  desirability  of  throwing  into  relief 
a  certain  part  of  the  argument,  the  reasonable  preference 


VI  INTRODUCTORY  NOTE 

of  a  writer,  or  a  typographical  contingency  suggests  a 
deviation,  such  deviation  may  legitimately  be  made.  Each 
case  of  this  character  must  be  decided  largely  upon  its 
own  merits.  Generally  it  may  be  stated  that,  where  no 
question  of  taste  or  logic  is  involved,  deference  should 
be  shown  to  the  expressed  wishes  of  the  author. 

The  nature  of  the  work  of  the  Press  itself — and  this 
will  apply,  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  to  any  similar  in- 
stitution affected  by  local  conditions — constantly  calls  for 
modification,  now  of  this  rule,  now  of  that.  It  would  be 
found  impracticable,  even  were  it  desirable,  to  bring  all 
its  publications  into  rigid  uniformity  of  "style"  and 
appearance.  Methods  have  been  devised,  systems  evolved, 
in  certain  lines  of  work,  which  cannot  be  carried  bodily 
over  into  the  field  of  others.  Thus,  in  the  matter  of  literary 
references,  for  instance,  general  practice  has  established 
certain  usages  in  some  of  the  sciences  which  it  would  not 
be  advisable  to  ignore.  Similar  differences  in  practice 
may  be  observed  in  other  directions.  These  deviations 
from  the  general  rules  will  be  found  mentioned  at  the 
appropriate  places  in  the  body  of  the  book.  On  the  whole, 
however,  the  rules  are  designed  to  govern  all  publications 
sent  forth  with  the  official  publishing  imprint,  "The 
University  of  Chicago  Press." 

Concerning  the  character  and  contents  of  the  book 
little  need  be  added.  Its  origin,  its  primary  aim,  and  its 
limitations,  as  outlined  above,  will  suggest  the  bounds  of 
its  usefulness.  It  does  not  pretend  to  be  exhaustive;  a 
few  things  must  be  taken  for  granted,  and  the  traditional 


INTRODUCTORY  NOTE  vii 

territory  of  the  dictionary  has  only  exceptionally  been 
invaded.  It  does  not  presume  to  be  inflexibly  consistent; 
applicability,  in  the  printing-office,  is  a  better  test  than 
iron-clad  consistency,  and  common  sense  a  safer  guide 
than  abstract  logic.  It  lays  no  claim  to  perfection  in  any 
of  its  parts;  bearing  throughout  the  inevitable  earmarks 
of  compromise,  it  will  not  carry  conviction  at  every  point 
to  everybody.  Neither  is  it  an  advocate  of  any  radical 
scheme  of  reform;  in  the  present  state  of  the  agitation 
for  changes  in  spelling,  progressive  conservatism  has 
been  thought  to  be  more  appropriate  for  an  academic 
printing-office  than  radicalism.  As  it  stands,  this  Manual 
is  believed  to  contain  a  fairly  comprehensive,  reasonably 
harmonious,  and  wholesomely  practical  set  of  work-rules 
for  the  aid  of  those  who  have  to  do  with  questions  of 
typographical  style.  For  the  benefit  of  those  whose  duties 
bring  them  into  direct  contact  with  the  manufacturing 
department  of  the  Press,  specimen  pages  of  the  available 
types,  special  characters,  etc.,  have  been  added. 

The  Manual  of  Style  is  now  in  its  fifth  edition.  That 
it  is  recognized  as  possessing  merit  is  evidenced  by  its 
adoption  and  use  in  many  editorial  ofiices,  libraries, 
and  proofrooms  in  the  United  States  and  Canada. 
This  edition  incorporates  several  new  rules  which  it  is 
believed  will  prove  helpful,  and  at  the  same  time  seeks 
to  elucidate  some  of  the  older  rules,  in  the  application 
of  which  difficulties  may  arise.  Changes  in  literary 
practice,  the  legislation  of  learned  societies,  the  recent 
development  of  the  profession  of  the  librarian,  with  the 


viii  INTRODUCTORY  NOTE 

attendant  uniformity  of  practice  recommended  by  the 
national  association  of  librarians,  and  the  added  experi- 
ence resulting  from  a  daily  application  of  these  rules  to 
a  very  varied  list  of  publications,  are  all  factors  con- 
tributing to  the  need  of  periodical  revision. 

The  work,  thus  remodeled,  is  again  offered  to  the 
public,  in  the  hope  that  it  may  continue  to  be  useful 
to  those  whose  occupations  require  some  familiarity  with 
the  niceties  of  typographical  form. 

Newman  Miller,  Director 
The  University  Press 
Chicago,  III. 
October  15,  191 7 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Rules  for  Composition i 

Capitalization 3 

The  Use  of  Italics 25 

Quotations 33 

Spelling    .      .           37 

Punctuation 50 

Divisions 81 

Footnotes 88 

Indexing         92 

Tabular  Work 95 

Technical  Terms 103 

Appendix        119 

Hints  to  Authors  and  Editors 121 

Hints  to  Proofreaders 125 

Hints  to  Copyholders 130 

Proofreader's  Marks 133 

Specimens  of  Types  in  Use 135 

Monotype  Accents  and  Special  Monotype  Char- 
acters     275 

Indexes 283 

Index  to  Manual 285 

Index  to  Types,  etc 299 


RULES    FOR    COMPOSITION 


CAPITALIZATION 

Capitalize — 

1.  Proper  nouns  and  adjectives: 

George,  America,  North  America,  Englishman;  Elizabethan, 
French.     (See  53.) 

Do  not  capitalize  verbs  derived  from  proper  names 
and  having  a  specialized  meaning: 

to  boycott,  to  fletcherize,  to  pasteurize; 

nor  such  words  as  the  following,  when  used  in 

their  special  scientific  or  trade  significance : 

volt,  ampere,  angstrom,  farad,  watt,  henry,  ohm,  coulomb. 

2.  Epithets  used  as  substitutes  for  proper  names,  or 
affixed  to  a  name: 

the  Pretender,  Bloody  Mary,  Richard  the  Lion-hearted, 
Alexander  the  Great. 

3.  The  particles  in  French  names,  as  "le,"  "la,"  "de," 
"du,"  when  they  are  not  preceded  by  a  Christian 
name  or  title;  but  do  not  capitalize  them  when 
they  are  preceded  by  such  name  or  title: 

Le  Bossu,  La  Torre,  La  Rochelle,  De  Coligny,  D'Aubigne, 
Du  Maurier  (but:  Rene  le  Bossu,  Miguel  de  la  Torre, 
Gaspard  de  Coligny,  Thomas  d'Aubigne,  George  du 
Maurier). 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Capitalize  "Van"  in  Dutch  names;  do  not  capi- 
talize "von"  in  German  names  unless  it  begins  a 
sentence : 

Stephen  Van  Rensselaer;  Hugo  von  Martius,  von  Dobschiitz. 

Note.- — -Personal  preference  is  responsible  for  the  following  ex- 
ceptions: Henry  van  Dyke,  J.  H.  van't  HofJ. 

4.  Generic  terms  forming  a  part  of  geographical  names: 

Atlantic  Ocean,  Dead  Sea,  Baffin's  Bay,  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
Straits  of  Gibraltar,  Straits  Settlements,  Mississippi  River, 
Three  Rivers,  Laughing  Brook,  Rocky  Mountains,  Blue 
Hills,  Pike's  Peak,  Mount  of  Olives,  Great  Desert,  Death 
Valley,  Prince  Edward  Island,  Sea  (Lake)  of  Galilee. 

But  do  not  capitalize  words  of  this  class  when  simply 
added  by  way  of  description  to  the  specific  name, 
without  forming  an  organic  part  of  such  name: 

the  river  Elbe,  the  desert  of  Sahara,  the  island  of  Madagascar. 

Subject  to  the  above  rule,  the  following  lists  will  be 
found  useful  (see  104) : 


CAPITALIZE,  IN  SINGULAR  FORM  ONLY,  WHEN  IMMEDIATELY 
FOLLOWING  NAME 


Archipelago 

Forest 

Ocean 

Borough 

Fork 

Parish  (La.) 

Branch  (stream) 

Gap 

Park 

Butte 

Glacier 

Plateau 

Canyon 

Gulch 

Range 

County 

Harbor 

Reservation 

Crater 

Head 

Ridge 

Creek 

Hollow 

River 

Delta 

Mesa 

Run 

MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  CAPITALIZATION  5 

CAPITALIZE,  IN    SINGULAR   OR  PLURAL  FORM,   WHEN   IMME- 
DIATELY FOLLOWING   THE   NAME 

HiU  Mountain  Spring 

Island  Narrows 

CAPITALIZE,  IN  SINGULAR  FORM,  EITHER  BEFORE  OR  AFTER 
THE  name;    and   IN  PLURAL  FORM  BEFORE   THE   NAME 


Bay 

Fort 

Point 

Bayou 

Isle 

Port 

Camp  (military) 

Lake 

Sea 

Cape 

Mount 

Strait 

Dalles 

Oasis 

VaUey 

Desert 

Pass 

Volcano 

FaUs 

Peak 

5.  Adjectives  and  nouns  used  singly  or  in  conjunction, 
to  distinguish  definite  regions,  and  when  used  in 
connection  with  a  recognized  geographical  term; 
and  also  terms  applied  to  groups  of  states: 

Old  World,  Western  Hemisphere,  Continental  Europe,  the 
Continent  (to  distinguish  it  from  the  British  Isles),  North 
Pole,  Equator,  the  North  (  =  Scandinavia),  the  East  (the 
Orient),  the  Far  East,  the  Levant;  the  North,  South,  East, 
West,  Middle  West  (United  States) ;  Northern  Europe  (but: 
southern  California);  North  Atlantic  states.  Gulf  states. 
Pacific  Coast  states. 

But  do  not,  as  a  rule,  capitalize  adjectives  derived 
from  such  names  or  nouns  simply  designating 
direction  or  point  of  compass : 

oriental  customs,  the  southern  states,  the  middle  western 
states,  a  southerner  (but:  Northman  =  Scandinavian);  an 
invasion  of  barbarians  from  the  north,  extending  through 
the  south  of  Europe. 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

In  order  that  a  distinction  may  be  made  between 
a  local  and  a  world-wide  application,  the  latter 
should  be  capitalized: 

Eastern  peoples  (i.e.,  peoples  of  the  Orient);  Western 
nations. 

6.  Generic  terms  for  political  divisions: 

(i)  when  the  term  is  an  organic  part  of  the  name, 
following  the  proper  name  directly: 

Holy  Roman  Empire,  German  Empire  (=Deutsches  Reich), 
French  Re-puhlic  (=Republique  fran(aise),  United  Kingdom, 
Northwest  Territory,  Cook  County,  Evanston  Township, 
Kansas  City  (New  York  City — exception). 

(2)  when,  with  the  preposition  "of,"  it  is  used  as 
an  integral  part  of  the  name  to  indicate  certain 
minor  administrative  subdivisions  in  the  United 
States: 

Department  of  the  Lakes,  Town  of  Lake,  Borough  of  Man- 
hattan. 

(3)  when  used  singly  as  the  accepted  designation 
for  a  specific  division: 

the  Union,  the  States,  the  Republic  (=United  States),  [the 
Confederacy!,  the  Dominion  (= Canada),  the  West  Side. 

(4)  when  it  is  part  of  a  fanciful  or  popular  appel- 
lation used  as  if  a  real  geographical  name: 

Celestial  Empire,  Holy  (Promised)  Land,  Badger  State, 
Eternal  City,  Garden  City. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  CAPITALIZATION  7 

But  do  not  (with  the  exceptions  noted)  capitalize  such 
terms  when  standing  alone,  or  when,  with  "of," 
preceding  the  specific  name : 

the  empire,  the  state;  empire  of  Russia,  kingdom  of  Servia, 
duchy  of  Anhalt,  state  of  Illinois,  county  of  Cook,  city  of 
Chicago. 

7.  Numbered  poKtical  divisions  (see  100) : 

Eleventh  Congressional  District,  First  Ward,  Second  Precinct. 

8.  The  names  of  thoroughfares,  parks,  squares,  blocks, 
buildings,  etc.  (see  100): 

Drexel  Avenue,  Ringstrasse,  Via  Appia,  Chicago  Drainage 
Canal;  Lincoln  Park;  Trafalgar  Square;  Monadnock 
Block;  Lakeside  Building,  Capitol,  White  House,  County 
Hospital,  Theatre  Fran^ais,  Lexington  Hotel,  Masonic 
Temple  [Solomon's  temple,  but,  when  standing  alone:  the 
Temple]. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  general  designations  of 
buildings  as  "courthouse,"  "post-office,"  "library," 
etc.,  except  in  connection  with  the  name  of  the  place 
in  which  they  are  located,  when  they  thus  form  a 
proper  name. 

9.  The  names  of  political  parties,  religious  denomina- 
tions or  sects,  and  philosophical,  literary,  and  artistic 
schools,  and  their  adherents: 

Republican,  Conservative,  National  Liberal,  Social  Democ- 
racy (where,  as  in  Continental  Europe,  it  is  organized  as 
a  distinct  parliamentary  faction);    Christian,  Protestantism, 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Evangelical  Lutheran,  Catholic  (Papist,  Ultramontane),  Re- 
formed, Greek  Orthodox,  Anabaptist,  Seventh-Day  Advent- 
ists,  the  Establishment,  High  Church,  High  Churchman, 
Separatist,  Nonconformist,  Dissenter,  Theosophist,  Jew, 
GentUe  as  a  noun,  Pharisee  (but:  scribe)  (adjective: 
Pharisaic,  but:  pharisaic,  when  used  of  characteristics,  and 
not  of  the  sect  itself);  Epicurean,  Stoic,  Gnosticism  (but: 
neo-Platonism,  pseudo-Christianity,  un-Christian — see  203, 
208),  Literalist;  the  Romantic  movement,  the  Symbolic 
school  of  painters. 

But  do  not  capitalize  any  of  the  foregoing  or  similar 
w^ords,  or  their  derivatives,  when  used  in  their  origi- 
nal or  acquired  general  sense  of  pervading  spirit, 
point  of  view,  trend  of  thought,  attitude  of  mind,  or 
mode  of  action: 

republican  form  of  government,  a  true  democrat  and  a  con- 
servative statesman,  socialism  as  an  economic  panacea,  the 
communistic  theory,  single-taxer,  anarchism;  catholicity  of 
mind,  puritanical  ideas,  evangelical  spirit,  pharisaic  super- 
ciliousness; deist,  pantheism,  rationalist;  epicurean  tastes, 
stoic  endurance,  dualism  and  monism  in  present-day  philoso- 
phy, an  altruistic  world-view;   the  classics,  a  realistic  novel. 

10.  The  names  of  monastic  orders  and  their  members: 
Black  Friars,  Dominican,  Jesuit. 

11.  The  proper  (official)  titles  of  social,  religious,  educa- 
tional, political,  commercial,  and  industrial  organiza- 
tions and  institutions: 

Union  League  Club,  Knights  Templar;  Young  People's 
Society  of  Christian  Endeavor,  Associated  Charities;  Smith- 
sonian Institution,  State  University  of  Iowa,  Hyde  Park  High 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  9 

School;  the  Commercial  Academy  (Handelsakademie)  of 
Leipzig,  the  Paris  Lyceum  (Lycee  de  Paris);  the  Forty 
[Immortals];  Cook  County  Democracy,  Tammany  Hall; 
Associated  Press,  Typographical  Union  No.  16;  Chicago, 
Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul  Railroad,  The  Macmillan  Company. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  generic  terms  when  used 
to  designate  a  class;  nor  when  standing  alone,  even 
if  applied  to  a  specific  institution,  except  to  avoid 
ambiguity  or,  rarely,  where  the  word  is  consistently 
and  clearly  used  in  place  of  the  true  name : 
young  people's  societies,  the  high  school  at  Lemont,  local 
typographical  unions;  the  club,  the  association,  the  company; 
but:  "He  joined  the  Hall  [Tammany],"  "a  member  of  the 
[French]  Academy."     (See  49.) 

12.  The  names  of  legislative,  judiciary,  and  administra- 
tive bodies  and  governmental  departments,  and  their 
branches,  when  specifically  applied: 
Congress  (Senate,  House  of  Representatives  [the  House], 
Committee  of  Ways  and  Means),  Parliament  (House  of 
Lords,  House  of  Commons),  Reichstag,  Chamber  of  Deputies 
(the  Chamber),  General  Assembly  of  Illinois,  Chicago  City 
Council,  South  Park  Commissioners;  Supreme  Court  of  the 
United  States,  Circuit  Court  of  Cook  County,  [Sanhedrin]; 
Department  of  the  Interior,  Census  Office,  Springfield  Board 
of  Education,  Department  of  Public  Works,  the  United 
States  Army  (but :  he  has  served  in  the  army ;  an  army  man). 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  general,  paraphrastic,  or 
incomplete  designations  as — 

the  national  assembly,  the  legislature  of  the  state,  the  upper 
house  of  Congress,  the  German  federal  parliament,  the 
Dutch  diet;  the  council,  the  department,  the  board. 


lO  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

13.  Ordinals  used  to  designate  Egyptian  dynasties, 
sessions  of  Congress,  names  of  regiments,  and  in 
similar  connections  (see  100): 

the  Eighteenth  Dynasty  (but:  the  Ming  dynasty),  the 
Fifty-third  Congress,  the  Second  Ilhnois  Regiment  Band. 

14.  Commonly  accepted  appellations  for  historical 
epochs,  periods  in  the  history  of  a  language  or 
literature,  and  geological  ages  and  strata,  the  word 
"age"  itself  being  capitalized  only  where  a  failure 
to  do  so  would  result  in  ambiguous  meaning: 

Neolithic  age  (but:  Stone  Age,  Middle  Ages),  Crusades, 
Renaissance,  Reformation,  Inquisition,  Commonwealth 
(Cromwell's),  Commune  (Paris);  Old  English  (OE — see 
123),  Middle  High  German  (MHG),  the  Age  of  Elizabeth; 
Pleistocene,  Silurian,  Lower  Carboniferous. 

But  do  not  capitalize  informal  adjectives  in  such 
phrases  as — 

early  Algonkian,  late  Permian. 

15.  Names  of  important  events: 

Thirty  Years'  War,  Peasants'  War  (German),  Revolution 
(French),  Revolutionary  War  or  War  of  Independence 
(American),  Whiskey  Insurrection  (American),  Civil  War 
(American),  War  of  1812,  Franco-Prussian  War,  Battle  of 
Gettysburg;   Peace  of  Utrecht,  Louisiana  Purchase. 

16.  Political  alliances,  and  such  terms  from  secular  or 
ecclesiastical  history  as  have,  through  their  associa- 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  n 

tions,  acquired  special  significance  as  designations 
for  parties,  classes,  movements,  etc.  (see  9) : 

Protestant  League,  Holy  Alliance,  Dreibund;  the  Roses,  the 
Roundheads,  Independents,  Independency  (English  history), 
Nonconformist,  Dissenter,  Separatist. 

17.  Conventions,  congresses,  expositions,  etc.: 

Council  of  Nicaea,  Parliament  of  Religions,  Fifteenth  Inter- 
national Congress  of  Criminology,  Westminster  Assembly, 
Chicago  World's  Fair,  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition. 

18.  Titles  of  specific  treaties,  acts,  laws  (juridical), 
bills,  etc.: 

Treaty  of  Verdun,  Art.  V  of  the  Peace  of  Prague,  Edict  of 
Nantes,  Concordat,  the  Constitution  (of  the  United  States, 
when  standing  alone,  or  when  referred  to  as  a  literary  docu- 
ment; but  not  usually  that  of  any  other  state  or  country,  e.g., 
the  constitution  of  Illinois),  Declaration  of  Independence, 
Act  of  Emancipation,  Magna  C(h)arta,  Com  Law,  Reform 
Bill  (English),  Fourteenth  Amendment,  Sherman  Anti- 
trust Law. 

19.  Creeds  and  confessions  of  faith: 

Apostles'  Creed,  Nicene  Creed  (but:  ante-Nicene — see  203, 
208),  Augsburg  Confession,  Thirty-nine  Articles. 

20.  Civic  holidays  and  ecclesiastical  fast  and  feast  days: 
Fourth  of  July  (the  Fourth),  Labor  Day,  Thanksgiving  Day; 
Easter,  Passover,  Feast  of  Tabernacles,  New  Year's  Day, 

21.  Titles  of  honor  and  respect,  whether  religious, 
civil,  or  military,  preceding  the  name,  and  academic 
degrees  following  the  name;  all  titles  of  honor  or 
of   nobility,    when   referring   to   specific    persons, 


12  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

either  preceding  the  name  or  used  in  place  of  the 
proper  name ;  f amihar  names  applied  to  particular 
persons;  orders  (decorations)  and  the  titles  accom- 
panying them;  titles,  without  the  name,  used  in 
direct  address;  titles  without  the  name  when  used 
of  existing  incumbents  of  ofhce;  and  such  words  as 
^'President,"  ''King,"  ''Czar"  (''Tsar"),  "Kaiser," 
"Sultan,"  and  "Pope,"  standing  alone,  when  refer- 
ring to  a  specific  ruler  or  incumbent: 

Queen  Victoria,  ex-President  Cleveland,  Rear-Admiral 
Dewey,  Brigadier-General  Brown,  Lieutenant-Commander 
Smith;  United  States  Commissioner  of  Education  Harris, 
Dr.  Davis;  Father  Boniface,  Deacon  Smith;  Timothy 
Dwight,  D.D.,  LL.D. ;  James  Brown,  Doctor  of  Philosophy; 
Thomas  Graham,  Fellow  of  the  Royal  Geographical  Society; 
the  Prince  of  Wales,  the  Marquis  of  Lome,  His  Majesty, 
His  Grace;  the  Apostle  to  the  Gentiles,  "the  Father  of  his 
Country";  Order  of  the  Red  Eagle,  Knight  Commander 
of  the  Bath;  "Allow  me  to  suggest,  Judge  .  .  .  .";  the 
Bishop  of  London;  the  Senator;  "The  President  [of  the 
United  States]  was  chosen  arbitrator,"  "the  King  wore  his 
robes,"  "the  Pope's  policy." 

But  do  not  capitalize  the  official  title  of  a  person 
when  the  title  follows  the  name  (see  49);  when 
standing  alone,  without  the  name  (with  the  excep- 
tions noted  above,  and  see  49);  or  when,  followed 
by  the  name,  it  is  preceded  by  the  article  "the": 

Woodrow  Wilson,  president  of  the  United  States;  B.  L. 
Gildersleeve,  professor  of  Greek  (see  49) ;  Ferdinand  W. 
Peck,  commissioner-general  to  the  Paris  Exposition;  the 
emperor  of   Germany   (meaning  other  than  the  existing 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  13 

emperor),  the  archbishop  (meaning  other  than  the  existing 
incumbent),  the  senator  (when  not  speaking  of  the  existing 
member),  the  archduke  Francis  Ferdinand,  the  apostle 
Paul. 

22.  Abbreviations  like  Ph.D.,  M.P.,  and  F.R.G.S.  and 

designations  of  celestial  objects  (see  48)  (such 
titles  to  be  set  without  space  between  the  letters) 
(see  52,  103,  106). 

23.  Abbreviations  consisting  of  one  letter,  except  in 
case  of  units  of  measurement  and  minor  literary 
subdivisions  (see  54,  55,  no,  in): 

R.V.  (Revised  Version),  C.  (centigrade),  A  (angstrom 
units)  (but:    p.,  I.,  n.,  etc.). 

24.  Nouns  and  adjectives  used  to  designate  the  Supreme 
Being  or  Power,  or  any  member  of  the  Christian 
Trinity;  and  all  pronouns*  referring  to  the  same, 
when  not  closely  preceded  or  followed  by  a  dis- 
tinctive name,  or  unless  such  reference  is  otherwise 
perfectly  clear: 

the  Almighty,  Ruler  of  the  universe,  the  First  Cause,  the 
Absolute,  Providence  (personified),  Father,  Son,  Holy  Ghost, 
the  Spirit,  Savior,  Messiah,  Son  of  Man,  the  Logos,  [and 
the  Virgin  Mary];  "Trust  Him  who  rules  all  things"  (but: 
"When  God  had  worked  six  days,  he  rested  on  the  seventh"). 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  expressions  and  deriva- 
tives as — 

(God's)  fatherhood,  (Jesus')  sonship,  messiahship,  messianic 
hope,  christological  (but:  Chris tology). 


14  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

25.  Words  which  have  an  acquired,  limited,  or  special 
meaning : 

the  Doctor's  degree;  a  report  of  the  Master  (in  chancery); 
a  Bachelor's  hood;  a  Freshman. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  expressions  as — 
the  doctorate,  a  master  in  chancery  (the  last  two  words  being 
explanatory,  the  capitalization  of  "master"  is  here  no  longer 
necessary  to  indicate  a  special  meaning). 

26.  "Nature"  and  similar  terms,  and  abstract  ideas, 
when  personified : 

"Nature  wields  her  scepter  mercilessly";  "Vice  in  the  old 
English  morality  plays." 

27.  "Father"  used  for  church  father,  and  "reformers" 
used  of  Reformation  leaders,  whenever  the  meaning 
otherwise  would  be  ambiguous: 

the  Fathers,  the  early  Fathers,  the  Greek  Fathers,  [Pilgrim 
Fathers],  the  Reformers  (but:  the  church  reformers  of  the 
fifteenth  century). 

28.  The  word  "church"  in  properly  cited  titles  of 
nationally  organized  bodies  of  believers  in  which, 
through  historical  associations,  it  has  become  insepa- 
rably linked  with  the  name  of  a  specific  locality;  or 
when  forming  part  of  the  name  of  a  particular 
edifice: 

Church  of  Rome,  Church  of  England,  High  Church;  Church 
of  the  Holy  Sepulcher,  Fifth  Avenue  Baptist  Church,  First 
Methodist  Church. 

But  do  not  capitalize,  except  as  noted  above,  when 
standing  alone,  in  any  sense— universal,  national, 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  15 


local — or  wlien  the  name  is  not  correctly  or  fully 
quoted : 

the  church  (=organized  Christianity),  the  Eastern  (Greek 
Orthodox)  church,  the  Roman  Catholic  church,  the  estab- 
lished church  (but:  the  Establishment),  the  state  church;  the 
Baptist  church  in  Englewood. 

Note. — In  exceptional  cases,  where  the  opposition  of  Church 
and  State  constitutes  a  fundamental  part  of  the  argument,  and 
it  is  desired  to  lend  force  to  this  antithesis,  emphasis  may  be  added 
by  capitalizing  the  two  words. 

29.  Names  for  the  Bible  and  other  sacred  books: 

(Holy,  Sacred)  Scriptures,  Holy  Writ,  Word  of  God,  Book  of 
Books;  Koran,  Vedas,  Mishna,  the  Upanishads;   Apocrypha. 

But  do  not  capitalize  adjectives  derived  from  such 

nouns: 

biblical,  scriptural,  koranic,  vedic,  talmudic,  apocryphal. 

30.  Versions  and  editions  of  the  Bible: 

King  James's  Version,  Authorized  Version  (A.V.),  Revised 
Version  (R.V.),  Polychrome  Bible,  Septuagint  (LXX), 
Peshitto. 

31.  Books  and  divisions  of  the  Bible  and  of  other  sacred 
books  (Christian  or  otherwise)  (see  60) : 

Old  Testament,  Pentateuch,  Exodus,  II  (Second)  Kings, 
Book  of  Job,  Psalms  (Psalter),  the  [Mosaic]  Law  and  the 
[writings  of  the]  Prophets,  Minor  Prophets,  Wisdom  Literature, 
Gospel  of  Luke,  Synoptic  Gospels,  Fourth  Gospel,  Acts  of 
the  Apostles  (the  Acts),  Episde  to  the  Romans,  Pastoral 
Epistles,  Apocalypse  (Revelation),  Sermon  on  the  Mount, 
Beatitudes,  Lord's  Prayer,  Teti  Commandments  (Decalogue), 
Judith,  Bel  and  the  Dragon,  the  Koran,  the  Vedas. 


1 6  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

But  do  not  capitalize  words  like  "book,"  "gospel," 
"epistle,"  "psalm"  in  such  connections  as — 

the  five  books  of  Moses,  the  first  forty  psalms,  the  gospels 
and  epistles  of  the  New  Testament,  [the  synoptic  problem, 
the  synoptistsj,  the  biblical  apocalypses. 

32.  Biblical  parables: 

the  parable  of  the  Prodigal  Son. 

33.  Such  miscellaneous  terms  as — 

Last  Supper,  Eucharist,  the  Passion,  the  Twelve  (apostles), 
the  Seventy  (disciples),  the  Servant,  the  Day  of  Yahweh,  the 
Chronicler,  the  Psalmist,  the  Golden  Rule,  the  Kingdom  of 
God,  or  of  Heaven. 

34.  The  first  word  of  a  sentence,  and  in  poetry  the  first 
word  of  each  line : 

In  summer,  on  the  headlands, 

The  Baltic  Sea  along. 
Sits  Neckan,  with  his  harp  of  gold, 

And  sings  his  plaintive  song. 

But  in  Greek  and  Latin  poetry  capitalize  only  the 
first  word  of  a  paragraph,  not  of  each  verse  (line) : 

Toicrt  S'  doiSos  aeiSe  TreptKAvro?.  ol  0€  cmawrj 
etar'  a.KovovT(.<i'  6  o'    A^j^aiwv  vocttov  aeioev, 
\vyp6v,  ov  CK  TpOLr]<;  i-rrereLXaTO  HaAAas    Adr]vr]. 
Tov  8'  vwepMLoOev  cf^peal  avvOtro  dia-inv  aoio-qv 
Kovpr)   iKoptoLO,  Trepiffipuiv  TLrjveXoTreia' 

Talia  praefantes  quondam  felicia  Pelei 
carmina  diuino  cecinerunt  pectore  Parcae 
praesentes:  namque  ante  domos  inuisere  castas 
heroum  et  sese  mortali  ostendere  coetu 
caelicolae  nondum  spreta  pietate  solebant 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:    CAPITALIZATION  17 

35.  The  first  word  after  a  colon  only  when  introducing 
a  complete  passage,  or  sentence  which  would  have 
independent  meaning,  as  in  summarizations  and 
quotations  not  closely  connected  with  what  precedes; 
or  where  the  colon  has  the  weight  of  such  expres- 
sion as  "as  follows,"  "namely,"  "for  instance,"  or 
a  similar  phrase,  and  is  followed  by  a  logically  com- 
plete sentence: 

"In  conclusion  I  wish  to  say:  It  will  be  seen  from  the  above 
that  .  .  .  .";  "As  the  old  proverb  has  it:  'Haste  makes 
waste'";  "My  theory  is:  The  moment  the  hot  current  strikes 
the  surface  .  .  .  ." 

But  do  not  capitalize  the  first  word  of  a  quotation  if 
immediately  connected  with  what  precedes  (unless, 
as  the  first  word  of  a  sentence,  beginning  a  paragraph 
in  reduced  type) ;  or  the  first  word  after  a  colon,  if 
an  implied  "namely,"  or  a  similar  term,  is  followed 
by  a  brief  explanatory  phrase,  logically  dependent 
upon  the  preceding  clause;  or  if  the  colon  signal- 
izes a  note  of  comment: 

"The  old  adage  is  true  that  'haste  makes  waste'";  "Two 
explanations  present  themselves:  either  he  came  too  late  for 
the  train,  or  he  was  detained  at  the  station";  "We  could  not 
prevail  upon  the  natives  to  recross  the  stream:  so  great  was 
their  superstition." 

36.  As  a  rule,  the  first  word  in  sections  of  an  enumera^ 
tion,  if  any  one  link  contains  two  or  more  distinct 
clauses,  separated  by  a  semicolon,  colon,  or  period, 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


unless  all  are  dependent  iij)()n  the  same  term  ])re- 
ceding  and  leading  up  to  them  (see  138) : 

His  reasons  for  refusal  were  three:  (i)  He  did  not  have  the 
time.  (2)  He  did  not  have  the  means;  or,  at  any  rate,  had  no 
funds  available  at  the  moment.  (3)  He  doubted  the  feasi- 
bility of  the  plan.  But:  He  objected  that  (i)  he  did  not 
have  the  time;  (2)  he  did  not  have  the  means;  or,  at  any 
rate,  had  no  funds  available;  (3)  he  doubted  the  feasibility 
of  the  plan. 

37.  As  a  rule,  nouns  followed  by  a  numeral — particu- 
larly a  capitalized  Roman  numeral — indicating 
their  order  in  a  sequence: 

Room  16,  Ps.  20,  Grade  IV,  Act  I,  Vol.  I,  No.  2,  Book  II, 
Div.  Ill,  Part  IV. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  minor  subdivisions  of 
publications  as — 

sec.  4,  scene  i,  art.  iii,  art.  "Evidence,"  chap.  2  (ii),  p.  7 
(vii),  vs.  II,  1.  5,  n.  6.     (See  no.) 

38.  The  first  word  of  a  cited  speech  (or  thought)  in 
direct  discourse,  whether  preceded  by  a  colon  or  a 
comma  (on  this  see  131): 

On  leaving  he  remarked:  "Never  shall  I  forget  this  day"; 
With  the  words,  "Never  shall  I  forget  this  day,"  he  departed; 
I  thought  to  myself:  This  day  I  shall  never  forget  (without 
quotation  marks). 

39.  In  resolutions,  the  first  words  following  "Whereas" 
and  ''Resolved": 

Whereas,  It  has  pleased  God  .  .  .  .  ;   therefore  be  it 
Resolved,  That  .... 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  CAPITALIZATION  19 

40.  The  exclamations  "O"  and  "Oh"  (see  117): 

"O  Lord!"  "I  know  not,  Oh,  I  know  not!"  "Oh,  that  I 
were  home  again!" 

41.  All  the  principal  words  (i.e.,  nouns,  pronouns, 
adjectives,  adverbs,  verbs,  first  and  last  words)  in 
English  titles  of  publications  (books,  pamphlets,  doc- 
uments, periodicals,  reports,  proceedings,  etc.),  and 
their  divisions  (parts,  chapters,  sections,  poems, 
articles,  etc.) ;  in  subjects  of  lectures,  papers,  toasts, 
etc.;  in  cap-and-small-cap  and  italic  center-heads 
(both  of  which,  however,  should  be  avoided),  and 
bold-face  cut-in  heads  and  side-heads;  in  cap-and- 
small-cap  box-heads  in  tables  (see  279-83) ; 

The  Men  Who  Made  the  Nation;  The  American  College — 
Its  Past  and  Present;  the  Report  oj  the  Committee  0}  Nine; 
"In  the  Proceedings  of  the  National  Education  Association 
for  1907  there  appeared  a  paper  entitled,  'The  Financial 
Value  of  Education.' " 

Note. — The  Botanical  Gazette  capitalizes  only  first  words  and 
proper  names;  and  the  practice  may  properly  be  followed  in 
general  bibliographies,  such  as  are  to  be  found  under  the  title 
"Literature  Cited"  in  the  Botanical  Gazette  (see  60).  This  style 
is  very  generally  followed  by  librarians  and  others  in  the  com- 
pilation of  lists  of  books  and  publications. 

42.  In  foreign  titles,  in  addition  to  capitalizing  the  first 
word,  follow  these  general  rules : 

a)  In  Latin,  capitalize  proper  nouns,  and  adjectives 

derived  therefrom: 

De  amicitia,  Bellum  Gallicum. 


20  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

b)  In  French,  Italian,  Spanish,  Swedish,  and  Nor- 
wegian titles,  capitalize  proper  nouns  but  not  ad- 
jectives derived  therefrom: 

Histoire  de  la  litterature  frangaise,  Novelle  e  racconti  popolari 
italiani,  Antologia  de  poelas  liricos  castellanos,  Svenska  littera- 
turens  historic. 

c)  In  German  and  Danish,  capitalize  all  nouns  but 
not  the  adjectives,  except  German  adjectives  derived 
from  the  names  of  persons: 

Geschichie  des  deutschen  Feudalwesens  (but:  die  Homerische 
Frage),  Videnskabens  Fremskridt  i  del  niUende  Aarhimdrede. 

d)  In  Dutch,  capitalize  all  nouns,  and  all  adjectives 
derived  from  proper  nouns: 

Geschiedenis  der  N ederlandsche  Taal. 

43.  In  mentioning  titles  of  newspapers,  magazines,  and 
similar  publications,  do  not,  as  a  rule,  treat  the 
definite  article  as  part  of  the  title: 

the  Chicago  Tribune,  the  School  Review,  the  Annual  Register 
of  the  University  of  Chicago. 

44.  Titles  of  ancient  manuscripts  (singular,  MS;  plural, 
MSS)  (see  60) : 

Codex  Bemensis,  Cod.  Canonicianus. 

45.  In  titles  with  the  main  words  capitalized,  all  nouns 
forming  parts  of  hyphenated  compounds: 

"Twentieth-Century  Progress,"  "The  Economy  of  High- 
Speed  Trains." 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  components  when  other 
than  nouns: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  21 

Fifty-first  Street,  "Lives  of  Well-known  Authors,"  "World- 
Dominion  of  English-speaking  Peoples." 

And  in  side-heads  do  not  capitalize  any  but  the  first 

word  and  proper  nouns  (see  56  and  172). 

46.  In  botanical,  geological,  zoological,  and  paleon to- 
logical  matter,  the  scientific  (Latin)  names  of  divi- 
sions, orders,  families,  and  genera,  but  not  their 
English  derivatives: 

Cotylosauria,  but:  cotylosaurs;  Felidae,  but:  felids; 
Carnivora,  but:  carnivores. 

Also  in  botanical  and  zoological  matter,  the  names 
of  species,  if  derived  from  names  of  persons,  or 
from  generic  names;  but  in  geological  and  medical 
matter  the  names  of  species  are  never  capitahzed: 
Felis  ho,  Cocos  nucifera,  Rosa  Carolina,  Parkinsonia  Torrey- 
ana,  Siyrax  californica,  Lythrum  hyssopijolia,  Phyieuma 
Halleri,  Carex  Halleriana  (but  [geological]:  Pterygomatopus 
schmidti,  Conodectiis  favosiis) .     (See  71.) 

47.  The  names  and  epithets  of  peoples,  races,  and  tribes: 

Kafir,  Negro  (in  its  ethnic  sense),  Hottentot,  Makassar, 
Buginese,  Celestials. 

48.  In  astronomical  v^^ork,  the  names  of  the  bodies  of 

the  planets,  stars,  and  groups  of  stars  (but  not 

"sun,"  "earth,"   "moon,"  "stars");  designations 

of  celestial  objects  in  well-known  catalogues;  also 

the  Flamsteed  numbers: 

Saturn,  Ursa  Major,  the  Milky  Way,  the  Great  Bear; 
M  13  (for  No.  13  of  Messier 's  Catalogue  oj  Nebulae  and 
Clusters),  Bond  619,  N.G.C.  6165,  B.D.-i8°487i;  85 
Pegasi,  Lalande  5761. 


22  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

49.  Divisions,  departments,  officers,  and  courses  of 
study  of  the  University  of  Chicago,  in  all  official 
work  dealing  with  its  administration  or  curricula: 

(the  University),  the  School  of  Education  (the  School),  the 
University  Extension  Division  (but:  the  division),  the  Depart- 
ment of  Anthropology  (also:  the  Department);  the  Board 
of  Trustees  (the  Trustees,  the  Board),  the  Senate,  the 
Council,  University  College  (also:  the  College),  the  School 
of  Commerce  and  Administration  (also:  the  School),  the 
Faculty  of  the  College  of  Commerce  and  Administration, 
Dean  of  the  Faculties  (also:  the  Faculty);  the  President, 
the  Recorder,  Professor  of  Physics,  Assistant  in  Chemistry, 
Fellow,  Scholar;  the  Van  Husen  Scholarship  (but:  the 
scholarship) ;  courses  in  Political  Economy,  Autumn  Quarter 
(but:  a  quarter).  First  Term  (but:  two  terms;  major,  minor); 
[Hall  (referring  to  the  University  dormitories)]. 

Use  Capitals  and  Small  Capitals  for — 

50.  The  names  of  town  and  state  in  the  date  line,  and 
the  salutatory  phrase  at  the  beginning,  of  letters, 
and  the  signature  and  residence  at  the  end  of  letters 
or  articles,  etc.: 

Chicago,  III.,  January  i,  191 1 

(Set  to  the  right,  with  one  em's  indention,  and  preferably  in 
smaller  type  than  the  body  of  the  letter.) 

My  dear  Mr.  Smith: 

(Set  flush,  followed  by  a  colon,  in  the  same  type  as  the  body 
of  the  letter,  and  in  a  separate  line,  unless  preceded  by 
another  line  giving  the  name  and  address,  in  which  case  it 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  23 

should  be  run  in  with  the  text  of  the  letter,  indented  as  a 
paragraph  [see  64].) 

Charles  W.  Scott 

(Set  to  the  right,  with  one  em's  indention,  and  in  the  same 
type  as  the  body  of  the  letter  or  article.) 

Harvard  University 
Cambridge,  Mass. 
June  7,  1911 
(Set  to  the  left,  with  two  ems'  indention,  in  smaller  type.) 
(Each  line  of  the  address  should  be  in  caps  and  small  caps, 
and  should  be  centered  on  the  one  preceding.     The  date 
should  be  in  caps  and  lower  case,  likewise  centered  on  those 
above.) 

51.  In  resolutions,  the  word  "Whereas"  (see  39);  in 
notes  (not  footnotes),  the  word  "Note,"  which 
should  be  followed  by  a  period  and  a  dash;  in  con- 
stitutions, by-laws,  etc.,  the  word  "Section"  intro- 
ducing paragraphs  and  followed  by  a  number: 

Note. — It  should  be  noticed  that  .... 

Section  i.     This  association  shall  be  styled  .... 

The  usual  practice  is  to  abbreviate  the  word 
"section"  each  time  it  is  used  in  such  a  connection, 
except  the  first: 

Section  i.     The  name  of  the  association    .... 
Sec  2.     The  object  of  the  association   .... 

Set  in  Small  Capitals — 

52.  A.M.  and  P.M.  {ante  and  post  meridiem),  and  B.C. 
and  A.D.  ("before  Christ"  and  anno  Domini);  these 


24  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

should  be  set  without  a  space  between  (see  22, 
103,  106,  219): 

11:30  A.M.;   53  B.C.,  igo6  A.D. 

Use  Small  (i.e.,  "lower-case")  Initial  Letter  for — 

53.  Words  of  common  usage,  originally  proper  names, 
and  their  derivatives  in  whose  present,  generalized 
acceptation  the  origin  has  become  obscured  and 
generally  all  verbs  derived  from  proper  names 
(see  i) : 

Utopia,  bohemian,  philistine,  titanic,  platonic,  quixotic, 
bonanza,  china,  morocco,  guinea-pig,  boycott,  roman  (type), 
italicize,  anglicize,  macadamize,  paris  green. 

54.  In  literary  references  such  minor  subdivisions  and 
their  abbreviations  as — 

chapter,  section,  page,  article,  verse,  line,  note;  chap.,  sec, 
p.,  art.,  vs.,  1.,  n.     (See  37,  no,  and  237.) 

55.  Units  of  measurement  as — 

h.=hour,  min.  =  minute,  sec. = second;  lb. = pound,  oz.= 
ounce;  yd.=yard,  ft.  =  foot;  etc. 

56.  In  side-heads,  all  but  the  first  word  and  proper 
names  (see  172  and  280). 

57.  The  first  word  of  a  quotation  which,  through  a  con- 
junction or  otherwise,  is  immediately  connected  with 
what  precedes,  even  if  such  word  in  the  original 
begins  a  sentence. 

For  illustration  and  exception  see  35  and  131. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  ITALICS  25 


THE  USE  OF  ITALICS 
Italicize — 

58.  Words  or  phrases  to  which  it  is  desired  to  lend 
emphasis,  importance,  etc.: 

"This  was,  however,  not  the  case";  "It  is  sufficiently  plain 
that  the  sciences  of  life,  at  least,  are  studies  of  processes."    . 

59.  Words  and  phrases  from  foreign  languages,  inserted 
into  the  English  text,  and  not  incorporated  into  the 
English  language;  and  also  (as  a  rule)  single  sen- 
tences or  brief  passages  not  of  sufficient  length  to 
call  for  reduced  type  (see  85) : 

"the  Darwinian  Weltanschauung'^ ;  "Napoleon's  coup  d'etat" ; 
"the  debater  par  excellence  of  the  Senate ";  "jDe  gustibus  non 
est  disputandum,  or,  as  the  French  have  it,  Chacun  a  son 
gout." 

But  do  not  italicize  foreign  titles  preceding  names, 
or  names  of  foreign  institutions  or  places  the  meaning 
or  position  of  which  in  English  would  have  required 
roman  type,  and  which  either  are  without  English 
equivalents  or  are  by  preference  used  in  lieu  of  these : 

Pere  Lagrange,  Freiherr  von  Schwenau;  the  German 
Reichstag,  the  Champs  Elysees,  the  Museo  delle  Terme; 

nor  words  of  everyday  occurrence  which  have  become 
sufl&ciently  anglicized,  even  though  still  retaining  the 
accents  of  the  original  language: 


26 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ad  interim 

confrere 

erratum  (plur.  -a) 

addendum 

connoisseur 

et  cetera 

(plur.  -da) 

consensus 

ex  cathedra 

ad  lib[itum] 

contra 

ex  officio 

ad  valorem 

contretemps 

expose 

a  posteriori 

corrigendum 

facade 

a  priori 

(plur.  -da) 

facsimile 

a  propos 

coup  d'etat 

faience 

aide  de  camp 

coup  de  grace 

fete 

alias 

creche 

finis 

alibi 

criterion  (plur.  -a) 

fracas 

Alma  Mater 

cul-de-sac 

garage 

amateur 

datum  (plur.  -a) 

gratis 

anno  Domini 

debris 

Gymnasium 

ante-bellum 

debut 

(German) 

atelier 

decollete 

habeas  corpus 

attache 

delicatessen 

habitue 

au  revoir 

demilune 

hangar 

barrage 

demimonde 

harem 

bas-relief 

demirelievo 

hegira 

beau  ideal 

demi-tasse 

hors  d'oeuvres 

billet  doux 

denouement 

innuendo 

bona  fide 

depot  (  =  deposi- 

lese majeste 

bon  ton 

tory) 

levee 

bouillon 

de  rigueur 

litterateur 

bravo 

detour 

litterati 

bric-a-brac 

dilettante 

Magna  C[h]arta 

cabaret 

divorcee 

mandamus 

cafe 

doctrinaire 

massage 

camouflage 

dramatis  per- 

matador 

cantina 

sonae 

matinee 

canto 

eclat 

melange 

carte  blanche 

elite 

melee 

census 

encore 

menu 

chaperon 

ennui 

milieu 

charge  d'affaires 

en  route 

mitrailleuse 

chauffeur 

ensemble 

motif 

chef  d'oeuvre 

entente 

naive 

chiaroscuro 

entree 

nee 

clef 

entrepot 

net 

clientele 

entrepreneur 

neve 

MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  ITALICS 


27 


pro  and  con[tra] 

seraglio 

proces  verbal 

sobriquet 

pro  rata 

soiree 

protege 

spirituel 

pro  tem[pore] 

stein 

protocol 

subpoena 

questionnaire 

technique 

quondam 

tete-a-tete 

queue 

tonneau 

ragout 

ultimatum 

recto 

umlaut 

regime 

verbatim 

rendezvous 

verso 

resume 

versus  (v.,  vs.) 

reveille 

via 

role 

vice  versa 

sauerkraut 

vis-a-vis 

savant 

vise 

senor 

viva  voce 

niche 

nil 

nol[le]  pros[equi] 

nom  de  plume 

onus 

papier  mache 

paterfamilias 

patois 

per  annum 

per  capita 

per  cent 

per  contra 

per  se 

personnel 

portmonnaic 

postmortem  (n. 

and  adj.) 
post  obit 
prima  facie 

60.  Titles  of  publications — books  (including  plays,  essays, 
cycles  of  poems,  and  single  poems  of  considerable 
length,  usually  printed  separately,  and  not  from  the 
context  understood  to  form  parts  of  a  larger  volume 
[see  81]),  pamphlets,  treatises,  tracts,  documents, 
and  periodicals  (including  regularly  appearing  pro- 
ceedings and  transactions;  and  also  the  name  of  a 
journal  appearing  in  the  journal  itself,  and  the 
word  "journal,"  "review,"  etc.,  standing  alone,  if 
a  part  of  the  name  of  the  publication)  (see  41) ;  and 
in  the  case  of  newspapers,  periodicals,  etc.,  the 
name  of  the  city  (where  published)  when  forming 
an  integral  part  of  the  name : 

Spencer,   Principles    of   Sociology;    A    Midsummer-Night' s 
Dream;    Idylls  of  the  King;    Paradise  Lost;    the  Modern 


28  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Language  Review,  the  Chicago  Tribune,  the  Indianapolis 
Star,  Report  of  the  United  States  Commissioner  of  Education. 

Note. — The  Botanical  Gazette  uses  italics  for  such  titles  in  the 
text  only;  in  footnotes,  roman.  Its  own  name  it  prints  in  caps 
and  small  caps — Botanical  Gazette. 

This  rule  may  be  departed  from  in  lengthy  biblio- 
graphical lists,  in  tables,  or  in  other  matter  where 
to  follow  it  would  result  in  an  undue  preponder- 
ance of  italics  (see  note  to  41). 
Books  of  the  Bible,  both  canonical  and  apocryphal, 
and  titles  of  ancient  manuscripts  should  be  set  in 
roman  type,  as  also  symbols  used  to  designate 
manuscripts  (see  31  and  44) : 
D16,  Mb,  P,  J. 

61.  The  following  words,  phrases,  and  abbreviations 
used  in  literary  and  legal  references: 

ad  loc,  circa  (ca.),  et  al.,  ibid.,  idem,  infra,  lac.  cit.,  op.  cii., 
passim,  sic,  sc,  supra,  s.v.,  vide. 

But  do  not  italicize — 

cf.,  e.g.,  i.e.,  V.  or  vs.  (versus)   (unless  ambiguity  would 
result),  viz.,  etc. 

62.  The  words  See  and  See  also,  v/hen  used  in  an  index 
or  similar  compilation,  for  the  purpose  of  a  cross- 
reference,  where  the  differentiation  of  those  words 
from  the  context  is  desirable ;  and  the  words  for 
and  read  in  lists  of  errata,  to  separate  them  from 
the  incorrect  and  correct  readings: 

See  also  Sociology;  for  levee  read  levee. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  ITALICS  29 

63.  The  names  of  plaintiff  and  defendant  in  the  citation 
of  legal  causes;  also  the  titles  of  proceedings  con- 
taining such  prefixes  as  in  re,  ex  parte,  and  in  the 
matter  of,  etc.: 

Conolly  V.  Union  Sewer  Pipe  Co.;  In  re  Smith;  Ex  parte 
Brown;  In  the  matter  of  the  petition  0}  Henry  Robinson  for  a 
writ  of  habeas  corpus. 

64.  Address  lines  in  speeches,  reports,  etc.,  and  primary 
address  lines  in  letters  (set  flush,  in  a  separate  line, 
with  nouns  capitalized  [see  50]) : 

Mr.  President,  Ladies  and  Gentlemen: 
Mr.  John  Smith,  j2i  Dearborn  Street,  Chicago,  III. 
Dear  Sir:  I  take  pleasure  in  announcing  .... 

65.  In  signatures,  the  position  or  title  added  after  the 
name.  If  this  consists  of  only  one  word,  it  is  run  into 
the  same  line  with  the  name;  if  of  more  than  one, 
but  no  longer  than  the  name,  center  the  first  letter 
under  the  name  line,  and  indent  one  em  on  the 
right;  if  longer  than  the  name,  center  the  name  over 
the  second  line  and  set  this  flush.  These  rules  are, 
however,  subject  to  the  exigencies  of  special  cases: 

Arthitr  p.  Maguire,  Secretary 

Yours  very  truly, 

Carter  H.  Harrison 

Mayor  of  Chicago 

Charles  M.  Gayley 
Professor  of  English  Language  and  Literature 


30  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

66.  a),  b),  c),  etc.,  used  to  indicate  subdivisions  (single 
parenthesis  if  beginning  a  paragraph,  double  paren- 
theses if  "run  in");  and  a,  b,  c,  etc.,  affixed  to  the 
number  of  verse,  page,  etc.,  to  denote  fractional  part: 
Luke  4:31a. 

67.  Letters  used  to  designate  unknov^^n  quantities,  lines, 
etc.,  in  algebraic,  geometrical,  and  similar  matter: 
ac+bc=c{a  +  b);   the  lines  at/ and /I  Z);  the  «th  power. 

68.  As  a  rule,  letters  in  legends  or  in  the  text  referring 
to  corresponding  letters  in  accompanying  illustra- 
tions: 

"At  the  point  A  above  (see  diagram)." 

69.  References  to  particular  letters: 

the  letter  u,  a  small  v,  a  capital  5". 

70.  s.Sindd.  (  =  shillings  and  pence)  following  numerals: 
35.  6d.     (See  270.) 

71.  In  zoological,  geological,  and  paleontological  mat- 
ter, scientific  (Latin)  names  of  genera  and  species 
when  used  together,  the  generic  name  being  in  the 
nominative  singular: 

Felis    leo,    Rosa    Carolina,    Conodectes  favosus,   Phyteuma 
Halleri.     (See  46,  48.) 

In  botanical,  geological,  and  paleontological  matter 
the  names  of  genera  and  species  when  used  together, 
and  of  genera,  only,  when  used  alone: 
Acer  saccharum,  Basidiobolus,  AUernaria,  Erythrosuchus. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  ITALICS  3 1 

In  medical  matter,  however,  the  general  practice 
is  to  print  such  names  in  roman,  avoiding  italics 
altogether. 

In  astronomical  and  astrophysical  matter: 

a)  The  lower-case  letters  designating  certain 
Fraunhof er  lines : 

a,  b,  g,  h. 

b)  The  lower-case  letters  used  by  Baeyer  to  desig- 
nate certain  stars  in  constellations  for  which  the 
Greek  letters  have  been  exhausted: 

/  Tauri,  u  Herculis. 

c)  When  initials  are  used  to  express  the  titles  of 
catalogues,  as  such,  and  not  to  designate  a 
particular  celestial  object,  such  initials  are  to  be 
italicized  (see  48,  60) : 

B.D.,N.G.C. 

In  accordance  with  the  best  modern  practice, 
italics  should  no  longer  be  used  for: 

a)  Symbols  for  the  chemical  elements: 
H,  Ca,  Ti. 

b)  The  capital  letters  given  by  Fraunhofer  to 
spectral  hnes : 

A-H,  and  K. 

c)  The  letters  designating  the  spectral  types  of 
stars : 

As,  B4,  Mb. 


32  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

d)  The  capital  letter  H  with  different  Greek  letters, 
used  to  designate  the  various  lines  of  hydrogen: 
Ha,  H(S,  etc. 

72.  In  resolutions,  the  word  "Resolved.''     (See  39.) 

73.  After  headlines  or  titles,  as  a  rule,  the  word  "Con- 
tinued"; and  "To  be  continued"  at  the  end  of  articles 
(see  179): 

THE  SCOPE  OF  SOCIOLOGY— Cow^mMe^i 

\To  be  continued] 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  QUOTATIONS  33 


QUOTATIONS 

Put  between  Quotation  Marks  (and  in  roman  type — 
i.e.,  "  roman-quote  ") — 

74.  Citations,  run  into  the  text,  of  a  passage  from  an 
author  in  his  own  words  (see  85) . 

75.  Quotations  from  ditlerent  authors,  or  from  different 
works  by  the  same  author,  following  each  other, 
uninterrupted  by  any  intervening  original  matter,  or 
by  any  reference  to  their  respective  sources  (other 
than  a  reference  figure  for  a  footnote) ,  even  though 
such  quotations  are  reduced  (see  85-87) . 

76.  A  word  or  phrase  accompanied  by  its  definition: 
"Drop-folio"  means  a  page-number  at  the  foot  of  the  page. 

77.  An  unusual,  technical,  ironical,  etc.,  word  or  phrase 
in  the  text,  whether  or  not  accompanied  by  a  word, 
like  "so-called,"  directing  attention  to  it: 

'Her  "five  o'clocks"  were  famous  in  the  neighborhood;  She 
was  wearing  a  gown  of  "lobster-colored"  silk;  He  was  elected 
"master  of  the  rolls";  We  then  repaired  to  what  he  called 
his  "quarter  deck";  A  "lead"  is  then  inserted  between  the 
lines;  This  so-called  "man  of  affairs." 

78.  In  translations,  the  English  equivalent  of  a  word, 
phrase,  or  passage  from  a  foreign  language : 

Weltanschauung,   "world-view"  or  "fundamental  aspect  of 
life";  Mommsen,  Romische  Geschichte  ("History  of  Rome"). 


34  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

79.  The  particular  word  or  words  to  which  attention  is 

directed : 

the  term  "lynch  law";  the  phrase  "liberty  of  conscience"; 
the  concepts  "good"  and  "bad";   the  name  "Chicago." 

80.  Titles  of  book  series: 

"English  Men  of  Letters  Series";  "International  Critical 
Commentary";  the  series  "Handbooks  of  Ethics  and 
Religion." 

81.  Titles  of  shorter  poems  (see  60): 
Shelley's  "To  a  Skylark." 

82.  Cited  titles  of  subdivisions  (e.g.,  parts,  books,  chap- 
ters, etc.)  of  publications;  titles  of  papers,  lectures, 
sermons,  articles,  toasts,  mottoes,  etc.: 

The  Beginnings  of  the  Science  of  Political  Economy,  Vol.  I, 
"The  British  School,"  chap,  ii,  "John  Stuart  Mill";  the 
articles  "Cross,"  "Crucifixion,"  and  "Crusade"  in  Hast- 
ings' Dictionary  of  the  Bible;  The  subject  of  the  lecture  was 
"Japan — Its  Past,  Present,  and  Future";  the  next  toast  on 
the  program  was  "Our  Canadian  Visitor";  The  king's 
motto  is  "For  God  and  My  Country." 

Note. — The  Botanical   Gazette,    in   footnotes,    does   not    use 
quotation  marks  for  such  titles. 

References  to  the  Preface,  Introduction,  Table  of 

Contents,  Index,  etc.,  of  a  specific  work,  should  be 

set  with  capitals,  without  quotation  marks: 

Preface,  p.  iii;  "The  Introduction  contains  ....";  "The 
Appendix  occupies  a  hundred  pages";  but:  "The  book  has 
a  very  complete  index." 

83.  Names  of  ships: 

the  U.S.  SS.  "Oregon." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  QUOTATIONS  35 

84.  Titles  of  pictures  and  works  of  art : 
Murillo's  "The  Holy  Family." 

Set  in  Smaller  Type — 

85.  Ordinarily,  all  prose  extracts  which  will  make  five 
or  more  lines  in  the  smaller  type,  and  all  poetry 
citations  of  two  lines  or  more.  An  isolated  prose 
quotation,  even  though  its  length  would  bring  it 
under  this  rule,  may  properly  be  run  into  the  text,  if 
it  bears  an  organic  relation  to  the  argument  pre- 
sented. On  the  other  hand,  a  quotation  of  one  or 
two  lines  which  is  closely  preceded  or  followed  by 
longer  extracts,  set  in  smaller  type,  may  likewise  be 
reduced,  as  a  matter  of  uniform  appearance. 

86.  As  a  rule,  reduce  from  ii-pt.  and  lo-pt.  to  9-pt., 
from  9-pt.  to  8-pt.,  from  8-pt.  to  6-pt.  (see  252). 

87.  Reduced  citations  should  not  have  quotation  marks, 
except  in  such  cases  as  noted  in  75;  nor  should 
quotation  marks,  as  a  rule,  be  used  in  connection 
with  italics. 

General  Rules — 

88.  Quotation  marks  should  always  include  ellipses,  and 

the  phrase  "etc."  when  it  otherwise  would  not  be 

clear  that  it  stands  for  an  omitted  part  of  the  matter 

quoted,   perfect  clearness  in  each  individual  case 

being  the  best  criterion: 

"Art.  II,  sec.  2,  of  the  Constitution  provides  that  'each  state 
shall  appoint  ....  a  number  of  electors  equal  to  the  whole 
number  of  senators  and  representatives  .  .  .  .'";   "He  also 


36  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

wrote  a  series  of  'Helps  to  Discovery,  etc.'" — "etc."  here 
indicating,  not  that  he  wrote  other  works  which  are  unnamed, 
but  that  the  title  of  the  one  named  is  not  given  in  full;  but, 
on  the  other  hand:    "Preaching  from  the  text,  'For  God  so 

loved    the   world,'    etc " — "etc."    here   being  placed 

outside  of  the  quotation  marks  in  order  to  show  that  it  does 
not  stand  for  other,  unnamed,  objects  of  God's  love. 

89.  Quoted  prose  matter  (i.e.,  matter  set  with  quotation 
marks;  see  above)  which  is  broken  up  into  para- 
graphs should  have  the  quotation  marks  repeated 
at  the  beginning  of  each  paragraph. 

90.  Where  ahgnment  is  desired,   the  quotation  marks 

should  be  "cleared" — i.e.,  should   project  beyond 

the  line  of  alignment: 

"Keep  away  from  dirtiness — keep  away  from  mess. 
Don't  get  into  doin'  things  rather-more-or-less ! " 

91.  Double  quotation  marks  are  used  for  primary  quota- 
tions; for  a  quotation  within  a  quotation,  single; 
going  back  to  double  for  a  third,  to  single  for  a 
fourth,  and  so  on : 

"Let  me  quote  from  Rossetti's  Lije  of  Keats,'"  he  said. 
"Mr.  Rossetti  writes  as  follows: 

"'To  one  of  these  phrases  a  few  words  of  comment  may 
be  given.  That  axiom  which  concludes  the  "Ode  on  a 
Grecian  Urn" — 

"'"Beauty  is  truth,  truth  beauty — that  is  all 
Ye  know  on  earth,  and  all  ye  need  to  know," 
is  perhaps  the  most  important  contribution  to  thought 
which  the  poetry  of  Keats  contains:    it  pairs  with  and 
transcends 

"'"A  thing  of  beauty  is  a  joy  forever."' 

"And  now  I  shall  conclude  my  first  point,"  he  continued, 
"by  remarking  that  .  .  .  ." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   SPELLING  .   37 


SPELLLNTG 

Spell  out — 

92.  All  religious,  civil,  and  military  titles  of  honor  and 
respect,  and  forms  of  address,  preceding  the  name, 
except  Mr.,  Messrs.,  Mrs.  (French:  M.,  MM., 
Mme,  Mile),  Dr.,  Rev.,  Hon.,  St.  {do  not,  except 
in  quotations  and  in  correspondence,  set  the  Rev., 
the  Hon.);  Esq.,  following  the  name,  should  like- 
wise always  be  abbreviated. 

93.  Christian  names,  as  George,  Charles,  John  (not: 
Geo.,  Chas.,  Jno.),  except  where  the  abbreviated 
form  is  used  in  quoted  matter  or  in  original  signa- 
tures; and  "von"  as  part  of  a  person's  name  (see 
240). 

94.  Subject  to  the  exceptions  named  at  the  end  of  this 
section,  in  ordinary  reading-matter,  all  numbers  of 
less  than  three  digits,  unless  of  a  statistical  or 
technical  character,  or  unless  occurring  in  groups 
of  six  or  more  following  each  other  in  close  succes- 
sion: 

"There  are  thirty-eight  cities  in  the  United  States  with  a 
population  of  100,000  or  over";  "a  fifty-yard  dash";  "two 
pounds  of  sugar";  "Four  horses,  sixteen  cows,  seventy-six 
sheep,  and  a  billy  goat  constituted  the  livestock  of  the  farm"; 
"He  spent  a  total  of  two  years,  three  months,  and  seventeen 
days  in  jail."  But:  "He  spent  128  days  in  the  hospital"; 
"a  board  20  feet  2  inches  long  by  I2  feet  wide  and  ij  inches 


38  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

thick";  "the  ratio  of  i6  to  i";  "In  some  quarters  of  Paris, 
inhabited  by  wealthy  families,  the  death-rate  is  i  to  every  65 
persons;  in  others,  inhabited  by  the  poor,  it  is  i  to  15";  "His 
purchase  consisted  of  2  pounds  of  sugar,  20  pounds  of  flour, 
I  pound  of  coffee,  |  pound  of  tea,  3  pounds  of  meat,  and 
i^  pounds  of  fish,  besides  2  pecks  of  potatoes  and  a  pint  of 
vinegar." 

Treat  all  numbers  in  connected  groups  alike,  as  far 
as  possible;  do  not  use  figures  for  some  and  spell  out 
others;  if  the  largest  contains  three  or  more  digits, 
use  figures  for  all  (see  96) : 

"The  force  employed  during  the  three  months  was  87,  93, 
and  106,  respectively." 

As  a  general  rule,  however,  decimals,  degrees, 
dimensions,  distances,  enumerations,  money,  per- 
centage, weights,  and  like  matter  should  be 
expressed  in  figures: 

10°,  45  miles,  3  cubic  feet,  24  pages,  100  bushels,  9  per  cent 
(see  123),  45  pounds,  $1,000,  etc. 

95.  Round  numbers  (i.e.,  approximate  figures  in  even 
units,  the  unit  being  100  in  numbers  of  less  than 
1,000,  and  1,000  in  numbers  of  more) : 

"The  attendance  was  estimated  at  five  hundred"  (but:  "at 
550");  "a  thesis  of  about  three  thousand  words"  (but:  "of 
about  2,700");  "The  population  of  Chicago  is  approximately 
two  millions"  (but:  "1,900,000").  Cases  like  1,500,  if  for 
some  special  reason  spelled  out,  should  be  written  "fifteen 
hundred,"  not  "one  thousand  five  hundred." 

96.  All  numbers,  no  matter  how  high,  commencing  a 
sentence  in  ordinary  reading-matter: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  SPELLING  39 

"Five  hundred  and  ninety-three  men,  417  women,  and  126 
children  under  eighteen,  besides  63  of  the  crew,  went  down 
with  the  ship." 

When  this  is  impracticable,  or  for  any  reason  unde- 
sirable, reconstruct  the  sentence;   e.g.: 

"The  total  number  of  those  who  went  down  with  the  ship 
was  593  men,"  etc. 

97.  Sums  of  money,  when  occurring  in  isolated  cases  in 
ordinary  reading-matter : 

"The  admission  was  two  dollars." 

When  several  such  numbers  occur  close  together,  and 
in  all  matter  of  a  statistical  character,  use  figures: 
"Admission:  men,  $2;  women,  $1;  children,  25  cents." 

98.  Time  of  day,  in  ordinary  reading-matter: 

at  four;  at  half-past  two  in  the  afternoon;  at  seven  o'clock. 
Statistically,  in  enumerations,  and  always  in  connec- 
tion with  A.M.  and  p.m.,  use  figures: 
at  4: 15  P.M.  (omit  "o'clock"  in  such  connections). 

99.  Ages: 

eighty  years  and  four  months  old;  children  between  six  and 
fourteen. 

100.  Numbers  of  centuries,  of  Egyptian   dynasties,  of 

sessions  of  Congress,  of  military  bodies,  of  political 

divisions,  of  thoroughfares,  and  in  all  similar  cases, 

unless  brevity  is  an  important  consideration  (see 

7,  8,  and  13) : 

nineteenth  century;  Fifth  Dynasty;  Fifty-fourth  Congress, 
second  session;  Fifteenth  Infantry  I.N.G. ;  Sixth  Con- 
gressional District,  Second  Ward;   Fifth  Avenue. 


40  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

10 1.  References  to  particular  decades: 
in  the  nineties  (see  165). 

102.  Names  of  months,  except  in  statistical  matter  or  in 
long  enumerations: 

from  January  i  to  April  15  (omit,  after  dates,  st,  d,  and  ih). 

103.  "United  States,"  except  in  quotations  and  such  con- 
nections as:  General  Schofield,  U.S.A.;  U.S.  SS. 
"Oregon";  in  footnotes  and  similar  references:  U.S. 
Geological  Survey  (see  22,  52,  106). 

104.  "Railroad  (-way),"  and  "Fort,"  "Mount,"  and 
"Port"  in  geographical  appellations  (see  4): 

Chicago,  Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul  Railroad  (not:  R.R.  or  Ry.); 
Fort  Wayne,  Mount  Elias,  Port  Huron. 

105.  In  most  cases,  all  names  of  publications.  This  rule, 
like  many  another,  is  open  to  modification  in  particu- 
lar instances,  for  which  no  directions  can  here  be 
given.  Expediency,  nature  of  context,  authoritative 
usage,  and  author's  preference  are  some  of  the  points 
to  be  considered.  Generally,  if  in  doubt,  spell  out; 
good  taste  will  condone  offenses  in  this  direction 
more  readily  than  in  the  opposite. 

Abbreviate — 

106.  Names  of  states,  territories,  and  possessions  of  the 
United  States  following  those  of  towns,  as  follows, 
without  space  between  the  letters  of  abbrevia- 
tions (see  22,  52,  103),  when  mentioned  in  lists, 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   SPELLING 


41 


bibliographical  matter,  etc.,  but  not  ordinarily  in 
text-matter: 


Ala. 

Iowa 

Neb. 

Samoa 

Alaska 

Kan. 

Nev. 

S.C. 

Ariz. 

Ky. 

N.H. 

S.D. 

Ark. 

La. 

N.J. 

Tenn. 

Cal. 

Me. 

N.M. 

Tex. 

Colo. 

Mass. 

N.Y. 

T.H.  =  Territory 

Conn. 

Md. 

Ohio 

of  Hawaii 

D.C. 

Mich. 

Okla. 

Utah 

Del. 

Minn. 

Ore. 

Vt. 

Fla. 

Miss. 

Pa. 

Va. 

Ga. 

Mo. 

P.I.= 

■■  Philippine 

Wash. 

Idaho 

Mont. 

Islands 

Wis. 

lU. 

N.C. 

P.R.= 

=  Porto  Rico  W.Va. 

Ind. 

N.D. 

R.I. 

Wyo. 

107.  In  technical  matter  (footnote  references,  bibliogra- 
phies, etc.),  "Company"  and  "Brothers,"  and  the 
word  "and"  (&  =" short  and"  or  " ampersand ") ,  in 
names  of  commercial  firms: 

The  Macmillan  Co.,  Macmillan  &  Co.,  Harper  Bros.; 
Chicago,  Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul  Railroad. 

In  text-matter,  not  of  a  technical  character,  "  Com- 
pany "  and  "  Brothers"  may,  however,  be  spelled  out: 
"Harper  Brothers  have  recently  published  .  .  .  .";  "The 
Century  Company  announces  ....";  "The  extraordinary 
story  of  the  South  Sea  Company." 

And  when  the  name  of  a  commercial  concern  does 
not  consist  of  proper  names,  the  "and"  should  be 
spelled  out: 
American  Steel  and  Wire  Co. 

108.  "Saint"  before  a  name: 

St.  Louis,  St.  Peter's  Church,  SS.  Peter  and  Paul. 


42 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


109. 


"St."  should,  however,  preferably  be  omitted  in 
connection  with  the  names  of  apostles,  evangelists, 
and  church  fathers: 
Luke,  Paul,  Augustine;   not:    St.  Luke,  St.  Paul,  etc. 

In  references  to  Scripture  passages,  the  books  of 
the  Bible  and  of  the  Apocrypha,  and  versions  of  the 
Bible  commonly  referred  to,  as  follows: 


OLD   TESTAMENT 

Gen. 

Esther 

Hos. 

Exod. 

Job 

Joel 

Lev. 

Ps.  (Pss.) 

Amos 

Num. 

Prov. 

Obad. 

Deut. 

Eccles. 

Jonah 

Josh. 

Song  of  Sol.  (or 

Mic. 

Judg. 

Cant.) 

Nah. 

Ruth 

Isa. 

Hab. 

I  and  II  Sam. 

Jer. 

Zeph. 

I  and  II  Kings 

Lam. 

Hag. 

I  and  II  Chron. 

Ezek. 

Zech. 

Ezra 

Dan. 

Mai. 

Neh. 

NEW   TESTAMENT 

Matt. 

Gal. 

Philem. 

Mark 

Eph. 

Heb. 

Luke 

Phil. 

Jas. 

John 

Col. 

I  and  II  Pet. 

Acts 

I  and  II  Thess. 

I,  II,  and  III  John 

Rom. 

I  and  II  Tim. 

Jude 

I  and  II  Cor. 

Titus 

APOCRYPHA    (aPOC.) 

Rev. 

I  and  II  Esd. 

Wisd.  of  Sol. 

Sus. 

Tob.  =  Tobit 

Ecclus. 

Bel  and  Dragon 

Jth.= Judith 

Bar. 

Pr.  of  Man. 

Rest  of  Esther 

Song  of  Three 

I,  II,  III,  and  IV 

Children 

Mace. 

MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  SPELLING  43 

VERSIONS    OF   THE   BIBLE   COMMONLY   REFERRED    TO 

A.V.         =  Authorized  Version. 

R.V.         =  Revised  Version. 

R.V.m.     =  Revised  Version,  margin. 

A. R.V.      =  American  Standard  Revised  Version. 

A.R.V.m.  =  American  Standard  Revised  Version,  margin. 

E.R.V.      =  English  Revised  Version. 

E.R.V.m.  =  English  Revised  Version,  margin. 

E.V.  =  English  Version(s)  of  the  Bible. 

Vulg.        =  Vulgate. 

LXX        =Septuagint. 

no.  In  literary  references,  in  footnotes  and  matter  of  a 
bibliographical  character,  "volume,"  "number," 
"psalm,"  "division,"  "chapter,"  "article,"  "sec- 
tion," "page,"  "column,"  "verse,"  "line,"  "note," 
"figure,"  followed  by  their  number  (see  37  and 
237);  and  the  word  "following"  after  the  number 
■to  denote  continuance: 

Vol.  I  (plural.  Vols.),  No.  i  (Nos.),  Ps.  20  (Pss.),  Div.  Ill, 
chap,  ii  (chaps.),  art.  iii  (arts.),  sec.  4  (sees.),  p.  5  (pp.), 
col.  6  (cols.),  vs.  7  (vss.),  1.  8  (11.),  n.  9  (nn.),  Fig.  7  (Figs.); 
PP-  5~7  (  =  pages  5  to  7  inclusive),  pp.  sf.  (  =  page  5  and  the 
following  page),  pp.  5  ff.  (==page  5  and  the  following 
pages);   ed(d).     (  =  edition[s]). 

III.  The  common  designations  of  weights  and  measures 
in  the  metric  system,  as  well  as  the  symbols  of  meas- 
urement in  common  use,  when  following  a  numeral: 
I  m.,  2  dm.,  3  cm.,  4  mm.;  cm.  (=cubic  meter),  c.d.,  c.c, 
c.mm.;  sq.  mi.  (  =  square  mile);  gm.  (  =  gram);  gr. 
(  =  grain);  h.  (  =  hour),  min.  (  =  minute),  sec.  (  =  second); 
lb.  (  =  pound),  oz.  (  =  ounce);  yd.,  ft.,  in.;  kg.  (  =  kilogram), 
kw.  (  =  kilowatt);  mg.  (  =  milligram);  mag.  (  =  magnitude), 
A  (  =  angstrom  units),  h.p.  (  =  horse-power),  C.  (  =  Centi- 
grade), F.  (=  Fahrenheit),  etc.     (See  123.) 


44 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


The  following  is  a  list  of  the  standard  abbreviations  for 
technical  values,  recommended  by  the  American  Insti- 
tute of  Electrical  Engineers: 


alternating  current   . 

a-c.  (when  used  as  a  compound 

adjective;  otherwise  spell  out) 

brake  horse-power    . 

b.h.p. 

boiler  horse-power 

boiler  h.p. 

British  thermal  units 

B.t.u. 

candle-power 

c-p. 

centimeters 

cm. 

circular  mils  . 

cir.  mils 

counter  electromotive 

force      .... 

counter  e.m.f. 

cubic 

cu. 

direct  current 

d-c.  (when  used  as  a  compound 

adjective;  otherwise  spell  out) 

electric  horse-power 

e.h.p. 

electromotive  force  . 

e.m.f. 

feet 

ft. 

foot-pounds    . 

ft-lb. 

gallons 

gal. 

grains 

gr- 

grams 

g.  or  gm. 

gram-calories 

g-cal. 

hours  . 

hr. 

inches 

in. 

indicated  horse-power 

i.h.p. 

kilograms 

kg. 

kilogram-meters 

kg-m. 

kilogram-calories 

kg-cal. 

kilometers 

km. 

kilowatts  .... 

kw. 

kilowatt-hours 

kw-hr. 

magnetomotive  force 

m.m.f. 

miles  per  hour  (second) 

m.p.hr.  (sec.) 

millimeters 

mm. 

milligrams 

nig. 

minutes     .... 

min. 

meters       .... 

m. 

meter-kilograms 

m-kg. 

i 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  SPELLING  45 

pounds lb. 

revolutions  per  minute  .  rev.  per  min.,  or  r.p.m. 

seconds sec. 

square sq. 

square-root-of-mean- 

square effective,  or  r.m.s. 

kilovolts kv. 

kilovolt-amperes  .  kv-a. 

watt-hours      ....  watt-hr. 

watts  per  candle-power  watts  per  c-p. 

yards yd. 

Note. — In  the  case  of  hyphenated  abbreviations,  the  first  ele- 
ment of  the  compound  does  not  take  a  period. 

General  Rules — 

112.  In  extracts  from  modern  authors  whose  speUing  and 
punctuation  differ  but  shghtly  from  ours,  and  where 
such  variations  do  not  affect  the  meaning,  use  office 
style.  In  citations  from  Old  English  works,  and 
in  cases  where  it  appears  to  be  essential  to  the 
writer's  plan  or  the  requirements  of  the  context  to 
give  a  faithful  rendering,  follow  the  original  copy. 
Titles  should  always  be  accurately  quoted. 

113.  Form  the  possessive  of  proper  names  ending  in  5  or 
another  sibilant,  if  monosyllabic,  by  adding  an 
apostrophe  and  s;  if  of  more  than  one  syllable,  by 
adding  an  apostrophe  only,  except  names  ending 
in  -ce  (see  165) : 

King  James's  Version,  Bums's  poems,  Marx's  theories; 
Moses'  law,  Jesus'  birth,  Demosthenes'  orations,  Berlioz' 
compositions;  Horace's  odes. 

But  in  the  case  of  proper  names  ending  in  a  silent 
sibilant,  the  possessive  is  formed  by  the  addition 


46  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


of   the   apostrophe   and  s,   whether   the  word  is 

monosyllabic  or  not: 

Charlevoix's  discoveries,  Des  Moines's  population. 

114.  Before  sounded  h,  long  u  (or  eu),  and  the  words 
"one,"  "once,"  use  "a"  as  the  form  of  the  indefinite 
article : 

a  hotel,  a  harmonic  rendition,  a  historical  work,  a  union, 
a  euphonious  word,  such  a  one. 

115.  The  ligatures  (b  and  ce  are  not  used  at  the  present 
day,  either  in  Latin  and  Greek  words,  or  in  words 
adopted  into  English  from  these  languages.  In 
Enghsh  these  words  are  written  either  with  ae,  oe, 
separately,  or  with  e  alone.  The  ligature  is  re- 
tained, however,  in  Old  English  and  in  French: 

aetas;  "    Oedipus     Tyrannus;      aesthetic;      (but:     oeuvre, 
French);   but:  maneuver;   Alfred  (Alfred  in  English). 

116.  Differentiate  "farther"  and  "further"  by  using  the 
former  in  the  sense  of  "more  remote,"  "at  a  greater 
distance";  the  latter  in  the  sense  of  "moreover," 
"in  addition": 

the  farther  end;  he  went  still  farther;  further,  he  suggested;  a 
further  reason. 

117.  In  forms  of  address  (vocative)  use  the  "O"  without 
a  comma  following;  for  an  exclamation  use  "Oh," 
followed  by  a  comma  or  an  exclamation  point 
(see  40) : 

"O  thou  most  mighty  ruler!"     "Oh,  why  did  not  Cerberus 
drag  me  back  to  hell  ?" 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  SPELLING 


47 


ii8. 


The  following  participles  retain  the  final  e  in  the 

primary  word: 

agreeing  hieing  singeing 

dyeing  hoeing  tingeing 

eyeing  shoeing  vieing 

The  following  participles  illustrate  those  that  omit 
the  e  before  the  terminal : 


abridging 

acknowledging 

aging 

arguing 

awing 

biting 

bluing 

changing 


119.  Spell: 


encouragnig 

fihng 

firing 

glazing 

gluing 

grudging 

icing 

issuing 


abridgment 
accouter 
acknowledgment 
adz 
aegis 
Aeolian 
aesthetic 
afterward 
almanac 
ambassador 
amid 
among 
anemia 
appareled 
appendixes 
(of  book) 
arbor 

archaeology 
ardor 
armor 
ascendancy 
ascendent 
Athenaeum 


aye 

backward 

bark  (vessel) 

barreled 

bazaar 

Beduin 

behavior 

biased 

blessed 

bowlder 

burned 

caesura 

cahber 

canceled 

candor 

cannoneer 

canyon 

carcass 

caroled 

castor  (roller) 

caviier 

center 


judging 

mistaking 

moving 

organizing 

owing 

trudging 

truing 


check 

chiseled 

chlorid 

chock-full 

clamor 

clinch 

clue 

coeval 

color 

controller' 

cotiUion 

councilor 

counselor 

cozy 

cue 

defense 

demarcation 

demeanor 

descendant  (n.) 

dieresis 

diarrhea 

disheveled 

disk 


dispatch 

distil 

downward 

draft 

drought 

dueler 

dulness 

dwelt 

embitter 

emir 

employee 

encyclopedic 

endeavor 

enfold 

engulf 

enrol 

ensnare 

envelope  (n.) 

enwrapped 

equaled 

Eskimo 

exhibitor 

fantasy 


'  In  official  publications  of  the  University  of  Chicago  "comptroller." 


48 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


favor 

indorse 

nearby  (adj.) 

salable 

fetid 

ingraft 

neighbor 

Savior 

fetish 

instal  (installed) 

niter 

savor 

fetus 

instil  (instilled) 

odor 

scepter 

fiber 

insure 

offense 

sepulcher 

flavor 

intrench 

one's  self 

skepticism 

fluorid 

intrust 

outward 

skilful 

focused 

inward 

oxid 

smolder 

forward 

jeweled 

paean 

specter 

fulfU  (fulfilled) 

Judea 

paleography 

staunch 

fulness 

judgment 

paleontology 

steadfast 

gaiety 

katabolism 

Paleozoic 

subtle 

Galilean 

kidnaper 

paneled 

succor 

gild  (to  cover 

Koran 

paraffin 

sumac 

with  gold) 

labeled 

parceled 

syrup 

gipsy 

labor 

parole 

taboo 

glamor 

lacquer 

parquet 

talc 

glycerin 

leukocyte 

partisan 

technique' 

goodbye 

leveled 

peddler 

theater 

graveled 

libeled 

penciled 

thraldom 

gray 

liter 

Phoenix 

thrash 

Greco-Roman 

loath 

pigmy 

tormentor 

gruesome 

lodgment 

plow 

toward 

guarantee  (v.) 

Lukan 

practice 

trammeled 

guaranty  (n.) 

maneuver 

(n.  and  v.) 

tranquilize 

guild  (an  organi- 

Markan 

pretense 

tranquillity 

zation) 

marshaled 

primeval 

traveler 

hamartiology 

marvelous 

program 

trousers 

harbor 

meager 

quarreled 

truncated 

hematoxylin 

mediaeval 

raveled 

upward 

hemorrhage 

meter 

reconnoiter 

vapor 

Hindu 

miter 

reinforce 

vendor 

honor 

modeled 

rencounter 

vigor 

imbed 

Mohammedan 

reverie 

while 

impaneled 

mold 

rhjone 

whiskey 

imperiled 

molder 

rigor 

wilful 

incase 

molt 

rivaled 

woeful 

inclose 

moneyed 

riveted 

woolen 

incrust 

moneys 

ruble 

workingman 

incumbrance 

movable 

rumor 

worshiper 

indexes  (of  book) 

1  mustache 

saber 

Note. — Make  one  word  of  "anyone,"  "everyone,"  "today," 
"tomorrow,"  "tonight,"  "cannot"  (see  204).  Distinguish 
between  "sometimes"  and  "some  time(s),"  "someone" 
and  "some  one  (or  more)  of  the  number."  Use  the  form 
"someone  else's." 
In  medical  work  more  generally  spelled  "technic." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  SPELLING 


49 


120.  Differentiate  between  the  terminations  -ise  and  -ize 
as  follows: 


SPELL  WITH  -ise 


advertise 

compromise 

excise 

premise 

advise 

demise 

exercise 

reprise 

affranchise 

despise 

exorcise 

revise 

apprise  (to 

devise 

franchise 

rise 

inform) 

disfranchise 

improvise 

supervise 

arise 

disguise 

incise 

surmise 

chastise 
circumcise 

emprise 
enfranchise 

manuprise 
merchandise 

surprise 

comprise 

enterprise 

aggrandize 
agonize 
analyze 
anatomize 
anglicize 
apologize 
apostrophize 
apprize  (to 
appraise) 
authorize 
autolyze 
baptize 
brutalize 
canonize 
catechize 
catholicize 
cauterize 
centralize 
characterize 
Christianize 
civilize 
classicize 
colonize 
criticize 
crystallize 
demoralize 
deputize 
dogmatize 


SPELL  WITH  -ize  {-yze) 
dramatize 


economize 

emphasize 

energize 

epitomize 

equalize 

eulogize 

evangelize 

extemporize 

familiarize 

fertilize 

fossilize 

fraternize 

gah^anize 

generalize 

gormandize 

harmonize 

hellenize 

humanize 

immortalize 

italicize 

jeopardize 

legalize 

liberalize 

localize 

magnetize 

manumize 

memorialize 


mercerize 

mesmerize 

metamorphize 

methodize 

minimize 

modernize 

monopolize 

moralize 

nationalize 

naturalize 

neutralize 

organize 

ostracize 

oxidize 

paralyze 

particularize 

pasteurize 

patronize 

philosophize 

plagiarize 

polarize 

professionalize 

protestantize 

pulverize 

realize 

recognize 

reorganize 


revolutionize 

satirize 

scandalize 

scrutinize 

signalize 

solemnize 

soliloquize 

specialize 

spiritualize 

standardize 

stigmatize 

subsidize 

summarize 

syllogize 

symbolize 

sympathize 

tantalize 

temporize 

tranquilize 

tyrannize 

utilize 

vaporize 

visualize 

vitalize 

vocalize 

vulcanize 

vulgarize 


50  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


PUNCTUATION 

121.  All  punctuation  marks  should  be  printed  in  the  same 
style  or  font  of  type  as  the  word,  letter,  or  character 
immediately  preceding  them: 

"With  the  cry  of  Banzai!  the  regiment  stormed  the  hill"; 
Luke  4:16a;  paragraph  2  (a);  Botanical  Gazette  20:144. 

Period — 

122.  A  period  is  used  to  indicate  the  end  of  a  declarative 
sentence  (see  125). 

123.  a)  Put  a  period  after  all  abbreviations: 

Macmillan  &  Co.,  Mr.  Smith,  St.  Paul,  No.  i,  Chas.  (see 
93),  ibid.,  S.V.,    10  mm. 

b)  Do  not  use  a  period  after  contractions — cases 
where  a  mechanical  necessity  compels  the  omission 
of  a  letter  or  letters  in  the  middle  of  a  word  for  which 
there  is  no  recognized  abbreviated  form;  such  omis- 
sion is  indicated  by  an  apostrophe: 

m'f'g  pl't  (  =  manufacturing  plant);    't  isn't. 

c)  Treat  the  metric  symbols  as  abbreviations,  but 
not  the  chemical  symbols,  nor  the  phrase  "per 
cent,"  nor  the  format  of  books: 

O,  Fe;   2  per  cent  (see  94);  4to,  8vo. 

Note. — -With  respect  to  symbols  for  measures  the  following 
exceptions  should  be  noted:  Astrophysical  Journal,  12  mm  (with 
thin  space  and  no  period)  (but:  2^^^^^);  Botanical  Gazette, 
12  mm.,  125  ft.,  9  cc.  (on  line,  with  period). 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  51 

But  do  not  use  a  period,  in  technical  matter,  after  the 
recognized  abbreviations  for  h'nguistic  epochs,  or 
for  titles  of  well-known  publications  of  which  the 
initials  only  are  given,  nor  after  MS  (==  manuscript) : 
IE  (= Indo-European),  OE  (= Old  English), MHG  (=Middle 
High  German);  AJSL  {= American  Journal  of  Semitic 
Languages  and  Literatures),  ZAW  (=Zeitschri)t  jiir  alttesta- 
mentliche  Wisscnschajt),  CIL  {=Corpus  Inscriptionum  Lati- 
norum). 

124.  Use  no  period  after  Roman  numerals,  even  if  having 
the  value  of  ordinals: 

Vol.  IV;  Louis  XVI  was  on  the  throne. 

125.  Omit  the  period  after  running-heads  (for  explanation 
of  this  and  the  following  terms  see  279-83);  after 
centered  headlines;  after  side-heads  set  in  separate 
lines;  after  cut-in  heads;  after  box-heads  in  tables; 
and  after  superscriptions  and  legends  which  do  not 
form  a  complete  sentence  (with  subject  and  predi- 
cate), or  which  do  not  make-more  than  a  single  line 
of  t>^e;  after  date  lines  at  top  of  communications, 
and  after  signatures  (see  50) . 

126.  The  period  is  always  placed  inside  the  quotation 
marks;  and  inside  the  parentheses  when  the  matter 
inclosed  is  an  independent  sentence  and  forms  no 
part  of  the  preceding  sentence;  otherwise  outside: 
Tennyson's  "In  Memoriam."  Put  the  period  inside  the 
quotation  marks.  (This  is  a  rule  without  exception.)  When 
the  parentheses  form  part  of  the  preceding  sentence,  put 
the  period  outside  (as,  for  instance,  here). 


52  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Exclamation  Point — 

127.  The  exclamation  point  is  used  to  mark  an  outcry,  or 
an  emphatic  or  ironical  utterance: 

"Long  live  the  king!"  "Heaven  forbid!"  "Good!"  he 
cried;  "Hov^r  funny  this  seems!"  "This  must  not  be!"  The 
subject  of  his  lecture  was  "The  Thisness  of  the  That" !  The 
speaker  went  on:  "Nobody  should  leave  his  home  tomorrow 
without  a  marked  ballot  in  their  (! )  pocket." 

128.  The  exclamation  point  is  placed  inside  the  quotation 
marks  or  parentheses  when  part  of  the  quotation 
or  parenthetical  matter;  otherwise  outside. 

See  illustrations  in  127. 

Interrogation  Point — 

129.  The  interrogation  point  is  used  to  mark  a  query,  or 
to  express  a  doubt: 

"Who  is  this  ? "  The  prisoner  gave  his  name  as  Roger  Crown- 
inshield,  the  son  of  an  English  baronet  (  ?).  Can  the  Bible 
be  applied  to  children?  is  a  question  involved. 

Indirect  questions,  however,  should  not  be  followed 
by  an  interrogation  point: 
He  asked  whether  he  was  ill. 

A  technically  interrogative  sentence — disguised  as 
a  question  out  of  courtesy  but  actually  embody- 
ing a  request — does  not  need   the  interrogation 
point : 
Will  you  kindly  sign  and  return  the  inclosed  card. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  53 

130.  The  interrogation  point  should  be  placed  inside  the 
quotation  marks  or  parentheses  only  when  it  is  a 
part  of  the  quotation  or  parenthetical  matter : 

"Take  hold,  my  son,  of  the  toughest  knots  in  hfe  and  try 
to  untie  them;  try  to  be  worthy  of  man's  highest  estate; 
have  high,  noble,  manly  honor.  There  is  but  one  test  of 
everything,  and  that  is,  Is  it  right?"  (Henry  A.  Wise). 
The  question:  "Who  is  who,  and  what  is  what?"  Were 
you  ever  in  "Tsintsinnati"  ? 

Colon — 

131.  The  colon  is  used  to  "mark  a  discontinuity  of 
grammatical  construction  greater  than  that  indicated 
by  the  semicolon  and  less  than  that  indicated  by  the 
period.  It  is  commonly  used  (i)  to  emphasize  a 
close  connection  in  thought  between  two  clauses 
each  of  which  forms  a  complete  sentence,  and  which 
might  with  grammatical  propriety  be  separated  by 
a  period;  (2)  to  separate  a  clause  which  is  gram- 
matically complete  from  a  second  which  contains 
an  illustration  or  amphfication  of  its  meaning;  (3) 
to  introduce  a  formal  statement,  an  extract,  a  speech 
in  a  dialogue,  etc."  {Century  Dictionary)  (unless 
this  is  preceded  by  a  conjunction,  like  "that," 
immediately  connecting  it  with  what  goes  before). 
Before  the  quotation  of  a  clause  in  the  middle  of  a 
sentence  use  a  comma: 

(i)  "This  argument  undeniably  contains  some  force:  Thus 
it  is  well  known  that  .  .  .  ."     "The  secretion  of  the  gland 


54  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

goes  on  uninterruptedly:  this  may  account  for  the  condition 
of  the  organ."  "The  fear  of  death  is  universal:  even  the 
lowest  animals  instinctively  shrink  from  annihilation."  (2) 
"Most  countries  have  a  national  flower:  France  the  lily, 
England  the  rose,  etc."  "Lambert  pine:  the  gigantic  sugar 
pine  of  CaHfomia."  (3)  "The  rule  may  be  stated  thus: 
.  .  .  ."  "We  quote  from  the  address:  .  .  .  ."  "Charles: 
'Where  are  you  going?'  George:  'To  the  mill-pond.'" 
But:  "He  stoutly  maintained  that  'the  letter  is  a  monstrous 
forgery'";  and:  "Declaring,  'The  letter  is  a  monstrous 
forgery,'  he  tried  to  wash  his  hands  of  the  whole  affair." 

132.  The  colon  thus  often  takes  the  place  of  an  implied 
"namely,"  "as  follows,"  "for  instance,"  or  a  similar 
phrase.  Where  such  word  or  phrase  is  used,  it 
should  be  followed  by  a  colon  if  what  follows  consists 
of  one  or  more  grammatically  complete  clauses; 
otherwise,  by  a  comma  (see  145) : 

"This  is  true  of  only  two  nations — the  wealthiest,  though  not 
the  largest,  in  Europe:  Great  Britain  and  France";  but: 
"This  is  true  of  only  two  nations — the  wealthiest,  though 
not  the  largest,  in  Europe — viz..  Great  Britain  and  France." 
"He  made  several  absurd  statements.  For  example:.  ..." 
but:  "There  are  several  states  in  the  Union — for  instance, 
Kansas  and  Wyoming — which  .  .  .  ." 

133.  Put  a  colon  after  the  salutatory  phrase  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  letter,  and  after  the  introductory  remark 
of  a  speaker  addressing  the  chairman  or  the  audi- 
ence: 

My  dear  Mr.  Brown:     (See  50.) 

Mr.  Chairman,  Ladies  and  Qentlemen:     (See  64.) 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  55 

134.  Put  a  centered  (g-unit)  colon  between  chapter  and 
verse  in  Scripture  passages,  between  hours  and 
minutes  in  time  indications,  and  between  volume 
and  page  reference  when  such  style  is  used : 
Matt.  2:5-13;  4:30  P.M.;  BotaH icdl  Gazelle  20: 144. 

135.  Put  a  colon  between  the  place  of  publication  and  the 
pubhsher's  name  in  literary  and  bibliographical 
references : 

Clement  of  Alexandria  (London:   Macmillan),  II,  97. 

136.  The  colon  should  be  placed  outside  the  quotation 
marks,  unless  a  part  of  the  quotation: 

He  writes  under  the  head  of  "Notes  and  Comments": 
"Many  a  man  can  testify  to  the  truth  of  the  old  adage:"  etc. 

Semicolon — 

137.  A  semicolon  is  used  to  mark  the  division  of  a  sentence 
somewhat  more  independent  than  that  marked  by 
a  comma: 

"Are  we  giving  our  Uves  to  perpetuate  the  things  that  the 
past  has  created  for  its  needs,  forgetting  to  ask  whether  these 
things  still  serve  today's  needs;  or  are  we  thinking  of  living 
men  ?"  "This  is  as  important  for  science  as  it  is  for  practice; 
indeed,  it  may  be  said  to  be  the  only  important  consideration." 
"It  is  so  in  war;  it  is  so  in  the  economic  life;  it  cannot  be 
otherwise  in  religion."  "In  Russia  the  final  decision  rests 
with  the  Czar,  advised  by  his  ministers;  in  most  constitutional 
countries,  indirectly  with  the  people  as  represented  in  parlia- 
ment; in  Switzerland  alone,  through  the  referendum,  directly 
with  the  electorate  at  large,"     "This,  let  it  be  remembered, 


56  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

was  the  ground  taken  by  Mill;  for  to  him  'utilitarianism,' 
in  spite  of  all  his  critics  may  say,  did  not  mean  the  pursuit  of 
bodily  pleasure."  ("For"  in  such  cases  should  commonly  be 
preceded  by  a  semicolon.) 

138.  In  enumerations  use  a  semicolon  between  the  differ- 
ent links,  if  these  consist  of  more  than  a  few  words 
closely  connected,  and  especially  if  individual  clauses 
contain  any  punctuation  mark  of  less  value  than  a 
period,  or  an  exclamation  or  interrogation  point 
(unless  inclosed  in  parentheses),  yet  are  intimately 
joined  one  with  the  other,  and  all  with  the  sentence 
or  clause  leading  up  to  them,  for  instance  through 
dependence  upon  a  conjunction,  like  "that,"  pre- 
ceding them  (see  36) : 

"The  membership  of  the  international  commission  was  made 
up  as  follows:  France,  4;  Germany,  5;  Great  Britain,  i 
(owing  to  a  misunderstanding,  the  announcement  did  not 
reach  the  English  societies  in  time  to  secure  a  full  quota  from 
that  country,  Sir  Henry  Campbell,  who  had  the  matter  in 
charge,  being  absent  at  the  time,  great  difhculty  was  experi- 
ienced  in  arousing  sufhcient  interest  to  insure  the  sending  of 
even  a  solitary  delegate);  Italy,  3;  the  United  States,  7." 
"The  defendant,  in  justification  of  his  act,  pleaded  that  (i) 
he  was  despondent  over  the  loss  of  his  wife;  (2)  he  was  out 
of  work;  (3)  he  had  had  nothing  to  eat  for  two  days;  (4)  he 
was  under  the  influence  of  liquor."  "Presidents  Hadley,  of 
Yale;  Eliot,  of  Harvard;  Butler,  of  Columbia;  and  Angell, 
of  Michigan." 

139.  In  Scripture  references  a  semicolon  is  used  to 
separate  passages  containing  chapters: 

Gen.  2:3-6,  9,  14;  3:17;  chap.  5;  6:15. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  57 

140.  The  semicolon  should  be  placed  outside  the  quota- 
tion marks  or  parentheses,  unless  a  part  of  the 
quotation  or  parenthetical  matter. 

Comma — 

141.  The  comma  is  "used  to  indicate  the  smallest  inter- 
ruptions in  continuity  of  thought  or  grammatical 
construction,  the  marking  of  which  contributes  to 
clearness"  {Century  Dictionary): 

"Here,  as  in  many  other  cases,  what  is  sometimes  popularly 
supposed  to  be  orthodox  is  really  a  heresy,  an  exaggeration, 
a  distortion,  a  caricature  of  the  true  doctrine  of  the  church. 
The  doctrine  is,  indeed,  laid  down  by  an  authority  here  and 
there;  but,  speaking  generally,  it  has  no  place  in  the  stand- 
ards, creeds,  or  confessions  of  the  great  communions;  e.g., 
the  Apostles'  Creed,  the  Nicene  Creed,  the  canons  of  the  early 
ecumenical  councils,  the  Westminster  Confession,  the  Thirty- 
nine  Articles."  "Shakspere  and  other,  lesser,  poets."  "The 
books  which  I  have  read  I  herewith  return"  (i.e.,  I  return 
those  [only]  which  I  have  read);  but:  "The  books,  which  I 
have  read,  I  herewith  return"  (i.e.,  having  read  them  [all], 
I  now  return  them).  "Gossiping,  women  are  happy";  and: 
"Gossiping  women  are  happy."  "Of  these  four,  two  Ameri- 
cans and  one  Englishman  started";  and:  "Of  these,  four — 
two  Americans  and  two  Englishmen — started."  "The  suffer- 
ing, God  will  relieve."  "Behind,  her  'stage  mother'  stood 
fluttering  with  extra  wraps."  "Some  boys  and  girls  pre- 
maturely announce  themselves,  usually  in  uncomfortable, 
sometimes  in  bad,  ways." 

142.  Use  a  comma  to  separate  proper  nouns  belonging 
to  different  individuals  or  places: 

"To  John,  Smith  was  always  kind";  "To  America,  Europe 
awards  the  prize  of  mechanical  skill." 


58  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

143.  Put  a  comma  before  "and,"  "or,"  and  "nor" 
connecting  the  last  two  links  in  a  sequence  of  three 
or  more;  or  all  the  links  in  a  series  of  greater  length, 
or  where  each  individual  link  consists  of  several 
words;  always  put  a  comma  before  "etc.": 

Tom,  Dick,  and  Harry;  either  copper,  silver,  or  gold;  "He 
was  equally  familiar  with  Homer,  and  Shakspere,  and 
Moliere,  and  Cervantes,  and  Goethe,  and  Ibsen";  "Neither 
France  for  her  art,  nor  Germany  for  her  army,  nor  England 
for  her  democracy,  etc." 

But  do  not  use  a  comma  where  "and,"  etc.,  serves 
to  connect  all  of  the  links  in  a  brief  and  close-knit 
phrase : 

"a  man  good  and  noble  and  true";  "I  do  not  remember  who 
wrote  the  stanza — whether  it  was  Shelley  or  Keats  or  Moore." 

144.  Ordinarily,  put  a  comma  before  and  after  clauses 
introduced  by  such  conjunctions  as  "and,"  "but," 
"if,"  "while,"  "as,"  "whereas,"  "since,"  "because," 
"when,"  "after,"  "although,"  etc.,  especially  if  a 
change  of  subject  takes  place: 

"When  he  arrived  at  the  railway  station,  the  train  had  gone, 
and  his  friend,  who  had  come  to  bid  him  goodbye,  had 
departed,  but  left  no  word.  As  the  next  train  was  not  due 
for  two  hours,  he  decided  to  take  a  ride  about  the  town, 
although  it  offered  little  of  interest  to  the  sightseer.  While 
he  regretted  his  failure  to  meet  his  friend,  he  did  not  go 
to  his  house." 

But  do  not  use  a  comma  before  clauses  introduced 
by  such  conjunctions  if  the  preceding  clause  is  not 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  59 

logically  complete  without  them;  nor  before  "if," 
"but,"  and  "though"  in  brief  and  close-welded 
phrases: 

"This  is  especially  interesting  because  they  represent  the  two 
extremes  and  because  they  present  differences  in  their  rela- 
tions"; "This  is  good  because  true";  "I  shall  agree  to  this 
only  if  you  accept  my  conditions";  "I  would  not  if  I  could, 
and  could  not  if  I  would";  "honest  though  poor";  "a  cheap 
but  valuable  book." 

145.  Such  conjunctions,  adverbs,  connective  particles,  or 
phrases  as  "now,"  "then,"  "however,"  "indeed," 
"therefore,"  "moreover,"  "furthermore,"  "never- 
theless," "though,"  "in  fact,"  "in  short,"  "for 
instance,"  "that  is,"  "of  course,"  "on  the  contrary," 
"on  the  other  hand,"  "after  all,"  "to  be  sure," 
"for  example,"  etc.,  should  be  followed  by  a  comma 
when  standing  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  or 
clause  to  introduce  an  inference  or  an  explanation, 
and  should  be  placed  between  commas  when  wedged 
into  the  middle  of  a  sentence  or  clause  to  mark  off  a 
distinct  break  in  the  continuity  of  thought  or  struc- 
ture, indicating  a  summarizing  of  what  precedes, 
the  point  of  a  new  departure,  or  a  modifying,  restrict- 
ive, or  antithetical  addition,  etc.: 

"Indeed,  this  was  exactly  the  point  of  the  argument"; 
"Moreover,  he  did  not  think  it  feasible";  "Now,  the  question 
is  this:  .  .  .  ."  "Nevertheless,  he  consented  to  the  scheme"; 
"In  fact,  rather  the  reverse  is  true";  "This,  then,  is  my 
position:  ....";     "The   statement,    therefore,    cannot   be 


6o  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

verified";  "He  thought,  however,  that  he  would  like  to 
try";  "That,  after  all,  seemed  a  trivial  matter";  "The 
gentleman,  of  course,  was  wrong." 

But  do  not  use  a  comma  with  such  words  when  the 
connection  is  logically  close  and  structurally  smooth 
enough  not  to  call  for  any  pause  in  reading;  with 
"therefore,"  "nevertheless,"  etc.,  when  directly 
following  the  verb;  with  "indeed''  when  directly 
preceding  or  following  an  adjective  or  another 
adverb  which  it  qualifies;  nor  ordinarily  with  such 
terms  as  "perhaps,"  "also,"  "likewise,"  etc.: 

"Therefore  I  say  unto  you  ....";  "He  was  therefore 
unable  to  be  present";  "It  is  nevertheless  true";  "He  is 
recovering  very  slowly  indeed";  "He  was  perhaps  thinking 
of  the  future";  "He  was  a  scholar  and  a  sportsman  too." 

146.  A  comma  is  preferably  omitted  before  "rather"  in 
such  an  expression  as — 

"The  time-value  is  to  be  measured  in  this  way  rather  than 
by  the  time-equivalent  of  the  strata." 

147.  If  among  several  adjectives  preceding  a  noun  the 
last  bears  a  more  direct  relation  to  the  noun  than  the 
others,  it  should  not  be  preceded  by  a  comma: 

"the  admirable  political  institutions  of  the  country";  "a  hand- 
some, wealthy  young  man." 

148.  Participial  clauses,  especially  such  as  contain  an 
explanation  of  the  main  clause,  should  usually  be 
set  off  by  a  comma: 

"Being  asleep,  he  did  not  hear  him";  "Exhausted  by  a  hard 
day's  work,  he  slept  like  a  stone." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  6i 

149.  Put  a  comma  before  "not"  introducing  an  anti- 
thetical clause  or  phrase: 

"Men  addict  themselves  to  inferior  pleasures,  not  because 
they  deliberately  prefer  them,  but  because  they  are  the  only 
ones  to  which  they  have  access." 

150.  For  parenthetical,  adverbial,  or  appositional  clauses 
or  phrases  use  commas  to  indicate  structurally 
disconnected,  but  logically  integral,  interpolations; 
dashes  to  indicate  both  structurally  and  logically 
disconnected  insertions ;  never  use  the  two  together 
(see  175): 

"Since,  from  the  naturalistic  point  of  view,  mental  states  are 
the  concomitants  of  physiological  processes  .  .  .  .";  "The 
French,  generally  speaking,  are  a  nation  of  artists";  "The 
English,  highly  democratic  as  they  are,  nevertheless  deem 
the  nobility  fundamental  to  their  political  and  social  systems." 
"There  was  a  time — I  forget  the  exact  date — when  these 
conditions  were  changed." 

151.  Use  a  comma  to  separate  two  identical  or  closely 
similar  words,  even  if  the  sense  or  grammatical  con- 
struction does  not  require  such  separation  (see  142) : 

"Whatever  is,  is  good";  "What  he  was,  is  not  known"; 
"The  chief  aim  of  academic  striving  ought  not  to  be,  to  be 
most  in  evidence " ;   "This  is  unique  only  in  this,  that  .  .  .  ." 

152.  In  adjectival  phrases,  a  complementary,  qualifying, 
delimiting,  or  antithetical  adjective  added  to  the 
main  epithet  preceding  a  noun  should  ordinarily  be 
preceded  and  followed  by  a  comma: 


62        .    THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

"This  harsh,  though  at  the  same  time  perfectly  logical, 
conclusion";  "The  deceased  was  a  stern  and  unapproach- 
able, yet  withal  sympathetic  and  kind-hearted,  gentleman"; 
"Here  comes  in  the  most  responsible,  because  it  is  the  final, 
office  of  the  teacher";  "The  most  sensitive,  if  not  the  most 
elusive,  part  of  the  training  of  children." 

153.  Two  or  more  co-ordinate  clauses  ending  in  a  word 
governing  or  modifying  another  word  in  a  following 
clause  should  be  separated  by  commas : 

".  .  .  .a  shallow  body  of  water  connected  with,  but  well 
protected  from,  the  open  sea";  "He  was  as  tall  as,  though 
much  younger  than,  his  brother";  "The  cultivation  in  our- 
selves of  a  sensitive  feeling  on  the  subject  of  veracity  is  one  of 
the  most  useful,  and  the  enfeeblement  of  that  feeling  one  of 
the  most  hurtful,  things";  "This  road  leads  away  from, 
rather  than  toward,  your  destination." 

154.  Similarly,  use  a  comma  to  separate  two  numbers: 

"In  1905,  347  teachers  attended  the  convention";  November 
I,  1905.     (See  160.) 

155.  A  comma  is  employed  to  indicate  the  omission,  for 
brevity  or  convenience,  of  a  word  or  words  the 
repetition  of  which  is  not  essential  to  the  meaning: 

"In  Illinois  there  are  seventeen  such  institutions;  in  Ohio, 
twenty-two;  in  Indiana,  thirteen";  "In  Lincoln's  first  cabinet 
Seward  was  secretary  of  state;  Chase,  of  the  treasury; 
Cameron,  of  war;  and  Bates,  attorney-general." 

Often,  however,  such  constructions  are  smooth  enough 
not  to  call  for  commas  (and  consequent  semicolons) : 

"One  puppy  may  resemble  the  father,  another  the  mother, 
and  a  third  some  distant  ancestor." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  63 


156.  A  direct  quotation,  maxim,  or  similar  expression, 
when  brief,  should  be  separated  from  the  preceding 
part  of  the  sentence  by  a  comma  (see  131) : 

"  God  said,  Let  there  be  light." 

157.  Use  a  comma  before  "of"  in  connection  with  resi- 
dence or  position: 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Mclntyre,  of  Detroit,  Mich. ;  President  Hadley, 
of  Yale  University. 

Exceptions  are  those  cases,  historical  and  political,  in 
which  the  place-name  practically  has  become  a  part 
of  the  person's  name,  or  is  so  closely  connected  with 
this  as  to  render  the  separation  artificial  or  illogical : 
Clement  of  Alexandria,  Philip  of  Anjou,  King  Edward  of 
England. 

158.  In  literary  references  insert  a  comma  between  con- 
secutive numbers  to  represent  a  break  in  the  con- 
tinuity, a  separate  reference  to  each;  an  en  dash,  to 
represent  one  continuous  reference  between  the 
consecutive  numbers: 

pp.  4,  7-8,  10;   Ezra  5:7-8;   IV,  123-30. 

159.  Put  a  comma  after  digits  indicating  thousands, 
except  in  a  date  or  in  a  page-reference;  and  not 
between  the  constituents  of  dimensions,  weights, 
and  measures: 

1,276,  10,419;    2200  B.C.;   p.  2461;   3  feet  6  inches;   4  lb. 
2  oz. ;  2  hr.  4  min. 

Note. — Astro  physical  Journal  and  Botanical  Gazette  do  not 
use  a  comma  with  four  figures. 


64  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

i6o.   Separate  month  and  year,  and  similar  time  divisions 
by  a  comma: 
November,  1905;  New  Year's  Day,  1906. 

Note. — Astrophysical  Journal  and  Botanical  Gazette  do  not 
use  a  comma  between  month  and  year. 

161.  Omit  the  comma,  in  signatures  and  at  the  beginning 
of  articles,  after  author's  name  followed  by  address, 
title,  or  position  in  a  separate  hne,  or  after  address 
followed  by  a  date  line,  etc.  (see  65). 

162.  The  comma  is  always  placed  inside  the  quotation 
marks,  but  following  the  parenthesis,  if  the  con- 
text requires  it  at  all. 

Apostrophe — 

163.  An  apostrophe  is  used  to  mark  the  omission  of  a 
letter  or  letters  in  the  contraction  of  a  word,  or  of 
figures  in  a  number.  In  the  case  of  contractions 
containing  a  verb  and  the  negative,  do  not  use  space 
between  the  two  components  of  the  contraction. 

it's,  ne'er,  'twas,  "takin'  me  'at";   m'f'g;   the  class  of  '96; 
don't,  haven't.     (See  123.) 

164.  The  possessive  case  of  nouns,  common  and  proper, 
is  formed  by  the  addition  of  an  apostrophe,  or 
apostrophe  and  5  (see  113): 

a  man's  word,  horses'  tails;   Scott's  Ivanhoe,  Jones's  farms, 
Themistocles'  era;   for  appearance'  sake. 

165.  The  plural  of  numerals,  and  of  rare  or  artificial  noun- 
coinages,  is  formed  by  the  aid  of  an  apostrophe  and 
s;  of  proper  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  ending 


I 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  65 

in  a  sibilant,  by  adding  an  apostrophe  alone  (mono- 
syllabic proper  names  ending  in  a  sibilant  add  es; 
others,  s)  (see  loi) : 

in  the  1900's;  in  two's  and  three's,  the  three  R's,  the 
Y.M.C.A.'s;  "these  I-just-do-as-I-please's";  "all  the  Tommy 
Atkins'  of  England"  (but:  the  Rosses  and  the  Macdougals); 
the  Pericles'  and  Socrates'  of  literature. 

Quotation  Marks.  (See  section  on  "Quotations," 
74-91.) 

Dashes — 

166.  A  dash  is  used  to  denote  "a  sudden  break,  stop,  or 
transition  in  a  sentence,  or  an  abrupt  change  in  its 
construction,  a  long  or  significant  pause,  or  an 
unexpected  or  epigrammatic  turn  of  sentiment" 
(John  Wilson) : 

"Do  we — can  we — send  out  educated  boys  and  girls  from  the 
high  school  at  eighteen  ?"  "The  Platonic  world  of  the  static, 
and  the  Hegelian  world  of  process— how  great  the  contrast!" 
"  'Process' — that  is  the  magic  word  of  the  modem  period"; 
"To  be  or  not  to  be — that  is  the  question";  "Christianity 
found  in  the  Roman  Empire  a  civic  life  which  was  implicated 
by  a  thousand  roots  with  pagan  faith  and  cultus — a  state 
which  offered  little." 

167.  Use  dashes  (rarely  parentheses — see  177)  for  par- 
enthetical clauses  which  are  both  logically  and 
structurally  independent  interpolations  (see  150): 

"This  may  be  said  to  be — but,  never  mind,  we  will  pass  over 
that";  "There  came  a  time — let  us  say,  for  convenience,  with 
Herodotus  and  Thucydides — when  this  attention  to  actions 


66  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

was  conscious  and  deliberate";  "If  it  be  asked — and  in  say- 
ing this  I  but  epitomize  my  whole  contention — why  the 
Mohammedan  religion  .  .  .  ." 

i68.  A  clause  added  to  lend  emphasis  to,  or  to  explain  or 

expand,  a  word  or  phrase  occurring  in  the  main 

clause,  which   word   or   phrase   is   then  repeated, 

should  be  introduced  by  a  dash: 

"To  him  they  are  more  important  as  the  sources  for  history — 
the  history  of  events  and  ideas";  "Here  we  are  face  to  face 
with  a  new  and  difficult  problem — new  and  difficult,  that  is, 
in  the  sense  that  .  .  .  . " 

169.  Wherever  a  "namely"  is  implied  before  a  paren- 
thetical or  complementary  clause,  a  dash  should 
preferably  be  used  (see  132) : 

"These  discoveries — gunpowder,  printing-press,  compass, 
and  telescope — were  the  weapons  before  which  the  old  science 
trembled";  "But  here  we  are  trenching  upon  another  division 
of  our  field — the  interpretation  of  New  Testament  books." 

170.  In  sentences  broken  up   into  clauses,   the  final — 

summarizing — clause  should  be  preceded  by  a  dash: 

"Amos,  with  the  idea  -that  Jehovah  is  an  upright  judge 
.  .  .  .  ;  Hosea,  whose  Master  hated  injustice  and  falsehood 
.  .  .  .  ;  Isaiah,  whose  Lord  would  have  mercy  only  on  those 
who  relieved  the  widow  and  the  fatherless — these  were  the 
spokesmen  .  .  .  ." 

171.  A  word  or  phrase  set  in  a  separate  line  and  succeeded 

by  paragraphs,  at  the  beginning  of  each  of  which  it 

is  implied,  should  be  followed  by  a  dash : 

"I  recommend — 
"i.  That  we  kill  him. 
"2.  That  we  flay  him." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  67 


172.  A  dash  should  be  used  in  connection  with  side-heads, 
whether  "run  in"  or  paragraphed: 

2.  The  language  0}  the  New  Testament. — The  lexicons 
of  Grimm-Thayer,  Cramer,  and  others  .... 

Note. — The  above  has  been  taken  from  .... 

Biblical  criticism  in  other  denominations — 

A  most  interesting  article  appeared  in   the  Expository 
Times  .... 

173.  Use  a  dash  in  place  of  the  word  "to"  connecting 
two  words  or  numbers  (see  158): 

May-July,  1906  (en  dash);  May  i,  1905 — November  i,  1906 
(em  dash);  pp.  3-7  (en  dash);  Luke  3:6 — 5:2  (em  dash). 

But  if  the  word  "from"  precedes  the  first  word  or 
number,  do  not  use  the  dash  instead  of  "to": 

From  May  i  to  July  i,  1906. 

In  connecting  consecutive  numbers,  omit  hundreds 
from  the  second  number — i.e.,  use  only  two  figures 
— unless  the  first  number  ends  in  two  ciphers,  in 
which  case  repeat;  if  the  next  to  the  last  figure  in 
the  first  number  is  a  cipher,  do  not  repeat  this  in  the 
second  number;  but  in  citing  dates  B.C.,  always 
repeat  the  hundreds  (because  representing  a  dimi- 
nution, not  an  increase)  (see  158) : 

1880-95,  pp.  II3-16;    190O-1906,  pp.  102-7;   387-324  B.C. 

Note. — The  Astrophysical  Journal  and  Botanical  Gazette  re- 
peat the  hundreds:     1880-1895,  pp.  113-116. 


68  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

174.  Let  a  dash  precede  the  reference  (author,  title  of 
work,  or  both)  following  a  direct  quotation,  consisting 
of  at  least  one  complete  sentence,  in  footnotes  or 
cited  independently  in  the  text  (see  85) : 

'  "I  felt  an  emotion  of  the  moral  sublime  at  beholding 
such  an  instance  of  civic  heroism." — Thirty  Years,  I,  379. 
The  green  grass  is  growing, 

The  morning  wind  is  in  it, 
'Tis  a  tune  worth  the  knowing 
Though  it  change  every  minute. 

— Emerson,  "To  Ellen,  at  the  South." 

175.  A  dash  should  not  ordinarily  be  used  in  connection 
with  any  other  point,  except  a  period : 

"Dear  Sir:  I  have  the  honor  .  .  .  .";  not:  "Dear  Sir: — 
I  have  .  .  .  .";  "This — I  say  it  with  regret — was  not  done"; 
not:   "This, — I  say  it  with  regret, — was  .  .  .  ." 

But  in  a  sentence  where  a  comma  would  be  neces- 
sary if  the  parenthetical  clause  set  off  by  dashes 
did  not  exist,  the  comma  may  be  retained  before 
the  first  dash: 

Darwin,  the  promulgator  of  the  theory, — though  by  no 
means  its  only  supporter — is  regarded  today,  etc. 

And  when  the  parenthetical  clause  set  off  by  dashes 
itself  requires  an  interrogation  or  exclamation 
point,  such  punctuation  may  be  retained  in  con- 
nection with  the  second  dash: 

Senator  Blank — shall  we  call  him  statesman  or  politician  ? — 
introduced  the  bill;  If  the  ship  should  sink — which  God 
forbid! — ^he  will  be  a  ruined  man. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  69 

Parentheses — 

176.  Place  between  parentheses  figures  or  letters  used  to 
mark  divisions  in  enumerations  run  into  the  text: 

"The  reasons  for  his  resignation  were  three:  (i)  advanced 
age,  (2)  failing  health,  (3)  a  desire  to  travel." 

If  such  divisions  are  paragraphed,  a  single  paren- 
thesis is  ordinarily  used  in  connection  with  a  lower- 
case (italic)  letter;  a  period,  with  figures  and  capital 
(roman)  letters.  In  syllabi,  and  matter  of  a  similar 
character,  the  following  scheme  of  notation  and 
indention  should  ordinarily  be  adhered  to: 

A.  Under  the  head  of  ...  . 

I.  Under  .... 

1.  Under  .... 

a)  Under  .... 

(i)  Under  .... 

(a)  Under  .... 

i)  Under  .... 
ii)  Under  .... 

(b)  Under  .... 
(2)  Under  .... 

b)  Under  .... 

2.  Under  .... 

II.  Under  .... 

B.  Under  the  head  of  ...  . 

177.  Parentheses  should  not  ordinarily  be  used  for  paren- 
thetical clauses  (see  150  and  167)  unless  confusion 
might  arise  from  the  use  of  less  distinctive  marks,  or 


70  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

unless  the  content  of  the  clause  is  wholly  irrelevant 
to  the  main  argument : 

"He  meant — I  take  this  to  be  the  (somewhat  obscure)  sense 
of  his  speech — that  .  .  .  .";  "The  period  thus  inaugurated 
(of  which  I  shall  speak  at  greater  length  in  the  next  chapter) 
was  characterized  by  .  .  .  .";  "The  contention  has  been 
made  {op.  cit.)  that  .  .  .  ." 

Brackets — 

178.  Brackets  are  used  (i)  to  inclose  an  explanation  or 
note,  (2)  to  indicate  an  interpolation  in  a  quotation, 
(3)  to  rectify  a  mistake,  (4)  to  supply  an  omission, 
and  (5)  for  parentheses  within  parentheses: 

(i)  '  [This  was  written  before  the  publication  of  Spencer's 
book. — Editor.] 

(2)  "These  [the  free-silver  Democrats]  asserted  that  the 
present  artificial  ratio  can  be  maintained  indefinitely." 

(3)  "As  the  Italian  [Englishman]  Dante  Gabriel  Ros- 
[s]etti  has  said,  .  .  .  ." 

(4)  John  Ruskin.    By  Henry  Carpenter.    ["English  Men 
of  Letters,"  III.]     London:  Black,  1900. 

(5)  Grote,  the  great  historian  of  Greece  (see  his  History, 
I,  204  [second  edition]),  .... 

179.  Such  phrases  as  "  To  be  continued,'"  at  the  end,  and 
^^  Continued  from  .  .  .  ."  at  the  beginning,  of 
articles,  chapters,  etc.,  should  be  placed  between 
brackets,  centered,  and  set  in  italics  (see  73)  and  in 
type  reduced  in  size  in  accordance  with  the  rule 
governing  reductions  (see  86) : 

[Continued  from  p.  J20] 
[To  be  concluded] 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  71 

Ellipses — 

180.  Ellipses  are  used  to  indicate  the  omission,  from  a 
quotation,  of  one  or  more  words  not  essential  to 
the  idea  which  it  is  desired  to  convey,  and  also 
to  indicate  illegible  words,  mutilations,  and  other 
lacunae  in  a  document,  manuscript,  or  other  mate- 
rial which  is  quoted.  For  an  ellipsis  at  the  begin- 
ning, in  the  middle,  or  at  the  end  of  a  sentence  four 
periods,  separated  by  a  space  (en  quad),  should 
ordinarily  be  used,  except  in  very  narrow  measures 
(in  French  three  only).  If  the  preceding  line  ends 
in  a  point,  this  should  not  be  included  in  the  four. 
Where  a  whole  paragraph,  or  paragraphs,  or,  in 
poetry,  a  complete  line,  or  lines,  are  omitted, 
insert  a  full  line  of  periods,  separated  by  em-  or 
2-em  quads,  according  to  the  length  of  the  line. 
But  the  periods  should  not  extend  beyond  the 
length  of  the  longest  type-line: 

The  point  ....  is  that  the  same  forces  ....  are  still 

the  undercurrents  of  every  human  life We  may  never 

unravel  the  methods  of  the  physical  forces;  ....   but  .... 
I  think  it  worth  giving  you  these  details,  because  it  is  a 
vague  thing,  though  a  perfectly  true  thing,  to  say  that  it  vi^as 
by  his  genius  that  Alexander  conquered  the  eastern  world. 

His  army,  you  know,  was  a  small  one.     To  carry  a  vast 
number  of  men  .... 

....  he  sought  the  lumberer's  gang, 
Where  from  a  hundred  lakes  young  rivers  sprang; 

Through  these  green  tents,  by  eldest  nature  drest, 
He  roamed,  content  alike  with  man  and  beast. 


72  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

i8i.  An  ellipsis  should  be  treated  as  a  part  of  the  citation; 
consequently  should  be  inclosed  in  the  quotation 
marks  (see  178  [3]). 

Hyphens— 

182.  A  hyphen  is  placed  at  the  end  of  a  line  terminating 
with  a  syllable  of  a  word,  the  remainder  of  which 
is  carried  to  the  next  line  (see  section  on  "  Divisions") 
and  between  many  compound  words.  The  modern 
tendency  is  against  the  hyphen,  and  in  favor  of 
writing  as  one  two  words  which,  when  united,  con- 
vey but  one  idea : 

schoolroom,  workshop,  headquarters. 
Thus  far,  however,  this  practice  can  be  spoken  of 
only  as  a  tendency,  and  there  are  many  compound 
words  which  are  better  hyphenated  than  consoli- 
dated. The  following  rules  are  designed  to  cover 
such  cases,  but  it  must  be  remembered  that  they 
are  not  to  be  applied  in  all  cases,  and  that  a  certain 
degree  of  judgment  must  be  exercised  in  their  use. 

183.  Hyphenate  two  or  more  words  (except  proper  names 
forming  a  unity  in  themselves)  combined  into  one 
adjective  preceding  a  noun,  or  when  the  noun  is 
understood : 

so-called  Croesus,  well-known  author,  first-class  investment, 
better-trained  teachers,  high-school  course,  half-dead  horse, 
never-ceasing  strife,  much-mooted  question,  joint-stock  com- 
pany, English-speaking  peoples,  nineteenth-century  progress, 
white-rat  serum,   up-to-date  machinery,   four-year-old  boy, 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  73 

house-to-house  canvass,  go-as-you-please  fashion,  deceased- 
wife's-sister  bill;  the  feeble-minded  (person);  but:  New 
Testament  times,  Old  English  spelling,  an  a  priori  argument. 

Where  one  of  the  components  contains  more  than 
one  word,  an  en  dash  should  be  used  in  place  of  a 
hyphen : 

New  York-Chicago  freight  traffic,  Norwegian-German- 
Jewish  immigrant. 

But  do  not  connect  by  a  hyphen  adjectives  or  par- 
ticiples with  adverbs  ending  in  "-ly";  nor  such 
combinations  as  the  above  when  following  the  noun, 
or  qualifying  a  predicate: 

highly  developed  species;  a  man  well  known  in  the  neighbor- 
hood; the  fly-leaf,  so  called;  "Her  gown  and  carriage  were 
strictly  up  to  date." 

184.  Hyphenate,  as  a  rule,  nouns  formed  by  the  combina- 
tion of  two  nouns  standing  in  objective  relation  to 
each  other — that  is,  one  of  whose  components  is 
derived  from  a  transitive  verb: 

mind-reader,  story-teller,  fool-killer,  office-holder,  well-wisher, 
property-owner;  hero-worship,  child-study;  wood-turning, 
clay-modeling. 

Exceptions  are  common  and  brief  compounds  or 
unwieldy  formations : 

lawgiver,  taxpayer,  proofreader,  bookkeeper,  stockholder, 
freehand,  schoolboy,  schoolgirl  (but:  school  man,  to  dis- 
tinguish from  the  Schoolmen  of  the  Middle  Ages) ;  encyclo- 
pedia compiler. 


74  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

185.  A  present  participle  united  (i)  with  a  noun  to  forma 
new  noun  with  a  meaning  different  from  that  which 
would  be  conveyed  by  the  two  words  taken  separately, 
(2)  with  a  preposition  used  absolutely  (i.e.,  not  gov- 
erning a  following  noun),  to  form  a  noun,  may 
properly  take  a  hyphen: 

boarding-house,  dining-hall,  sleeping-room,  dwelling-place, 
printing-office,  walking-stick,  starting-point,  stepping- 
stone,  stumbling-block. 

186.  As  a  general  rule,  compounds  of  "book,"  "house," 
"mill,"  "room,"  "shop,"  and  "work"  should  be 
printed .  as  one  compact  word,  without  a  hyphen, 
when  the  prefixed  noun  contains  only  one  syllable, 
should  be  hyphenated  when  it  contains  two,  and 
should  be  printed  as  two  separate  words  when  it 
contains  three  or  more: 

handbook,    schoolbook,    notebook,    textbook;    pocket-book, 

story-book;    reference  book. 

boathouse,  clubhouse,  schoolhouse,  storehouse;  engine-house, 

power-house;  business  house. 

commill,  handmill,  sawmill,  windmill;  water-mill,  paper-mill; 

chocolate  mill. 

bedroom,  classroom,  schoolroom,  storeroom;    lecture-room; 

recitation  room. 

tinshop,  workshop;    bucket-shop,  tailor-shop;    policy  shop; 

handwork,  woodwork;   metal-work;   filigree  work. 

Exceptions  are  rare  combinations,  and  such  as  for 
appearance'  sake  would  better  be  separated: 

source-book,  wheat-mill,  school  work,  home  work,  class 
work,  book  work,  team  work. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  75 

187.  Compounds  of  "maker,"  "dealer,"  and  other  words 
denoting  occupation  should  ordinarily  be  hyphen- 
ated; likewise  nouns  combined  in  an  adjectival 
sense  before  a  proper  noun: 

harness-maker,  book-dealer,  job-printer  (see  184);  a  soldier- 
statesman,  the  poet-artist  Rossetti.  (Exceptions  are  a  few 
short  words  of  everyday  occurrence:  bookmaker,  dress- 
maker, shopgirl.) 

188.  Compounds  of  "store"  should  be  hyphenated  when 
the  prefix  contains  only  one  syllable;  otherwise  not: 

drug-store,  feed-store  (but:  bookstore);  grocery  store,  dry- 
goods  store. 

189.  Compounds  of  "fellow"  are  hyphenated  when 
forming  the  first  element  of  the  compound : 

fellow-man,  fellow-beings;  but:  playfellow;  "Mr.  Good- 
fellow";   politics  makes  strange  bedfellows. 

190..  Compounds  of  "father,"  "mother,"  "brother," 
"sister,"  "daughter,"  "parent,"  and  "foster"  should 
be  hyphenated  when  forming  the  first  element  of 
the  compound: 

father-love  (but:  fatherland),  mother- tongue,  brother-officer, 
sister-nation,  foster-son,  daughter-cells,  parent-word. 

191.  Compounds  of  "great,"  indicating  the  fourth  degree 
in  a  direct  line  of  descent,  call  for  a  hyphen: 
great-grandfather,  great-grandson. 

192.  Compounds  of  "life"  and  "world"  require  a  hyphen: 

life-history,  life-principle  (but:  lifetime),  world-power,  world- 
problem. 


76  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

193.  Compounds  of  "skin"  with  words  of  one  syllable 
are  to  be  printed  as  one  word;  with  words  of  more 
than  one,  as  two  separate  words: 

calfskin,  sheepskin;  alligator  skin. 

194.  Compounds  of   "master"  should   be  hyphenated: 

master-builder,  master-stroke  (exception:    masterpiece). 

195.  Compounds  of  "god,"  when  this  word  forms 
the  second  element  of  the  compound,  should  be 
hyphenated: 

sun-god,  rain-god  (but:   godsend,  godson). 

196.  "Half,"  "quarter,"  etc.,  combined  with  a  noun 
should  be  followed  by  a  hyphen: 

half-truth,  half-tone,  half-year,  half-title,  quarter-mile. 

197.  "Semi-,"  "demi-,"  "bi-,"  "tri-,"  etc.,  do  not  ordina- 
rily demand  a  hyphen ;  unless  followed  by  i,  w,  or  y : 

semiannual,  demigod,  bipartisan,  bichromate,  bimetallist, 
trimonthly,  tricolor,  trifoliate,  semi-incandescent,  bi- 
weekly, tri-yearly. 

Exceptions  are  long  or  unusual  formations: 
semi-barbarous,  semi-translucent. 

198.  Compounds  of  ''self,"  when  this  word  forms  the 
first  element  of  the  compound,  are  hyphenated: 

self-evident,  self-respect. 

199.  Combinations  with  "fold"  are  to  be  printed  as  one 
word  if  the  number  contains  only  one  syllable;  if  it 
contains  more,  as  two: 

twofold,  tenfold;   fifteen  fold,  a  hundred  fold. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  77 

200.  Adjectives  formed  by  the  suffixation  of  "like"  to 
a  noun  are  usually  printed  as  one  word  if  the  noun 
contains  only  one  syllable  (except  when  ending  in 
I);  if  it  contains  more  (or  is  a  proper  noun),  they 
should  be  hyphenated: 

childlike,  homelike,  warlike,  godlike;  eel-like,  bell-like; 
woman-like,  business-Hke;    American-like  (but:    ChristHke). 

201.  "Vice,"  "ex-,"  "elect,"  "general,"  and  "heutenant," 
constituting  parts  of  titles,  should  be  connected 
with  the  chief  noun  by  a  hyphen: 

Vice-Consul  Taylor,  ex-President  Cleveland,  the  governor- 
elect,  the  postmaster-general,  a  lieutenant-colonel. 

202 .  Compounds  of  "by-,"  when  this  word  forms  the  first 
element  of  the  compound,  should  be .  hj-phenated : 

by-product,  by-laws  (but:   bygones). 

203.  The  prefixes  "co-,"  "pre-,"  and  "re-,"  when  followed 
by  the  same  vowel  as  that  in  which  they  terminate, 
or  by  w  or  y,  take  a  hyphen;  but,  as  a  rule,  they 
do  not  when  followed  by  a  different  vowel  or  by  a 
consonant,  except  to  avoid  mispronunciation: 

co-operation,  pre-empted,  re-enter,  co-worker,  re-yield; 
but:  coequal,  coeducation,  prearranged,  reinstal;  cohabita- 
tion, prehistoric,  recast  (but:   re-use,  re-read). 

Note. — The  Botanical  Gazette  prints:   cooperate,  reenter,  etc. 

Exceptions  are  combinations  with  proper  names,  long 
or   unusual   formations,   and   words   in   which   the 


78  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

omission  of  the  hyphen  would  convey  a  meaning 
different  from  that  intended  (cf .  9,  19,  208) : 

pre-Raphaelite,  re-democratize,  re-pulverization;  re-cover 
(  =  cover  again),  re-creation,  re-formation  (as  distinguished 
from  reformation). 

204.  Omit  the  hyphen  from  "today,"  "tomorrow," 
"tonight,"  "viewpoint,"  "standpoint."     (See   119.) 

205.  The  negative  particles  "un-,"  "in-,"  "il-,"  "im-," 
and  "a-"  do  not  usually  require  a  hyphen: 
unmanly,  undemocratic,  inanimate,  indeterminate,  illimitable, 
impersonal,  asymmetrical. 

Exceptions  would  be  rare  and  artificial  combinations. 
The  particle  "non-,"  on  the  contrary,  ordinarily  calls 
for  a  hyphen,  except  in  the  commonest  words: 

non-aesthetic,  non-subservient,  non-contagious,  non-ability, 
non-interference,  non-unionist,  non-membership;  but:  nonage, 
nondescript,  nonessential,  nonplus,  nonsense,  noncombatant. 

206.  "  Quasi-"  prefixed  to  a  noun  or  an  adjective  requires 
a  hyphen: 

quasi-corporation,  quasi-historical. 

207.  "Over"  and  "under"  prefixed  to  a  word  should  not 
be  followed  by  a  hyphen,  except  in  unusual  cases: 
overbold,  overemphasize,  overweight,  underfed,  underestimate, 
undersecretary;  but:  over-soul,  under-man,  over-spiritualistic. 

208.  The  Latin  prepositions  "ante,"  "infra,"  "inter," 
"intra,"  "post,"  "sub,"  "super,"  and  "supra," 
and  the  Greek  preposition  "anti"  prefixed  to  a 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  79 

word  do  not  ordinarily  require  a  hyphen,  unless  fol- 
lowed by  the  letter  with  which  they  terminate,  or, 
in  the  case  of  those  prefixes  ending  in  a  vowel, 
by  -w,  by  -v,  or  by  a  vowel  which  would  form  a 
diphthong  in  conjunction  with  the  terminal  letter: 

antedate,  antechamber,  antediluvian,  inframarginal,  inter- 
national, interstate,  intercity,  intramural,  postscript,  post- 
graduate, postprandial,  subconscious,  submarine,  subtitle, 
subway,  superiine,  supraliminal,  antidote,  antiseptic  (but: 
anti-imperialistic— cf.  203),  intra-atomic,  ante-war,  intra- 
yearly,  ante-urban,  anti-eclectic. 

Exceptions  are  such  formations  as — 

ante-bellum,  ante-Nicene,  anti-Semitic,  inter-university,  post- 
revolutionary. 

209.  "Extra,"  "pan,"  and  "ultra"  as  a  rule  call  for  a 
hyphen : 

extra-hazardous,  pan-Hellenic,  ultra-conservative  (but: 
extraordinary,  Ultramontane). 

210.  In  fractional  numbers,  spelled  out,  connect  by  a 
hyphen  the  numerator  and  the  denominator,  unless 
either  already  contains  a  hyphen: 

"The  year  is  two-thirds  gone";  four  and  five-sevenths; 
thirty  one-hundredths;   but:  thirty-one  hundredths. 

But  do  not  hyphenate  in  such  cases  as — 

"One  half  of  his  fortune  he  bequeathed  to  his  widow;  the 
other,  to  charitable  institutions." 

211.  In  the  case  of  two  or  more  compound  words  occurring 
together,  which  have  one  of  their  component  elements 


8o 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


in  common,  this  element  is  frequently  omitted  from 
all  but  the  last  word,  and  its  implication  should  be 
indicated  by  a  hyphen : 

in  English-  and  Spanish-speaking  countries;  one-,  five-,  and 
ten-cent  pieces;  "If  the  student  thinks  to  find  this  character 
where  many  a  literary  critic  is  searching — in  fifth-  and  tenth- 
century  Europe — he  must  not  look  outside  of  manuscript  tra- 
dition." 

Note. — Some  writers  regard  this  hyphen  as  an  objectionable 
Teutonism. 

212.  A  hyphen  is  used  to  indicate  a  prefix  or  a  suffix,  as  a 
particle  or  syllable,  not  complete  in  itself: 

"The  prefix  a-";  "The  Spanish  diminutive  suffixes  -ito 
and  -cita. 

213.  A  hyphen  is  employed  to  indicate  the  syllables  of  a 
word : 

di-a-gram,  pho-tog-ra-phy. 


214.  Following  is  a  list  of  words  of  everyday  occurrence 
which  should  be  hyphenated,  and  which  do  not  fall 
under  any  of  the  foregoing  classifications: 


after-years 

anti-trust 

bas-relief 

birth-rate 

blood-feud 

blood-relations 

child-study 

coat-of-arms 

cross-examine 

cross-reference 


cross-secuon  man-of-war 

death-rate  mid-year 

first-fruits  nature-study 

folk-song  object-lesson 

good-will  page-proof 
(as  an  entity)pay-roll 

guinea-pig  poor-law 

horse-power  post-office 

ice-cream  sea-level 

loan-word  sense-perception 


son-in-law 
subject-matter 
thought-process 
title-page 
wave-length 
well-being 
well-nigh 
well-wisher 
wide-awake 
will-power 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   DIVISIONS  8 1 


DIVISIONS 

215.  Avoid  all  unnecessary  divisions  of  words.  Wherever 
consistent  with  good  spacing,  carry  the  whole  word 
over  into  the  next  line. 

216.  Do  not,  in  wide  measures  (20  ems  or  more),  divide 
on  a  syllable  of  two  letters,  if  possible  to  avoid  it. 
Never  carry  over  a  syllable  of  two  letters.  Good 
spacing,  however,  is  paramount.  Words  of  four 
letters — like  ow-/y— should  never  be  divided;  words 
of  five  or  six^like  oc-cur,  of-fice,  let-ter — rarely. 

217.  Never  let  more  than  two  consecutive  lines  termi- 
nate in  a  hyphen,  if  at  all  avoidable.  The  next  to 
the  last  line  in  a  paragraph  ought  not  to  end  in  a 
divided  word;  and  the  last  line  (the  "breakline") 
should,  in  measures  of  15  ems  and  up,  contain  at 
least  four  letters.  Similarly,  try  to  avoid  a  divided 
word  at  the  bottom  of  a  right-hand  (recto)  page. 

218.  Do  not  divide  proper  nouns,  especially  names  of 
persons,  unless  absolutely  necessary. 

219.  Do  not  separate  (i.e.,  put  in  different  lines)  the 
initials  of  a  name,  or  such  combinations  as  a.d., 
P.M.,  etc. 

220.  Avoid  the  separation  of  a  divisional  mark,  e.g.,  {a) 
or  (i),  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence,  from  the  section 


82  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

which  it  precedes;  i.e.,  do  not  allow  such  mark  to 
fall  at  the  end  of  a  line,  but  carry  it  over  with  the 
matter  to  which  it  pertains. 

221.  Divide  according  to  pronunciation  (the  American 
system),  not  according  to  derivation  (the  English 
system) : 

democ-racy ,  not :  demo-cracy;  knowl-edge,  not:  know-ledge; 
aurif-erous,  not :  auri-ferous;  antip-odes  (still  better:  antipo- 
des— see  224),  not:  anti-podes. 

As  far  as  is  compatible  with  pronunciation  and  good 
spacing,  however,  divide  compounds  on  etymologi- 
cal lines,  or  according  to  derivation  and  meaning: 

dis-pleasure  is  better  than  displeas-ure ;  school-master, 
than  schoolmas-ter. 

Shun  such  monstrosities  as — 
Passo-ver,  diso-bedience,  une-ven,  disa-bled. 

222.  When  two  consonants  meet  between  vowels,  and 
the  syllable  ends  on  one  consonant,  the  division 
may  properly  be  made  between  the  consonants,  the 
pronunciation  determining  the  place  of  division: 

advan-tage,  exces-sive,  finan-cier,  foun-da-tion,  impor-tant, 
In-dian,  moun-tain,  profes-sor,  struc-ture. 

223.  Do  not  terminate  a  line  in  a  soft  c  or  gy  or  in  a  j. 
Escape  the  division  entirely,  if  possible;  if  not  pos- 
sible, divide: 

pro-cess,  not:  proc-ess;  ne-cessary,  not:  nec-essary;  spa- 
cing, not:   spac-ing  (the  rule  being  that  in  present  parti- 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  DIVISIONS  83 

ciples  the  -ing  should  be  carried  over) ;  pro-geny ,  not : 
prog-eny;  pre-judice,  not:  prej-udice. 

Note. — This  rule  differs  from  that  followed  by  Webster  and 
other  dictionaries. 

224.  Divide  on  a  vowel  wherever  practicable.  In  case  a 
vowel  alone  forms  a  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word, 
run  it  into  the  first  line: 

sepa-rate,  not:  sep-arate;  particu-lar,  not:  partic-ular; 
criti-cism,  not:  crit-icism. 

Exceptions  are  words  in  -able  and  -ible,  which  should 

carry  the  vowel  over  into  the  next  line: 

read-able,  not:   reada-ble;   convert-ible,  not:   converti-ble. 

225.  In  hyphenated  nouns  and  adjectives  avoid  additional 
hyphens : 

object-lesson,  not:  object-les-son;  fellow-being,  not:  fel- 
low-being; poverty-stricken,  not:  pov-erty-stricken,  much 
less:  pover-ty-stricken. 

226.  A  coalition  of  two  vowel-sounds  into  one  (i.e.,  a 
diphthong)  should  be  treated  as  one  letter.  There- 
fore do  not  divide: 

peo-ple  (either  syllable  makes  a  bad  division),  Cae-sar 
(cf.  218),  bu-ilding. 

227.  In  derivatives  from  words  ending  in  t,  the  t,  in 
divisions,  should  be  carried  into  the  next  line  with 
the  suffix  if  the  accent  has  been  shifted;  if  the  deriva- 
tive has  retained  the  accent  of  the  parent- word, 
the  /  should  be  left  in  the  first  line: 

objec-tive  (from  ob'ject);  defect-ive  (from  defect');  but: 
respec-tively,  distinc-tive. 


84  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

228.  The  addition  of  a  plural  s,  adding  a  new  syllable 
to  words  ending  in  an  .y-sound,  does  not  create  a 
new  excuse  for  dividing  such  words : 

hor-ses  and  circumstan-ces  are  impossible  divisions. 

229.  Adjectives  in  -ical  should  be  divided  on  the  i: 
physi-cal,  not  phys-ical  nor  physic-al. 

230.  Do  not  divide  nothing. 

231.  The  following  are  condensed  rules  for  dividing 
words  in  the  foreign  languages  most  frequently  met 
with  in  proofreading.  While  perhaps  not  entirely 
comprehensive,  they  will  be  found  to  cover  every 
ordinary  contingency. 

FRENCH 

a)  The  fundamental  principle  is  to  divide  on  a 
vowel  as  far  as  possible,  avoiding  consonantal  end- 
ing of  syllables: 

in-di-vi-si-bi-li-te,  a-che-ter;  ta-bleau  (not:  tab-leau) ; 
ba-lancer  (not:  bal-ancer). 

b)  Two  consonants  of  which  the  second  is  /  or  r 
(but  not  the  combinations  rl,  Ir),  are  both  carried 
over  to  the  following  syllable: 

ta-bleau,  e-cri-vain,  per-dre,  qua-tre;    par-ler,  hur-ler. 

c)  There  are  as  many  syllables  as  there  are  vowels, 
even  if  soundless : 

par-lent,  vic-toi-re,  pro-pri-e-tai-re,  guer-re,  fil-les; 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   DIVISIONS  85 

but  a  mute  e  following  a  vowel  does  not  form  a 
syllable : 
e-taient,  joue-rai; 

and  i,  y,  0,  ou,  u,  when  preceding  other  vowels,  are 
often  sounded  as  consonants,  and  then  do  not  form 
a  syllable: 
bien,  e-tions,  yeux,  loin,  fouet-ter,  e-cuel-le. 

GERMAN 

a)  The  fundamental  principle  is  to  divide  on  a 
vowel  as  far  as  possible: 
hii-ten,  le-ben,  Fa-brik. 

h)  If  several  consonants   stand  between  vowels, 

usually  only  the  last  is  carried  over: 

Rit-ter,  klir-ren,  Klemp-ner,  Ver-wand-te,  Karp-fen. 

c)  sz,  ch,  sch,  ph,  st,  th  are  never  separated  (but  see 
(/)  below): 

Bu-sze,  Be-cher,  Ha-scher  (but:  Haus-chen),  Geo-gra-phie, 
La-sten,  Ma-thilde. 

d)  If  ck  must  be  divided,  it  is  separated  into  k-k: 
Deckel— Dek-kel. 

e)  In  foreign  words  (Fremdwdrter) ,  combinations  of 
b,  d,  g,  k,  p,  t,  with  I  ox  r  are  carried  over: 
Pu-bli-kum,  Me-trum,  Hy-drant. 

/)  Compound  words  are  separated  first  into  their 
component  elements,  and  within  each  element  the 
foregoing  rules  apply: 
Fiirsten-schlosz,  Tiir-an-gel,  Inter-esse. 


86  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

ITALIAN 

a)  The  fundamental  principle  is  to  divide  on  a 
vowel  as  far  as  possible: 

ta-vo-li-no,  nar-ra-re. 

b)  s  before  a  consonant,  r  following  a  consonant, 
ch,  gh,  gli  (gl),  gn,  qu,  sc,  cl,  fl,  gl,  pi  are  never 
separated : 

ca-sti-ghi,  a-vro,  mi-glio-re,  bi-s6-gno,  in-chio-stro,  u-scire. 

c)  i=y   and  u=w  go  with  the  following  vowel; 

ac,  au,  ei,  eu,  oi  are  not  separated: 

miei,  tuoi. 

SPANISH 

a)  The  fundamental  principle  is  to  divide  on  a 
vowel  as  far  as  possible: 
ca-ra-co-les,  re-ba-no,  fle-xi-bi-li-dad. 
h)  br,  bl,  ch,  cl,  cr,  dr,  II,  pr,  rr,  tr,  and  n,  being 
regarded  as  simple  consonants,  follow  the  fore- 
going rule;  cc  and  nn  are  divided,  as  in  English: 
mu-cha-cho,  ba-ta-lla,  bu-116,  ba-rre-no,  ci-ga-rro;  ac-ce-so, 
en-no-ble-cer,  in-ne-ga-ble. 

c)  The  liquid  consonants  /  and  r,  when  preceded  by 
any  consonant  other  than  s,  must  not  be  separated 
from  that  consonant,  except  in  uniting  parts  of 
compound  words: 

ha-blar,  po-dria,  ce-Ie-bra-ci-on,  si-glo;  but  sub-lu-nar, 
sub-ra-yar,  es-la-bon.  . 

d)  Two  separable  consonants  should  be  divided; 
s  is  always  disjoined  from  a  following  consonant: 
cuer-da,  chas-co,  pron-to;  has-ta,  as-pi-rar,  cons-pi-rar. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  DIVISIONS  87 

GREEK 

a)  Single  consonants,  combinations  of  consonants 
which  can  begin  a  word,  and  mutes  followed  by  f^ 
or  p  are  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable : 

£-^0),  c-yw,  c-CTTre'-pa,  ve'-Krap,  d-Kfjirj,  Se-crp,o5,  fXL-Kpov,  irpd- 
yfUL-Tos,  yi-yvw-aKU). 

Other  combinations  of  consonants  are  divided: 

Trpd<r-cr(D,   eA-Trts,  ev-Bov,  dp-jxa-Ta. 

b)  Compound  words  are  divided  into  their  original 
parts ;  subject  to  that  the  foregoing  rule  applies : 

Trpoa-d-yu),   nap-d-yw. 

LATIN 

a)  A  Latin  word  has  as  many  syllables  as  it  has 

vowels  or  diphthongs  {ae,  au,  oe,  ei,  eu,  ui). 

h)  When  a  single  consonant  occurs  between  two 

vowels,  divide  before  the  consonant: 

Cae-sar,  me-ri-di-es. 

c)  In  the  case  of  two  or  more  consonants  divide 
before  the  last  consonant,  except  in  the  combina- 
tions: mute  {p,  ph,  b,  t,  th,  d,  c,  ch,  g)+ liquid  (/,  r), 
and  qu  or  gu: 

om-nis,  scrip-tus,  cunc-tus  (but:  pa-tris,  e-quus,  lin-gua). 

d)  Compound  words  are  separated  first  into  their, 
component  elements,  and  within  each  element  the 
foregoing  rules  apply: 

ad-est,  ab-rum-po,  red-e-o,  trans-i-go. 


88  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


FOOTNOTES 

232.  For  reference  indexes,  as  a  rule,  use  superior  figures. 
Only  in  special  cases  should  asterisks,  daggers,  etc., 
be  employed  (see  234);  for  instance,  in  tabular  or 
algebraic  matter,  where  figures  would  be  likely  to 
cause  confusion.  Index  figures  in  the  text  should  be 
placed  after  the  punctuation  marks,  without  space, 
except  in  German,  where  they  are  placed  inside: 
....  the  niceties  of  style  which  were  then  invading  Attic 
prose,'  and  which  made  .... 

'  In  particular  the  avoidance  of  hiatus. 
*  Schcnk's  equation. 

When  figures  are  not  used,  the  sec^uence  of  indexes 
should  be: 

*  ("asterisk"  or  "star"),  f  ("dagger"),  %  ("double  dagger"), 
§  ("section  mark"),  l[  ("parallels"),  ^  ("paragraph  mark"). 

233.  Where  references  to  the  same  work  follow  each  other 
closely  and  uninterruptedly,  use  ihid.  instead  of 
repeating  the  title.  Thus  ihid.  takes  the  place  of  as 
much  of  the  previous  reference  as  is  repeated. 
Ihid.  should,  however,  not  ordinarily  be  used  for  the 
first  footnote  on  a  verso  (left-hand)  page;  it  is  better 
usage  either  to  repeat  the  title,  if  short,  or  to  use 
loc.  cit.  (when  reference  is  to  entire  citation)  or 
op.  cit.  (when  work  only  is  cited). 

1  Spencer,  Principles  of  Sociology^  chap.  iv.        3  Ibid.,  chap.  v. 

2  Ihid.  *  Spencer,  Iqq^  cit. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  FOOTNOTES  89 

234.  Footnotes  to  tables,  whether  the  tables  are  ruled  or 
open,  should  be  in  6-pt.,  and  should  invariably  be 
placed  at  the  foot  of  the  table  and  not  at  the  foot 
of  the  page.  For  reference  indexes  in  such  cases 
use  asterisks,  etc.,  and  not  superior  figures  (see 
232). 

235.  If  the  author's  name  is  given  in  the  text  in  connec- 
tion with  a  reference  to,  or  a  quotation  from,  his 
work,  it  should  not  be  repeated  in  the  footnote: 

....  This  theory  is  questioned  by  Herbert,  as  follows: 
"I  cannot  admit  .  .  .  ."' 

'  Laifs  of  the  Ancien/s,  I,  153. 

236.  It  is  better  to  place  the  index  figure  in  the  text  at 
the  end  of  the  quotation  (see  illustration  above). 

237.  Ordinarily,  omit  "Vol.,"  "chap.,"  and  "p."  in 
references  to  particular  passages.  Use  Roman  numer- 
als (capitals)  for  Volume,  Book,  Part,  and  Division, 
except  in  reference  to  ancient,  classical  authors 
or  works,  when  lower-case  roman  numerals  should 
be  used;  Roman  numerals  (lower-case)  for  chapter 
and  pages  of  introductory  matter  (Preface,  etc.) ;  and 
Arabic  numerals  for  number  (Heft)  and  text  pages. 
Only  when  confusion  would  be  liable  to  arise,  or  in 
exceptional  cases,  use  "  Vol.,"  "p.,"  etc.,  in  connection 
with  the  numerals;  but  where  the  reference  is  to  a 
page,  unaccompanied  by  further  details,  the  abbre- 
viation *'p."  or  "pp."  must  of  course  be  used.     In 


90  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

classical  references  use  no  comma  between  author's 
name  and  the  title  of  his  work ;  and  no  comma  fol- 
lowing the  title,  unless  ''Vol.,"  "p.,"  or  some  kin- 
dred symbol  is  used.  In  all  references  to  divisions 
of  classical  or  ancient  works,  use  periods  in  place  of 
commas,  reserving  the  comma  to  indicate  a  succes- 
sion (of  pages,  etc.) : 

1  Miller,   French  Rev.    (2d  ed.;   London:   Abrahams,    1888), 
II,  Part  IV,  iii. 

2  S.   I.   Curtiss,  "The   Place   of   Sacrifice   among   Primitive 
Semites,"  Biblical  World,  XXI  (1903),  248  S.. 

J  P.  63;  pp.  27-36. 
*  Cicero  De  officiis  i.  133,  140. 
sDe  div.  per  somn.  i,  p.  463(1. 

^Fraser,    The   Golden  Bought,  I,   27   [superior  figure  within 
punctuation  indicating  number  of  the  edition]. 

The  same  practice  prescribed  for  classical  references 
is  frequently  desired  by  authors  with  respect  to 
English  references,  and  may  with  equal  propriety 
be  followed: 

I  W.  W.  Greg  Pastoral  Poetry  and  Pastoral  Drama  (London 
1906)  114.        "  . 

238.  The  date  of  publication  in  a  reference  to  a  periodical 
should  immediately  follow  the  volume  number,  and 
should  be  put  in  parentheses  (see  illustration  above). 

239.  In  work  set  on  the  linotype  machine  footnotes  should 
be  numbered  consecutively  through  an  article,  in  a 
journal,  or  through  a  chapter,   in  a  book,   to  save 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  FOOTNOTES  91 

resetting  in  case  of  change  (see  "Hints  to  Authors 
and  Editors,"  note  under  "Footnotes,"  p.  122). 

Note. — Exceptions  to  these  rules  are  footnotes  in  the  Botani- 
cal Gazette  and  the  Astrophysical  Journal,  which  have  adopted 
the  following  styles: 

Botanical  Gazette — 

'  Livingston,  B.  E.,  (i)  On  the  nature  of  the  stimulus  which 
causes  the  change  in  form  of  polymorphic  green  algae.  BoT. 
Gaz.  30:289-317.   1900. 

» ,  (2)  The  heredity  of  sex.     Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool. 

40:187-218.   1903. 

Astrophysical  Journal — ■ 

'  "Revision  of  Wolf's  Sun-Spot  Relative  Numbers,"  Monthly 
Weather  Review,  30,  171,  1902. 

"  Astrophysical  Journal,  10,  333,  1899. 

3  Wolf,  Astronomische  Nachrichten,  189,  261,  191 1. 

Botanical  Gazette  numbers  its  footnotes  consecutively  through- 
out an  article;  all  the  other  journals  of  the  University  of  Chicago 
Press  number  their  footnotes  from  i  up  on  each  page,  except 
that  the  Journal  of  Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures  numbers 
them  consecutively  in  special  cases. 


92  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


INDEXING 

240.  In  indexes  of  proper  names  and  other  similar 
alphabetical  lists  the  following  rules  should  be 
observed : 

a)  Names  beginning  with  M',  Mc,  Mac,  or  St., 
Ste.,  whether  the  following  letter  is  capitalized  or 
not,  should  be  listed  as  if  the  prefix  were  spelled 
Mac,  Saint,  Sainte,  thus  making  it  unnecessary 
for  one  who  consults  the  index  to  look  in  several 
places  to  make  sure  of  finding  the  name  sought: 

Machiavelli  St.  Louis 

M'Intyre,  Henry  Sainte  Beuve 

Mclntyre,  James  Salt  Lake  City 

Maclntyre,  Thomas 
Mack,  Joseph 

b)  Compound  names  should  be  listed  under  the 
first  part  of  the  name.  List  the  other  parts  of 
the  names  in  their  respective  alphabetical  positions 
and  give  a  cross-reference  to  the  first: 

Campbell-Bannerman,  Sir  Henry 

Lloyd-George,  David 

Watts-Dunton,  Theodore 

George,  Lloyd-,  David.     Sec  Lloyd-George. 

On  the  other  hand,  in  the  case  of  hyphenated 
names  gratuitously  adopted,  as  in  the  case  of 
married  women  adding  the  maiden  name  to  the 
married  name,  the  name  preceding  the  hyphen 
may  be  disregarded,  and  listing  should  be  under 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   INDEXING  93 

the  letter  of  the  true  name,  with  a  cross-reference 
under  the  name  preceding  the  hyphen. 

c)  Names  with  prefixes  should  be  Usted  under  the 
part  following  the  prefix,  except  (i)  in  English 
(see  h  above);  (ii)  in  French  when  the  prefix 
consists  of  or  contains  the  article;  (iii)  in  Italian 
and  Spanish  when  the  prefix  consists  simply  of  the 
article;  (iv)  in  Dutch,  the  "Van,"  "Ten,"  etc.,  being 
always  capitalized  (see  3,  note) ;  (v)  when  the 
prefix  and  the  name  are  written  as  one  word. 
Naturalized  names  with  prefixes  should  be  treated 
according  to  the  rules  for  the  language  adopted. 

Hoffman,  von;    Lima,   de;    Ponte   e   Horto,   da;     Santos 

Pereira  Jardin,  dos. 

English:   A  Becket;   De  Quincey;   De  Morgan;   D'Israeli; 

MacDonald;  Van  Buren. 

French:  DuMoncel;  La  Rochefoucauld;  LeSage;  DuPin; 

Du  Bocage;  but:   Rosny,  de;  Bouille,  de;  Allard,  de. 

Italian  and  Spanish:    La  Lumia;    La  Farina;    Lo  Gatto; 

but:  Farina,  da;  Rio,  del;  Torre,  della. 

Prefix  compounded  with  the  name:  Vanderkinde,  Zurlauben, 

Dechambre,  Vanderhoeck,  Delacroix. 

In  the  case  of  the  exceptions  above  noted,  the 
first  letter  of  the  prefix  governs  the  alphabetical 
position  of  the  name. 

d)  Names  spelled  with  the  umlaut  a,  0,  ii  should 
be  listed  as  if  the  umlaut  were  spelled  out  ae,  oe,  ue: 

Miiller,  A. 
Mufola,  C. 
Muller,  B. 


94  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

e)  Names  having  two  parts,  or  names  of  firms, 
connected  by  "and,"  "&,"  "y"  (Spanish),  ''et" 
(French),  ''und"  (German),  or  "e"  (Italian), 
should  be  listed  according  to  the  first  letter  of  the 
name  preceding  the  connective:  Smith  &  Evans 
(under  "S");  Gomez  y  Pineda  (under  "G"); 
Loubet  et  Meunier  (under  "L");  Duncker  und 
Humblot  (under  *'D");  Sandrone  e  Vallardi 
(under  "S"). 
/)  On  the  subject  of  cross-references  see  62. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TABULAR  WORK  95 


TABULAR  WORK 

241.  In  ii-pt.  and  lo-pt.  matter  open  (unruled)  tables 
should  ordinarily  be  set  in  9-pt,  leaded;  ruled,  in 
8-pt.  solid.  In  9-pt.  matter  both  open  and  ruled 
tables  should  be  set  in  8-pt.  solid.  In  8-pt.  matter 
open  tables  should  be  set  in  6-pt.  leaded;  ruled,  in 
6-pt.  solid.  In  6-pt.  matter  both  open  and  ruled 
tables  should  be  set  in  6-pt.  solid.  For  columns 
representing  totals,  averages,  percentages,  and 
generalizations  italic  and  black-face  figures  may 
be  used  if  desired  to  set  off  the  various  classes  of 
results.     (See  Table  III,  p.  100.) 

242.  Captions  for  the  columns  of  open  tables  and  box- 
heads  for  ruled  tables  should  ordinarily  be  set  in 
6-pt.  Box-heads  of  open  tables  should  be  6-pt.  caps 
and  lower  case  unless  subheads  are  used,  in  which 
case  caps  and  small  caps  are  used  for  the  upper 
head  (see  Table  III,  p.  100).  In  ruled  tables  with 
box-heads  of  several  stories,  the  upper  story — pri- 
mary heads — should  be  set  in  caps  and  small  caps, 
except  where  the  second  story  consists  of  figures 
only  (see  Table  I,  p.  98) ;  the  lower — secondary — in 
caps  and  lower  case.  Wherever  small  caps  are 
used  in  box-heads,  the  heading  for  the  "stub"  (i.e., 
first  column)  should,  as  a  rule,  also  be  set  in  caps 
and  small  caps. 


96  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

243.  In  ruled  tables  there  should  be  at  least  two  leads' 
space  between  the  horizontal  rules  and  the  matter 
inclosed,  and,  if  practicable,  at  least  the  equivalent 
of  an  en  quad,  of  the  type  in  which  the  body  of 
the  table  is  set,  between  the  perpendicular  rules  and 
the  matter  inclosed. 

244.  In  open  tables  either  periods,  one  em  apart  and 
aligned,  or  leaders,  may  be  used  between  the  col- 
umns (see  248).  In  ruled  tables,  in  the  "stub," 
leaders  should  usually  be  employed,  if  there  is  room, 
except  in  case  the  stub  runs  over  and  a  brace  is 
necessary.  (A  leader  is  a  piece  of  type,  having  dots 
[''period  leader"]  or  short  lines  ["hyphen  leader"] 
upon  its  face,  used  in  tables,  indexes,  etc.,  to 
lead  the  eye  across  a  space  to  the  right  word  or 
number.) 

245.  In  ruled  columns  of  figures,  to  express  a  blank  use 
leaders  across  the  full  width  of  the  column.  Cen- 
ter the  figures  in  the  column;  if  they  cannot  be  put 
in  the  exact  center,  and  there  is  an  unequal  number 
of  digits  in  the  groups,  leave  more  space  on  the  left 
than  on  the  right.  All  decimals  and  dollar  signs 
or  other  concrete  values  should  be  aUgned. 

246.  When  there  is  reading-matter  in  the  columns  of  a 
ruled  table,  it  should  be  centered,  if  possible;  if  any 
line  runs  over,  use  hanging  indention,  and  align  all 
on  the  left. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TABULAR  WORK  97 

247.  Double  rules  should  be  used  at  the  top  of  all  tables, 
but  perpendicularly,  as  a  usual  thing,  only  when  a 
table  is  doubled  up  on  itself  and  the  stub  is  re- 
peated. (See  Table  IV,  p.  100.)  In  continued 
broadside  tables  where  the  heading  is  not  repeated 
use  a  single  rule  only. 

248.  Tables  of  two  columns  only  should  be  set  open; 
of  three  or  more,  ruled,  except  in  such  a  case  as 
the  table  on  p.  99.  All  continuations  of  tables 
should  be  of  the  same  dimensions,  even  if  blank 
columns  are  necessary,  and  tables  wuth  identical 
headings  should  stand  parallel. 

249.  "Table  I,"  etc.,  in  headlines  of  tables  should  ordi- 
narily be  set  in  caps  of  the  type  in  which  the  body  of 
the  table  is  set  and  should  not  exceed  the  width  of 
the  table;  the  following  (descriptive)  line,  if  any, 
should  be  set  in  caps  and  small  caps  of  the  same 
type.  A  single  descriptive  headline,  not  pre- 
ceded by  the  number  of  the  table,  should  be  set 
in  caps  of  the  tj-pe  in  which  the  table  is  set.  A 
footnote  to  the  table  should  be  set  in  6-pt.  with  a 
paragraph  indention,  and  should  not  exceed  the 
width  of  the  table.  But  when  6-pt.  and  8-pt.  ruled 
tables  are  both  used  in  the  same  work,  use  8-pt. 
headings  over  all  tables  (see  234).  When  tables 
containing  footnotes  run  over  several  pages  it  is 
necessary  to  repeat  the  footnotes  on  each  even  page. 


98 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


250.  Specimen  tables  for  illustration: 

TABLE  I 
Distribution  of  Stars  in  Eight  Clusters 


Plate  (Exp.) 


Ring 

Sectors 

15° 

45° 

165° 

I9S° 

N.G.C.    5024,    MESSIER    53 


102   {li 


(0* 

344 
384 

I 

385 

362 

376 

II 

200 

182 

189 

200 

III. . . . 

100 

92 

94 

106 

[iv 

44 

28 

34 

42 

N.G.C.  5272,  MESSIER  3 


64  (5") 


65  (15' 


32s 
370 
196 

97 
38 


(0* 

459 
56 
14 
10 
10 

669 

153 
68 
22 
14 

I 

II 

III. . . . 

[iv 

(0 

48 

20 
8 
3 

42 

16 

12 

6 

60 

17 
6 
6 

I 

]ll 

III. .. . 

[iv 

168 

70 

26 

6 

137 
69 
29 
16 

174 
54 
20 
10 

466 

54 


680 

177 
75 
30 
15 


*  Radius  of  central  area  .05. 

SPACES  BETWEEN  NINE-UNIT  LEADERS 

(For  Eight-Point) 
Nine-unit  leaders  with  one  en  between 


With  one  em  between  .... 
With  one  and  one-half  ems  between 
With  two  ems  between  . 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TABULAR  WORK 


99 


(For  Nine-Point) 

Leaders  with  one  en  between     .    .    .    . 

With  one  em  between 

With  one  and  one-half  ems  between 
With  two  ems  between   . 


Thickness 

jT                                                                                Feet  Inches 

8.  One  layer  of  gray  limestone ...     4  ° 

7.  Layer  similar  to  one  above.  ...     2  2 
6.  Massive,  Hght-gray  layer.    No 

fossils  noted 3  ° 

5.  Shale  parting i 

4.  Grayish  Umestone 9 

3.  Bluish  shales 2  3 

2.  Limestome,  hard  and  fossilferous     5  4 

I.  Grayish  to  bluish  shales 3  2 


Total 
Thickness 
Feet     Inches 


TABLE  II — Continued 


Method 


I.  From  variable  stars 

II.  From  Kapteyn's  luminosity-curves: 

C.I. —  0.39  to  —0.20 

"    <-o.io •  •  • 

"  "        (Pv.  mag.<iS.3o)- • 

"   — o.ioto— o.oi 

All  colors 

III.  From  Russell's  data  for  absolute  mag- 
nitude: 

C.I.  <-o.io.... 

All  colors 


Provisionally  adopted  mean. 


o  f 00008 

. 000005 
. 000007 
. 000009 
. 00003 
. 00005 


. 00005 
o ''000 10 


No.  Stars 


o . 00003 


17 
53 
23 
33 
495 


53 
495 


lOO  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


TABLE  III 


District 

Members  of 
Family  Groups 

Lodgers 

Total 

Number 

Percentage 

Number 

Percentage 

Stockyards  . . . 

Jewish 

Bohemian  .... 

6,348 

813 

1,183 

12,657 

2,249 

73 
79 
95 
96 

73 

2,383 
220 

27 
21 

8,731 
1,033 

Polish 

Italian 

574 
83s 

4 
27 

13,231 
3,094 

TABLE  IV 


Brine* 

Sea-Watert 

Brine* 

Sea-Waterf 

K 

Na 

Ca 

Mg 

Fe 

1-37 

34-99 

2.02 

0.55 

I.  II 

30-59 
1.20 

3-73 

HCO3 

CI 

Br 

I 

Si 

Percentage 
of  salin- 
ity 

0.20 

55-95 
0.04 
Nil 
0.03 

7.29 

55  29 
0.  19 

Al .. 

O.OI 

4.88 
Nil 

7.69 
0.21 

SO4 

CO3 

330 

*  From  Salt  Creek,  Salt  Point  Peninsula,  Lake  Winnipegosis. 
M.  A.  Parker,  analyst. 

t  Mean  of  77  analyses  by  W.  Dittmar. 


Professor 


SECOND  YEAR 

Electives 
(Two  to  be  taken)  Periods 

Latin 5 

Modern  History 5 

German 5 

French 5 

Cooking  or  Sewing 10 

Music  and  Drawing 

Public  Speaking 3 

Stenography 10 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TABULAR  WORK 


lOI 


TABLE  V 

Mean  Anomalies 


Mean  Anomalies 

With  Regard  to  Sign 

Without  Regard  to  Sign 

Character  of  Stations 

Hay  ford; 

Hay  ford; 

Depth, 

Bouguer 

Depth, 

Bouguer 

113. 7  km. 

1 13. 7  km. 

—0.009 
—    .001 

-I-0.017 
+    .004 

Stations  near  coast 

.021 

•  02s 

Stations  in  interior,  not  in 

mountainous  regions .  .  . 

—    .001 

-    .028 

.019 

■  033 

Stations    in     mountainous 

regions,  below  sea-level. 

—    .003 

—    .  107 

.020 

.108 

Stations    in    mountainous 

regions,  above  sea-level. 

-|-    .001 

—    .110 

.017 

.III 

All  stations  (exxept  the  two 

Seattle  stations) 

—    .002 

—    .036 

.019 

.049 

All  stations 

—0.003 

-0.037 

0.020 

0.050 

SYSTEMATIC  VARIATION  FROM  HOMOGENEITY 
IN  AX' 


Region 

Group 

AA 

AA' 

AA'  Group  c5,  d 

minus 
AA'  Group  a,  b 

4200-4300 

5000-5100 

5100-5200 

5200-5300 

5300-5400 

6300-6500 

[cs,d.. 
\a,b... 

fcs,d.. 
\a..,.. 

fd 

\« 

{!:::: 

fd 

\a 

fd 

\b 

163 

178 

155 
170 

164 
I7S 

177 
194 

195 
212 

•165    I 
.164    / 

.173    1 
.180    / 

.168    \ 
.172    / 

.175  1 
■177  / 

.187  \ 
.196  / 

.212  \ 
.216  / 

+0.001 

—  .007 

—  .004 

—  .002 

—  .009 

—  0.004 

I02 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


TABLE  VI 

The  Distribution  of  Each  Group  in  English  in 
Grades  6-2  to  12-2  Inclusive 


Class  Intervals 


95-100. . . 
90-  94  99 
85-  89.99 
80-  84.99 

75-  79-99 
70-  74.99 
65-  69.99 
60-  64.99 

95-100.  . 
90-  94.99 
85-  89.99 
80-  84.99 

75-  79-99 
70-  74.99 
65-  69.99 
60-  64.99 


42 

6 

65 

54 


29 
6 

80 

58 

5 

5 


Grades 


8-2 


Junior  High-School  Group 


33 

38 

23 

19 

17 

54 

40 

24 

72 

54 

62 

53 

54 

44 

52 

71 

3 

5 

23 

13 

I 

I 

5 

2 

9 

I 

I 

Non- Junior  High-School  Group 


15 
23 
53 
78 
18 

9 

2 


30 

43 

19 

19 

10 

9 

32 

22 

77 

91 

67 

44 

66 

51 

59 

83 

3 

I 

16 

18 

4 

6 

5 

7 

2 

5 

19 
13 

47 
84 
19 


TECHNICAL    TERMS 


EXPLANATION  OF  TECHNICAL  TERMS 

The  Point  System — 

251.  The  point  is  the  underlying  unit  of  all  typographical 
measures. 

252.  The  standard  of  measurement  is  the  pica.  A  pica 
is  twelve  points  (one-sixth  of  an  inch). 

This  line  is  set  in  12-pt.  {pica). 
This  line  is  set  in  11 -pt.  {small  pica). 
This  line  is  set  in  lo-pt.  {long  primer). 
This  line  is  set  in  9-pt.  {bourgeois). 
This  line  is  set  in  8-pt.  {brevier). 
This  line  is  set  in  7-pt.  {minion). 
This  line  is  set  in  6-pt.  (nonpareil) . 
This  line  is  set  in  5-pt.  (/ci!)-/) . 

The  sizes  larger  or  smaller  than  these  are  seldom 
used  in  book  composition. 

Styles  of  Type — 

253.  Ordinary  type  is  called  reman.  To  " roman-quote " 
is  to  put  in  roman  type  between  quotation  marks. 

This  line  is  set  in  roman. 

254.  Type  with  a  sloping  face  is  called  italic  or  italics. 
Italic  is  indicated  in  manuscripts  by  a  straight  line 
under  the  word  or  words  (see  p.  133)- 

This  line  is  set  in  italics. 

los 


io6  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

255.  Type  with  a  heavy  black  face  is  called  hold  face. 
Bold  face  is  indicated  by  a  wavy  line  (see  p.  133). 
This  line  is  set  in  bold  face. 

256.  The  body  of  a  type  is  called  the  shank;  the  upper 
surface,  bearing  the  character,  the  face;  the  part 
of  the  face  projecting  beyond  the  shank,  the  kern; 
the  part  of  the  shank  projecting  beyond  the  face, 
the  shoulder. 

257.  A  font,  or  complete  assortment  of  a  given  size,  of 
type  includes  large  capitals  {^'caps'^),  small  capitals 
{^^  small  caps^'),  and  lower-case  letters  (so  called  from 
being  placed  in  the  lower  half  of  the  printer's  case). 
Caps  are  indicated  by  three  straight  lines;  small 
caps,  by  two  (see  p.  133). 

THESE  ARE   CAPS   OF  9-PT.   ROMAN. 

THESE  ARE  SMALL  CAPS  OF  Q-PT.  ROMAN. 

These  are  lower  case  of  9-pt.  roman. 

Spacing — 

258.  The  technical  names  for  spaces  and  the  methods  of 
spacing  depend  on  whether  the  "foundry"  type  (i.e., 
type  set  by  hand)  or  machine-set  type  is  in  question. 
There  are  several  makes  of  typesetting  machines  on 
the  market,  but  of  these  the  monotype  (see  293)  and 
the  linotype  (see  294)  are  in  commonest  use. 

259.  The  monot3q)e  and  linotype  machines  have  come 
into  such  universal  use  that  a  few  words  regarding 
their  respective  systems  of  spacing  are  proper: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:    TECHNICAL  TERMS       107 
MONOTYPE 

In  monotype  composition  the  unit  system  instead 
of  the  pica  system  of  measurement  is  used.  There 
are  18  units  in  a  quad,  which,  unhke  the  em  quad 
of  the  foundry  type  for  hand  composition,  is  not  a 
perfect  square  at  the  end.  The  standard  space 
(see  261)  is  a  6-unit  space=3-em  space;  a  5-unit 
space  =4-em  space;  a  4-unit  space  =  a  httle  less 
than  a  5-em  space,  and  is  the  smallest  space  in  use 
on  the  monotype  machine.  These  are  cast  from 
matrices,  and  represent  "fixed"  spaces,  i.e.,  un- 
varying in  width.  On  the  other  hand,  in  the  pro- 
cess of  composition  on  the  keyboard,  the  swelling, 
or  justifying,  space  is  used  to  fill  out  a  line.  When 
it  is  evident  that  another  word  or  syllable  cannot 
be  set  in  a  line,  the  keys  indicating  the  proper  space 
are  struck  by  the  operator,  and  all  spaces  in  the 
line  are  spread  equally  to  fill  out  the  Hne,  resulting 
in  spaces  which  do  not  necessarily  contain  a  specific 
number  of  units  (see  293). 

LINOTYPE 

260.  On  the  linotype  machine  the  pica  system  of  meas- 
urement is  used.  There  are  three  "fixed"  spaces 
(see  261) :  the  em  quad,  the  en  quad,  and  the  thin 
space,  which  is  equal  to  a  4-em  space.  To  spread 
the  spaces,  a  space  band  is  used;  this  band  can 
spread  a  space  to  any  size  between  a  3-em  space 
and  a  space  a  trifle  larger  than  an  en  quad.     If  a 


io8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

space  smaller  than  a  thin  space  is  required,  it  must 
be  put  in  by  hand  (see  294). 

FOUNDRY   TYPE    (aND    GENERAL) 

261.  An  em,  em  quad,  or  simply  quad  (=  quadrat)  is  a 
block  of  type  the  top  of  which  forms  a  perfect 
square.  A  12-pt.  quad  is  thus  a  piece  of  metal 
one-sixth  of  an  inch  square  at  the  ends.  The  term 
em  is  also  used  of  the  size  of  such  a  square  in  any 
given  size  of  type  as  a  unit  of  measurement. 
"Indent  8-pt.  2  ems"  thus  means  that  the  Hne  should 
be  indented  16  points.  An  em  dash  is  a  dash  the 
width  of  an  em. 

Two-  and  three-em  quads  are  multiples  of  the  above, 
cast  in  one  block  of  type  metal.  Two-  and  three-em 
dashes  are  dashes  the  width  of  2-  and  3-em  quads 
respectively. 

An  en  quad  is  half  the  size  of  an  em  quad  in  width. 
Thus  an  8-pt.  en  quad  is  4  points  wide  (thick)  and 
8  points  long  (deep).  An  en  dash  is  a  dash  the 
width  of  an  en  quad. 

A  three-em  space  is  one-third  of  an  em  in  thickness. 
This  is  also  called  a  thick  space,  and  is  the  standard 
space  used  to  separate  words. 
A  jour-em  space  is  one- fourth  of  an  em;  a  five-em 
space  is  one-fifth  of  an  em.  Four-  and  5 -em  spaces 
are  also  called  middle  and  thin  spaces. 
A  hair-space  is  any  space  thinner  than  a  5-em. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   TECHNICAL  TERMS        109 


This    line    is    spaced    with    em    quads. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  en  quads. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  3 -em  spaces. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  4-em  spaces. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  5 -em  spaces. 

The  letters  in  this  word  are  hair-spaced:  America 

This  is  a  3 -em  dash:  

This  is  a  2 -em  dash:  

This  is  an  em  dash:  — 
This  is  an  en  dash:  - 

262.  Space  evenly.  A  standard  line  should  have  a  3-em 
space  between  all  words  not  separated  by  other 
punctuation  points  than  commas,  and  after  commas; 
an  en  quad  after  semicolons,  and  colons  followed  by 
a  lower-case  letter;  two  3-em  spaces  after  colons 
followed  by  a  capital;  an  em  quad  after  periods, 
and  exclamation  and  interrogation  points,  conclud- 
ing a  sentence. 

263.  If  necessary  to  reduce  spacing  in  a  line,  begin  with 
commas,  and  letters  of  slanting  form — i.e.,  with  a 
large  "shoulder"  on  the  side  adjoining  the  space;  if 
necessary  to  increase,  begin  with  overlapping  let- 
ters— i.e.,  with  "kerns"  protruding  on  the  side 
adjoining  the  space — straight-up-and-down  letters, 
and  points  other  than  periods  and  commas  (in  this 
order) . 

264.  In  a  well-spaced  line,  with  a  3-em  space  between 
a  majority  of  the  words,  there  should  not  be  more 
than  an  en  quad  between  the  rest;   this  proportion 


no  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

should  be  maintained  in  increasing  or  reducing.  To 
justijy  a  line  is  to  adjust  it,  making  it  even  or  true, 
by  proper  spacing. 

265.  Do  not  follow  an  exceptionally  thin-spaced  line  with 
an  exceptionally  wide-spaced  one,  or  vice  versa,  if 
at  all  avoidable, 

266.  Never  hair-space,  or  em-quad,  a  line  to  avoid  a 
run-over. 

267.  Do  not  space  out  the  last  line  of  a  paragraph  allowing 
of  an  indention  of  an  em  or  more  at  the  end. 

268.  Short  words,  like  "a,"  "an,"  etc.,  should  have  the 
same  space  on  each  side. 

269.  Use  a  thin  space  after  §,  *[[,  and  similar  signs;  before 
"f.,"  "ff.,"  and  the  metric  symbols: 

"§  14.     Be  it  further  ordained  .  .  .  .";    pp.  10  ff.;  16  cm. 

270.  In  American  and  English  sums  of  money  no  space 
is  used  between  the  symbols,  $,  and  £  (pounds), 
5.  (shillings),  and  d.  (pence),  and  the  numerals  (an 
en  leader  is  used  for  a  decimal  point) : 

$2.75;   £10  3.y.  2^.;    10°  C. 

271 .  After  Arabic  and  Roman  numerals  at  the  beginning 
of  lines,  denoting  subsections,  there  should  be  an 
en  quad.  After  Arabic  and  Roman  numerals  at 
the  beginning  of  center-heads  there  should  be  an 
em  quad.  Small-cap  headings  should  have  an  en 
quad  between  the  words;  cap-and-small-cap  and 
cap'^headings,  two  3-em  spaces. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TECHNICAL  TERMS       m 

272.  Scripture  references  should  be  spaced  thus  (use 
9-unit  colon) : 

II  Cor.  1 :  16-20;   2:5 — 3:12. 

273.  Between  letters  forming  products,  and  before 
superior  figures  or  letters  indicating  powers,  and 
inferior  figures  or  letters,  ordinarily  no  space  should 
be  used: 

Hx''  =  '^m'{v'z'  —  2V'wyz  +  2'w^y^). 

Indentation  (Printer's  Term:    Indention) — 

274.  In  linotype  composition  in  measures  of  less  than 
10  picas'  width,  indent  all  sizes  i  em.  In  measures 
of  from  10  to  20,  indent  ii-pt.,  i  em;  lo-pt.,  i|; 
9-pt.,  i^;  8-pt.,  ih;  6-pt.,  2.  In  measures  of  from 
20  to  30,  indent  n-pt.,  i^-  ems;  lo-pt.,  i|;  9-pt.,  i§; 
8-pt.,  2;  6-pt.,  2r^.  This  is  for  plain  paragraphs. 
In  monotype  composition  indentions  should  be 
such  that  all  paragraph  indentions  align  irrespec- 
tive of  the  size  of  the  type.  The  following  inden- 
tions are  a  good  standard  for  measures  of  19  to 
30  picas:  ii-pt.  indented  i^  ems  or  i  em  9  units; 
lo-pt.  indented  if  ems  or  i  em  12  units;  9-pt. 
indented  if  ems  or  i  em  15  units;  8-pt.  indented 
2  ems;  6-pt.  indented  2^  ems  or  2  ems  9  units. 
Narrower  measures  should  be  indented  proportion- 
ately less;  wider,  proportionately  more. 

In  hanging  indentions,  in  measures  of  less  than  10 
picas,  indent  all  sizes  i  em;   from  10  to  20,  ii-pt., 


112  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

lo-pt.,  9-pt.,  and  8-pt.,  i^  ems;  6-pt.,  2  ems;  from 
20  to  30,  ii-pt.,  lo-pt.,  9-pt.,  and  8-pt.,  2  ems; 
6-pt.,  3  ems. 

275.  In  poetry,  center  the  longest  line  and  let  the  inden- 
tion be  governed  by  that;  unless  the  longest  hne 
is  of  disproportionate  length,  in  which  case  an 
average  of  the  long  lines  should  be  struck,  the  idea 
being  to  give  the  whole  a  centered  appearance. 
Where  quotations  from  different  poems,  following 
each  other  in  close  succession,  vary  but  slightly  in 
length  of  verse  lines,  it  is  better  to  indent  all  alike. 
Indent  according  to  rhymes  and  length  of  lines.  In 
blank  verse,  where  the  lines  are  approximately  of 
the  same  length,  they  should  be  aligned.  If  con- 
secutive lines  rhyme,  they  should  likewise,  as  a  rule, 
be  aligned.  If  the  rhymes  alternate,  or  follow  at 
certain  intervals,  indent  the  rhyming  lines  alike;  that 
is,  if,  e.g.,  lines  i  and  3,  and  2  and  4,  rhyme,  set  the 
former  flush  in  the  measure  previously  determined  by 
the  longest  line,  and  indent  the  latter  (usually  one 
em);  follow  this  scheme  in  any  similar  arrange- 
ment. If  any  line  is  disproportionately  short — that 
is,  contains  a  smaller  number  of  feet — indent  it 
more: 

And  blessed  are  the  homy  hands  of  toil ! 
The  busy  world  shoves  angrily  aside 
The  man  who  stands  with  arms  akimbo  set, 
Until  occasion  tells  him  what  to  do. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TECHNICAL  TERMS       113 


I  laugh  at  the  lore  and  the  pride  of  man, 
At  the  sophist  schools  and  the  learned  clan; 
For  what  are  they  all,  in  their  high  conceit. 
When  man  in  the  bush  with  God  may  meet  ? 

So  nigh  is  grandeur  to  our  dust, 

So  near  is  God  to  man. 
When  Duty  whispers  low,  "Thou  must," 

The  youth  replies,  "I  can." 

Not  lightly  fall 

Beyond  recall 
The  written  scrolls  a  breath  can  float; 

The  crowning  fact, 

The  kingliest  act 
Of  Freedom  is  the  freeman's  vote! 

276.  In  ordinary  reading-matter  "plain  paragraphs" 
are  always  preferable.  Where  it  is  desired  to  bring 
into  relief  the  opening  word  or  words  of  a  paragraph, 
or  the  number  introducing  such  paragraph,  or  where 
a  center-head  makes  more  than  three  lines,  "  hanging 
indention"  is  often  employed  (see  284). 

Leads — 

277.  A  lead  is  a  strip  of  metal  used  to  separate  lines  of 
type.  The  ordinary  (standard)  lead  is  2  points 
thick.  Matter  with  leads  between  the  lines  is 
called  leaded;  without,  solid. 

This  book,  for  the  most  part,  is  set  leaded.  This  paragraph, 
for  illustration,  and  the  Index  are  set  solid.  Nearly  all  books 
are  leaded. 


114  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

278.  A  slug  is  a  strip  of  metal,  thicker  than  a  lead,  used 
in  the  make-up  of  printed  matter  into  pages,  to  be 
inserted  after  headlines,  etc.  The  two  standard 
sizes  are  6  and  12  points  (a  nonpareil  and  a  pica) 
thick,  respectively. 

Heads  or  Headings — 

279.  A  center-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  equal  distances 
from  both  margins  of  the  page  or  column.  Center- 
heads  are  usually  set  in  caps  or  in  small  caps,  and 
are  not  followed  by  a  period.  This  is  a  center- 
head  : 

SEC.    Vn.      THE   PRINCIPLES   OF   SOCIOLOGY 

When  such  center-head  makes  more  than  one  line, 
either  the  (inverted)  "pyramid"  form  (for  two  or 
three  lines)  or  "hanging  indention"  (for  more  than 
three  lines)  is  employed: 

ART   EDUCATION  FOR  THE   AMERICAN  PEOPLE,    AS   SHOWN   AT 

THE     LOUISIANA     PURCHASE     EXPOSITION,     IN    THE 

NORMAL   SCHOOLS,   AND   IN   ART   SCHOOLS 

ON  CERTAIN  IMPLICATIONS  OF  POSSIBLE  CHANGES  IN  THE 
FORM  AND  DIMENSIONS  OF  THE  SUN,  AND  SOME  SUGGES- 
TIONS TOWARD  EXPLAINING  CERTAIN  PHENOMENA  OF 
VARIABLE   STARS 

280.  A  side-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  the  side  of  the 
page  or  column.  It  may  either  be  set  in  a  separate 
line,  in  which  case  it  is  usually  set  flush — that  is,  in 
alignment  with  the  margin  of  the  type-page;  or 
run  w— that  is,  run  together  in  a  continuous  line 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TECHNICAL  TERMS       115 


with  the  paragraph  to  which  it  belongs.  The  latter 
is  the  more  common  form.  Side-heads  are  most 
frequently  set  in  italics,  only  the  first  word  and 
proper  names  being  capitalized;  sometimes  in  caps 
and  small  caps  or  in  bold  face  (see  172): 

Side-head — 

A  side-head  is  a  headline  .... 
Side-head. — A  side-head  is  ...  . 
SroE-HEAD. — A  side-head  is  ...  . 

Side-head— 

A  side-head  is  ...  . 

281.  A  cut-in  head  is  a  head  placed  in  a  box  cut  into 
the  side  of  the  type-page,  usually  set  in  different 
type,  and  as  a  rule  placed  under  the  first  two  lines 
of  the  paragraph: 

In  making  inquiry,  therefore,  into  the  value  of  fraternity 
life  among  the  children,  it  is  necessary  to  test  it  entirely  in 

accordance  with  its  power  to  contribute  to  the 
Influence      'w^^f^r^  of  the  school  as  a  social  whole.     The 

school,  being  a  social  organization,  has  a  right 
to  demand  that  every  individual  contribute  the  best  that  is 
in  him  to  the  good  of  all.     In  making  this  contribution,  it 

282.  A  box-head  is  a  head  for  a  column  in  a  ruled  table 
(see  250). 

283.  A  running-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  the  top  of 
each  page  of  a  book,  etc.,  usually  giving  the  main 
title  of  the  work  on  the  left-hand  (verso)  page,  and 
the  title  of  the  chapter,  or  other  subdivision,  on 


Ii6  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

the  right-hand  (recto)  page.  It  should  be  cen- 
tered on  the  page  regardless  of  page  number.  A 
good  working  rule  for  running-heads  is  to  set  them 
in  roman  or  italic  capitals  two  sizes  (points) 
smaller  than  the  type  of  the  text. 

Paragraphs — 

284.  Two  kinds  of  paragraphs  are  distinguished — plain 
and  hanging.  A  plain  (or  regular)  paragraph  has 
the  first  line  indented,  and  the  others  set  flush.  A 
hanging  paragraph  {"hanging  indention")  has  the 
first  line  set  flush,  and  the  others  indented : 

Human  Nature  and  the  Social  Order.     By  Charles  Horton 

CoOLEY.      New  York:    Scribner,  1902.      Pp.  viii-l-404. 

In  terms  of  his  own  thesis  Dr.  Cooley  has  transformed 

the  social  materials  of  his  times  into  a  personal  product; 

his  mind  has  reorganized  and  reproduced  the  suggested,  etc. 

Proofs — 

285.  A  galley-proof  is  an  impression  of  the  type  contained 
in  a  long,  shallow  receptacle  of  metal,  known  as  a 
galley,  into  which  the  compositor,  the  operator,  or 
the  casting-machine  places  the  material  as  it  is  set, 
line  by  line. 

286.  A  page-proof  is  an  impression  of  the  type  material 
made  up  into  page-form. 

287.  A  plate-proof  or  foundry-proof  is  a  proof  taken  of  the 
type-page  immediately  before  an  electrotype  cast  is 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   TECHNICAL  TERMS       117 

made  of  it.  This  proof  has  a  black  border  around 
the  pages,  made  by  ink  from  the  metal  frame  used 
to  hold  the  type  in  place  while  the  cast  is  being 
made.  Most  publications  nowadays  are  printed 
from  such  plates,  and  not  directly  from  the  type. 

288.  A  joid  proof  is  a  galley-proof  containing  author's 
corrections. 

289.  A  revise  is  a  new  proof  of  type  corrected  from  a 
marked  proof. 

Make-up — 

290.  The  arranging  into  page-form  of  type-lines  is  called 
the  make-iip. 

291.  A /0//0  is  a  page-number.  Even  numbers  are  placed 
on  the  verso;  odd,  on  the  recto.  A  drop-folio  is  a 
page-number  placed  at  the  bottom  of  a  page. 

292.  A  half-title  or  bastard  title  is  the  abbreviated  title  of 
a  book  placed  on  a  separate  page  preceding  the  full 
title-page,  or  the  title  of  a  part,  chapter,  etc.,  preced- 
ing such  part  or  chapter  on  a  separate  page  in  the 
body  of  the  book. 

Typesetting  Machines — 

293.  The  monotype — named  Lanston  after  the  patentee — 
is  a  composing-machine  on  which,  by  touching  a  key- 
board, perforations  are  made  in  strips  of  paper,  which 
then  are  transferred  to  a  second  machine,  where  the 


Ii8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

matrices  to  which  the  perforations  correspond  are 
brought  in  contact  with  molten  type  metal,  the 
characters  being  cast  separately  and  arranged  auto- 
matically on  a  galley  in  justified  lines  (see  259). 

294.  The  linotype — named  Mergenthaler  after  its  in- 
ventor— is  a  composing-machine  on  which,  by 
touching  a  keyboard,  the  matrices  from  which  the 
characters  are  cast  arrange  themselves  automati- 
cally in  lines  in  a  receptacle,  which  then  is  brought 
in  contact,  on  the  same  machine,  with  molten  type 
metal,  through  a  mechanical  device  which  liberates 
and  arranges  in  order  on  a  galley  the  stereotyped 
strips,  called  "slugs,"  each  consisting  of  a  line  of 
type  (see  260). 


APPENDIX 


HINTS  TO  AUTHORS  AND  EDITORS 
Preparation  of  Manuscripts — 

Manuscripts  should  be  either  typewritten  or  in  a 
perfectly  clear  handwriting.     The  former  is  preferable. 

The  sheets  should  be  of  uniform  size;  g"Xii"  is  a 
desirable  size. 

Only  one  side  of  the  paper  should  be  used. 

Never  roll  manuscripts;  place  them  fiat  in  a  box  or 
an  envelope. 

The  sheets  should  not  be  fastened  together  except  by 
pins  or  clips,  which  can  easily  be  removed. 

When  one  piece  of  a  page  is  to  be  fastened  to  another, 
use  mucilage,  not  pins.  Pins  often  become  unfastened 
and  the  slips  lost  or  misplaced. 

Liberal  margins  should  be  left  at  the  top  and  left- 
hand  side  of  the  sheets.  This  space  will  be  needed  by 
the  reader  or  printer  for  directions. 

The  pages  should  be  numbered  consecutively. 
Inserted  and  omitted  pages  should  be  clearly  indicated. 
Thus,  sheets  to  be  inserted  after  p.  4  should  be  marked 
"4A,"  "4B,"  etc.;  sheets  omitted  between  p.  4  and  p.  8 
should  be  indicated  by  numbering  p.  4,  "4-7." 

Additions  to  original  pages  should  be  placed  after  the 
sheets  to  which  they  belong,  and  should  be  marked 
"Insert  A,"  "Insert  B,"  etc.    The  places  where  they  are 


122  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

to  be   inserted   should   be   indicated  by   writing,  "Here 
insert  A,"  etc.,  on  the  margin  of  the  original  pages. 

Paragraphs — 

Paragraphs  should  be  plainly  indicated,  either  by 
indenting  the  first  line  or  by  a  ^  mark. 

Footnotes — 

Footnotes  should  be  clearly  designated,  either  by 
separating  them  from  the  text  by  running  a  line  across 
the  page,  or  by  using  ink  of  different  color.  Some  writers 
make  a  perpendicular  fold  in  the  paper,  using  two- 
thirds  of  the  space  for  the  text  and  one-third  for  the 
notes. 

The  word  in  the  text  carrying  the  note  should  be  followed 
by  a  superior  figure  corresponding  to  that  preceding  the 
note. 

Footnotes  should  never  be  run  into  the  text  in  manu- 
scripts, whether  in  parentheses  or  otherwise. 

Note. — It  is  important  to  remember  that  in  matter  set  on  the 
linotype  machine  the  sHghtest  change  necessitates  the  resetting  of  the 
whole  line.  Since  it  is  impossible  to  foresee  how  the  notes  will  happen 
to  come  out  in  the  make-up,  it  is  impracticable  to  number  them  from  i 
up  on  each  page.  The  best  way  is  to  number  them  consecutively  through- 
out an  article  or  by  chapters  in  a  book;  bearing,  in  mind,  however,  the 
very  essential  point  that  the  change,  by  omission  or  addition,  of  one  single 
number  involves  the  resetting  of  the  whole  first  line  of  each  succeeding  note 
to  the  end  of  the  series,  as  well  as  the  line  in  the  text  bearing  the  reference 
to  the  note. 

This  difficulty  is  not  met  with  in  matter  set  on  the  monotype  machine 
or  by  hand,  where  the  change  of  a  number  amounts  simply  to  substituting 
one  figure  for  another. 


HINTS  TO  AUTHORS  AND  EDITORS  123 


Proper  Names,  etc. — 

Proper  names,  foreign  words,  and  figures  should,  in 
handwritten  manuscript,  be  written  with  the  utmost  care 
and  distinctness. 

Title-Pages,  etc.— 

Copy  for  title-pages,  prefaces,  tables  of  contents,  etc., 
should  be  submitted  with  the  manuscript.  Copy  for 
indexes  should  be  compiled  from  the  special  set  of  page- 
proofs  furnished  for  this  purpose,  and  promptly  delivered 
to  the  printers.  Unnecessary  delay  is  often  caused  by 
postponing  these  details  till  the  last  minute. 

Reading  of  Proofs — 

Read  and  return  your  proofs  promptly. 

In  marking  proof-sheets,  use  the  standard  proofreaders' 
marks  (see  p.  133).  Do  not  adopt  a  system  of  your  own, 
which,  however  plain  it  may  seem  to  you,  might  appear 
less  so  to  the  compositor. 

Be  careful  to  answer  all  queries  in  the  proofs.  Delays 
and  errors  often  result  from  not  attending  to  them. 

Remember  that  changes  in  the  type  cost  money.  The 
omission  or  addition  of  a  word  in  the  middle  of  a  para- 
graph may  necessitate  resetting  the  whole  of  this  from 
that  point  on;  and  if  such  alteration  is  made  in  the  page- 
proof,  it  may  further  involve  repaging  the  entire  article 
or  chapter.  Make  your  manuscript  as  perfect  as  possible 
before  delivering  it  to  the  printer.  Any  necessary  altera- 
tions should  be  made  in  the  galley-proof,  as  each  succeeding 


124         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

stage  will  add  to  the  cost.  Corrections  in  plates  should 
be  studiously  avoided.  Not  only  are  they  expensive,  but 
they  are  likely  to  injure  the  plates. 

The  original  manuscript  should  in  each  instance  be 
returned  with  the  galley-proof,  in  order  that  the  proof- 
reader may  refer  to  it,  should  any  question  arise;  and 
each  successive  set  of  proofs  returned  should  be  accom- 
panied by  the  previous  marked  set.  This  will  assist  in 
calculating  the  cost  of  alterations  properly  chargeable 
to  you. 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS  125 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS 

Read  everything  as  if  you  yourself  were  the  author. 

Be  particularly  careful  about  proper  names  and  figures 
and  verify  all  dates.  If  the  copy  is  not  perfectly  clear, 
or  if  you  have  reason  to  doubt  its  correctness,  look  it  up, 
or  query  it  to  the  author. 

In  asking  questions  of  authors  or  editors,  make  your 
point  clear.  A  simple  query  is  not  enough  to  draw 
attention  to  the  particular  point  you  have  in  mind. 
Queries  in  the  manuscript  should  be  transferred  to  the 
proof,  or  attention  should  be  directed  in  the  proof  to  the 
queries  made  by  the  copy-reader  in  the  manuscript. 

Be  discreet  about  your  queries.  Do  not  stultify  your- 
self and  discredit  the  office  by  asking  foolish  questions 
on  the  proof.  The  author  will  be  thankful  for  any 
sensible  suggestion  you  may  make,  but  will  resent  trivial 
criticisms. 

Make  a  study  of  the  "personal  equation"  in  the  case 
of  those  individuals  (editors  and  others)  with  whom  you 
as  a  proofreader  will  constantly  have  to  deal.  One  person 
may  expect  of  you  as  a  matter  of  course  what  another 
might  regard  as  an  unwarranted  interference. 

Never  hesitate  to  correct  anything  that  is  palpably 
wrong,  however  positively  the  copy  may  assert  the  con- 
trary. Remember  that  the  blame  for  the  error  will 
eventually  be  laid  at  your  door,  and  justly  so. 


126  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Do  not  follow  copy  blindly,  unreasoningly.  Follow 
copy  only  when,  and  as  far  as,  it  is  correct. 

Do  not  ask  authors  or  editors  to  decide  questions  of 
style.  The  Manual  of  Style  is  primarily  meant  for  you. 
Learn  its  rules  so  that  you  may  correct  any  violation  of 
them  you  may  come  upon,  without  querying. 

Do  not  fall  into  the  fallacy  that  the  author's  or  editor's 
O.K.  relieves  you  of  all  or  any  part  of  your  responsibility. 
Authors  and  editors  depend  on  the  proofreader  to  see  to 
it  that  the  typographical  requirements  have  been  met, 
and  that  the  adopted  style  has  been  adhered  to,  and 
afhx  their  signatures  only  on  that  supposition. 

Do  not  shield  yourself  behind  your  copyholder.  The 
copyholder  is  there  to  assist  you,  not  to  tell  you  how  to 
do  things.  If  you  think  you  have  cause  to  doubt  her 
version  of  a  matter,  investigate  for  yourself. 

Do  not  suggest  to  the  copyholder  the  reading  of  a  word 
or  phrase  which  she  has  difficulty  in  making  out  from  the 
manuscript.  If  she  cannot  decipher  the  manuscript, 
remember  that  you  are  the  arbiter,  and  not  the  compositor. 

Do  not  read  to  the  copyholder  except  in  special  cases 
in  order  to  rest  her  after  long,  close  work,  and  then  pro- 
ceed slowly  and  very  distinctly.  The  copyholder's  eye 
and  ear  are  not  yet  trained  to  follow  copy  with  insertions 
and  special  editing  as  fast  as  you  can  read  printed  matter. 

Do  not  permit  yourself  to  be  stampeded.  Cultivate 
speed,  but  remember  that  accuracy  is  even  more  impor- 
tant. If  the  necessary  time  is  not  given  you,  take  it — 
within  reasonable   limits — in   order   to  do   things  right. 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS  127 

The  credit  accruing  to  you  from  doing  things  absolutely 
right  is  likely  to  outlast  the  displeasure  at  your  lack  of 
dispatch. 

In  unavoidable  cases  of  "rush,"  where  conditions  and 
orders  are  imperative,  protect  yourself  by  letting  it  be 
understood  that  you  have  done  your  best  in  the  time 
allotted  you,  but  that  you  must  disclaim  any  further 
responsibility. 

After  completing  the  reading,  sign  all  galley-proofs 
and  page-proofs  in  the  upper  right-hand  corner  with 
your  own  initial  above  that  of  the  copyholder  and  re- 
viser. In  case  copyholding  and  revising  are  done  by  two 
different  people  the  copyholder's  initial  should  follow  the 
reader's  in  smaller  size  above  a  line  and  the  reviser's 
initial  appear  below.  This  will  save  time  in  tracing 
proofs,  and  insure  the  giving  of  credit  where  it  belongs. 

The  number  of  proofs  wanted  should  be  marked  on 
first  readings  before  they  are  sent  to  the  corrector.  Look 
for  any  additional  instructions  on  the  job  ticket  or  the 
composition  ticket  and  on  the  copy  or  author's  proofs. 

All  proofs  ready  to  be  corrected  are  to  be  returned  to 
the  desk.  When  galley-proofs  are  ready  to  go  out  to  the 
author,  the  copyholder  should  give  the  copy  to  the  file 
clerk  in  perfect  order,  with  proofs  neatly  arranged  in  the 
required  number  of  sets,  pinned  together  at  the  top. 

When  you  are  reading  page-proofs,  the  pages  are  to  be 
revised  by  checking  with  author's  alterations  first.  Next 
make  copy  for  contents  (unless  the  journal  editor  is  in  the 
habit  of  furnishing  it)  and  return  to  be  set,  so  that  cover 


128  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

and  contents  may  be  ready  to  go  out  with  the  page- 
proofs. 

When  you  are  reading  galley-proof  the  first  thing  to 
be  read  is  the  guide-line  with  size  of  type,  width  of 
measure,  job  number,  and  galley  number. 

Mark  the  author's  name  and  composition  number  at 
the  beginning  of  each  article,  so  that  the  compositor  will 
be  able  to  charge  alterations  correctly.  Keep  the  last 
journal  or  sample  beside  you  when  reading  the  pages  and 
verify  style  in  every  case  if  you  are  not  perfectly  sure 
of  it.  As  fast  as  an  article  or  a  chapter  is  read,  return 
it  to  the  desk  so  that  corrections  may  be  made  in  time  to 
be  ready  to  go  out  as  soon  after  you  have  finished  the 
whole  as  possible. 

Read  the  running-heads  and  folios  of  each  article  or 
chapter  as  a  separate  operation  after  you  have  finished 
reading  pages.  Sign  make-up  record,  as  on  pages,  in  the 
upper  right-hand  corner ;  enter  date  and  hour  of  sending 
out  proof  in  the  lower  right-hand  corner  of  page-slip. 
Record  number  of  pages  and  plates  in  each  article  or 
chapter  and  total  number  of  pages  in  the  finished  product 
including  preliminaries.  Be  careful  to  see  that  the  fin- 
ished book  or  journal  will  contain  even  forms  of  i6,  12, 
or  8  pages;  if  it  does  not,  the  question  should  be  raised. 
Number  and  indicate  all  half-titles,  blank  pages,  inserts, 
etc.,  and  carry  all  necessary  queries  on  every  set  of 
proofs. 

When  pages  are  ready  to  go  out,  place  them  neatly 
in  sets,  pinned  together  at  the  top,  and  return  them  to 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS  129 

the  file  clerk  with  all  galley-proofs,  and  additional  copy, 
if  any,  in  order  of  make-up,  and  neatly  pinned  together. 
See  that  material  is  complete  from  cover  to  cover,  includ- 
ing volume  title  and  contents  when  such  pages  are  due. 
Return  all  second  proofs  to  file  clerk's  desk  to  file  and 
leave  page-slip  on  the  hook,  completed  and  dated. 


130  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


HINTS  TO  COPYHOLDERS 

Cultivate  a  low,  soft,  clear  reading  voice.  Only  your 
own  proofreader  has  to  hear  you. 

Remember  that,  from  the  proofreader's  point  of  view, 
the  small  words  are  as  essential  as  the  big  ones.  Get 
them  all  in — and  get  them  in  right. 

Enunciate  your  plural  5's  distinctly.  Try  to  perfect 
your  enunciation  so  that  you  can  read  an  entire  galley 
without  error. 

Regulate  and  equalize  your  speed.  Do  not  race  at  a 
breakneck  pace  through  typewritten  copy,  while  you  thread 
your  path  fumblingly  through  the  mazes  of  manuscript. 

Do  not  keep  guessing  at  a  word.  Look  at  it  closely, 
consider  the  context,  and  do  not  speak  it  until  you  have 
made  it  out — or  at  least  made  the  very  best  guess  of  which 
you  are  capable. 

Give  your  reader  a  chance  to  make  his  corrections. 
Slow  up  the  moment  he  puts  his  pencil  to  the  paper.  This 
will  save  your  going  over  the  same  ground  twice.  Repeat 
cheerfully  if  the  proofreader  has  not  understood. 

Evolve  your  own  system  of  signals.  Do  not,  for 
instance,  waste  time  by  saying  "in  italics"  for  every  word 
or  letter  so  treated.  Instead,  raise  your  voice,  or  tap 
the  table  with  your  pencil  once  for  each  word,  or  both. 
Such  a  code  need  not  be  intelligible  to  others  than  your- 
self and  your  reader. 


HINTS  TO  COPYHOLDERS  131 

Read  to  your  proofreader  every  instruction,  editorial 
mark,  and  stet-mark  carefully.  Learn  the  job  number 
and  read  it  for  every  galley. 

Consult  the  job  ticket  for  the  number  of  proofs  wanted 
and  the  name  and  address  of  the  person  to  whom  they 
are  to  be  sent,  before  having  proofs  corrected,  so  that  the 
number  wanted  may  be  marked  for  the  printer. 

Be  careful  in  transferring  marks.  A  mark  in  the  wrong 
place  means  two  errors  uncorrected  in  place  of  one  cor- 
rected.    Each  set  of  proofs  must  carry  every  mark. 

In  sending  out  proofs,  see  that  everything  is  there. 
Arrange  the  copy  and  proof-sheets  neatly  and  consecu- 
tively. 

Copy  all  queries  and  make-up  instructions  on  the 
galley-proof  and  indicate  the  insertion  of  tables,  figures, 
charts,  etc.,  where  they  are  first  mentioned. 

The  manuscript  should  accompany  the  galley-proof; 
the  foul  proof  (author's  marked  galley-proof)  should 
accompany  the  page-proof.  In  case  no  galley-proof  has 
been  sent,  the  manuscript  should  accompany  the  page- 
proof. 

Indicate  in  the  lower  left-hand  corner  the  contents  of 
all  the  envelopes  you  address. 

Fasten  your  pins  in  the  center  at  the  top,  not  diago- 
nally in  the  left-hand  corner,  thus  covering  up  the  direc- 
tions, etc.,  often  written  there. 

Return  every  evening  to  the  file  or  the  bookcase  any 
volume  that  may  have  been  taken  out  for  reference  dur- 
ing the  day;   return  all  proofs  ready  for  filing  at  least 


132  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

once  a  day,  so  that  files  may  be  always  as  complete  as 
possible. 

Remember  that  you  are  the  housekeeper  of  the  proof- 
room, and  take  pride  in  its  neat  and  orderly  appearance. 
Perfect  your  system  so  that  everything  can  be  located 
at  a  moment's  notice.  The  more  of  that  kind  of  work 
you  do  without  being  asked,  and  the  better  you  do  it, 
the  more  you  will  be  appreciated. 


PROOFREADER'S  MARKS 

d>  Dele,  or  delete :  take  }i  out. 

2)  Letter  r/^versed — turn. 

#  Put  inspace. 

C  ClcOe  up — no  space. 

VA  Bad^spacing- spac^4nore^evenly. 

*^  Wro^g  font:  character  of  wrong  size  or 

style. 

^  Transp0e. 

™  -^ake  a  new  paragraph. 

D  ^ndent;  or,  put  in  an  em-quad  space. 

C  C  Carry  to  the  left. 

J  C^rry  to  the  right. 

n  "Elevate. 

LJ  Djepr^ss. 

X  Ipiperfect  type — correct. 

vL»  Space  showsfbetween  words — push  down. 

^  Straighte^^  crooked  line. 

11  ^^  llStraighten  alig©ient. 

>4ttb  Restore  or  retaJR  words  crossed  out. 

^^  Print  (£^,  fT,  etc.)  as  a  ligature. 

*vab_-«i'A»l>^  Words  are  omitted  from,  or  in,xopy. 

©  Query  to  author:  Is  this  correct? 

/«i«f^  Put  in  capitals. 

^^  Put  in^gMALL  CAPITAL-^. 

■*^  Put  in  LOWER  CASE. 

^^^'"^  Put  in  roman  type. 

iW/  Put  in  italic  type. 

AA  Put  in  bold  fac-e  type. 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  137 


MODERN 

FIVE  POINT  NO.   SIXTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thmighlful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  f.iU  of  Oarihafro  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have 
felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  tlie  great  tiirning-puints  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  i)eople,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  connnon  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alex- 
ander was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  nuist  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  llave  been  no 
diflicult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.    The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 

[Leoiied] 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  solo 
successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to 
THE  FROZEN  NORTH  AND  THE  TORRID  SOUTH   AS   ITS  NATURAL  LIMITS,  EXCHANGING   THE 

VIRGIN  ORES  OF  SPAlN  FOR  THE  LOXG-SOUGHT  SPICES  OF  AraBY  THE  BlEST,  WAS  THEREFORE      1234567890 

But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had    1234567890 


FIVE   POINT  NO.   FIVE  HUNDRED   AND  TWENTY-SEVEN 
[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the 
world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  .voung  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  In  the 
Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander, 

[Leaded] 

with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus.  with  his 
small  army  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  con- 
quests, show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of 
the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi 
had  each  for  many  hard-fought  .vears  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  com- 
plete his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits, 
exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was 
THEREFORE    NO   VERY   WILD    IMAGINATION.     BUT  WHILE  THOSE  THAT 

HAD  CONCEIVED  IT  AND  STRIVEN  FOB  IT  CON80IOUSLT  HAD  FAILED  1  '2  34567890 
tcfeo  could  hare  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpect  12  34S678H0 
Q  O  a  a  a.e  e6iiu9 


138 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MODERN 

SIX   POINT   MODERN   NO.   ONE 
[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  tho  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of 

[Leaded] 
the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.     The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
OF  THE  THIRD  CENTURY,  FRESH  FROM  HER  SAMNITE  CONQUESTS,   SHOW 

WHAT   WOULD    HAVE    BEEN    THE    SUCCESSES    OF    ALEXANDER,     WITH    HIS    GIANT    GENIUS    AND 

armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's 

(no  figures  with  this  italic)        m  oe  jE        aece.ECE  aoii        $£*tt1IB>°' 

1234567890        1234567890$  +x-  =  ± 

;_-^^  " , :    Six  set  braces  to  match  this  font. 

SIX   POINT  NO.    FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  bo 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  tho  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  i)redominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quests in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 

[Leaded] 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the 
third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
tho  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
WAS   HINDERED    BY   HIS    EARLY    DEATH,  MOST   OF   THE    EARLY 

DiADOCHI  HAD  EACH  FOR  MANY  HARD-FOUGHT  YEARS  1234567890 

aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  1234567890 
AEIOU  lEfOtJ  AElOtJ  AeIOO  AEIOU  AElOtJ  Ag5}  9gKSST 
AElotj  A6f6tj  Ai;i6tT  AfiioC  aeiOU  aeIou  A^hn  aeioii&616u  &fei6u  a6Iofl  aSiOuaeiftu 
AEIOU  A&t6U  A&lOtI  AMotJ  AEtOty  A&lOtJ  QHHNS  Thhsstz 
aeiou  ddidu  Mldu  dgiofi  deidil  ueioii  dcfiE>81'I><J/>o53&cdhhknsstuz 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  139 


MODERN 

SEVEN  POINT  NO.   FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  Tiiere  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by 
reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his 
conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an 
empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 

[Leaded] 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regen- 
erate the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But 
while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed, 
who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpect- 
edly, by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of 
a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by 
such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect, 
coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening 
frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Mace- 
donia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a 
CENTURY  MIGHT  INDEED   FEEL  UNEASY  AT  THE  RESULT, 

IP  HE  WERE  NOT,  LIKE  MOST  OF  THE  STOICS,  AN  OFTIIXIST       1284567890 

or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  1234567890 
AEt6tJ  AEIOty  aeioii  aeiou  Ae16u  AEIOU  deloil  deiOil  AC 
AiilOtr  AElOU  a^ibu  aeiou  AeiOU  AEIOU  M)dxi  deioft  a^n 
AeIoC     AEIOU     aeiou     aei6u     A£:16u     AElOtr     delou     delou    d^n 


140         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MODERN 

EIGHT  POINT  NO.   FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car- 
thage and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was 
no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by 
the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome:  for 
the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 

[Leaded] 

of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what 
would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his 
early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influ- 
ence of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  A'irgin  ores  of  Spain 
for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no 
very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it 
and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
THAT  IT  SHOULD  DROP  ALMOST  SUDDENLY,  Unex- 
pectedly, BY  THE  FORCE,  NOT  OF  GENIUS,  BUT  O?"  1234567890 

circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  ivho  12  3  4567890 

AEiou  Aeiou  AEiotr  lio  liotjjj  Agi^co  ^AdAg 

AEU  AEi6rJ  AEibu  AEOiJ  AEJtoiJ  Aiou  E  S  0  fieiou  aeloii  aeiou  aeiou 
aeioil  ageho  delou  delou  deidu  detou  aeiou  dq,n 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  141 

MODERN 

NINE  POINT  NO.   FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthag-e  aud  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influ- 
ence of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 

[Leaded] 

Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  diffi- 
cult matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  aud  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of 
the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most 
OF  THE  EARLY  DIADOCHI  HAD  EACH  FOR  MANY 

HAED-FODGHT  YEARS  ASPIRED  TO  BE  HIS  SOLE      1234567890 

successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  ivork  1234567890 
AEIOU   AElCU  AEIOtj  lElOt  lElOtT  AEIOtJ  AQN 

AEiOU    A^IOU    AeiOU      AMoO     AeIOU     AEIOU    IgHHKNT 

aeioii  a6i6u   aeioii   aeiou  aeioti  aeioii   aghhknt 
AEIOU  AMOU  AEldU  AEIOtj  AeioO  A^lOtJ  Agi^ 

deioU    d^idii    a^lbii    deioii    deioti    deioii    dgn 
CH5IKSSSTZZaaccdgiino6oosssuijuuyyzz 
H  H  S  T    a  e  e  h  h  i  {  f  s  s  t  u  z    D  5  (J    l>  )p  p    053 


142         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
MODERN 

ELEVEN  POINT  NO.   SIXTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all 
the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 

[Leaded] 

by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  sys- 
tem of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 
It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
NOT  UNLIKE  THAT  OF  ROME;  FOR  THE  CON- 
QUEST OF  THE  West  would  have  been  12  34567890 
no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  1234567890 

AElOtJ  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU   AEIOU  AEIOU 

AEiOU     AEIOU     AeIOU     AEIOU     AEIOU      AEIOU      AQHHKNSST 

aeioii    ^ei6u    a^iou    aeiou    aeioti    a^iou    aghhknsst 
AEIOU  AEtOU  AeTOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AElOty 
.    deidU    d&ldil    aeibii    delou    deidil    deiofi    d  q  n 
aab)bcddee§^^iiiltmooj3ppq^ 

ig:^HgKNSgT     AQHHNST    hhisstuz 
D8   t>p   00   553*^    ^P    dqd  deegiiJc6gp^0fuuu 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  143 


OLD  STYLE 

FIVE    POINT  NO.    RIGHT 
ISolid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  fell 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  anj 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  \vill  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alex- 
ander was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome  ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  dif- 
ficult matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.      The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 

[Leaded] 

with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  w^ould  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realizations  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole 
successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the 
frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the 
LONG-SOUGHT  SPICES  OF  ARABY  THE  BLEST,  WAS  THEREFORE  NO  VERY  WILD 
IMAGINATION.  BUT  WHILE  THOSE  WHO  HAD  CONCEIVED  IT  AND  STRIVEN  FOR  1234567890 
a  consciously  had  failed,  ■who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenl  12341678^0 

TWELVE    POINT   NO.   EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
NATIONS    HITHERTO    AT    VARIANCE, 

[Leaded] 
OR    AT   WAR,    DISTRACTED    BY    REASON    I23456789O 

of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern  i2j4^6'j8go 

AEioiJ  Aeiou   feO   6  A  g  iSJ 

AEiou  AEi6i>  EtJ  £  A^N  aeioii  aeiou  aeu  a6i6ia  3.911 

AEIOU    AEIOU  AEU    £  g  N 

aeiou   dHoU   deii   dHdH  fit 


144  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

OLD  STYLE 

FOURTEEN  POINT  NO.   EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius 
saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto 
at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 

[Leaded] 

directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
WHEN  ALEXANDER  WAS  YET  A 

YOUNG  MAN  RETURN-       I23456789O 

ing  froin  his  conquests    i2j4§6']8go 

AEiou    Aeiou    Aeu    e    a   0   N 


AEIOU    AEIOU    AEU    E    A  C  N 

aeioii     aeiou     aeu     aeioii     aon  ago 
0    6    A    it   doit    am  dtl  d  g  n 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  145 

OLD  STYLE 

EIGHTEEN   POINT   NO.    EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
bius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 

[Leaded] 

civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now 
be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law. 
IT  WAS    NOT    THE    FIRST 

TIME  THAT  THIS        123456789O 

grand  prospect        1^345^7^9^ 


AEOU    AEOU    EU    E    A    N 


146 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

SIX    POINT   NO.    THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  th.it  they  had  reached  one  of  the  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East, 
men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  sm.illarmy,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  centur>',  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was 
hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Di  idochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought 
years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

[Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging 
the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very 
wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously 
had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly, 
by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained 
it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained 
for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  secur- 
ing ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Mace- 
donia ? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century  might 
indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics,  an  optimist  or 
a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great  peace  throughout  the 
world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an  umpire  with  power  to 
enforce  his  will;  there  was  the  consequent  development  of  wide  commerce  with  its 
diffusion,  not  only  of  wealth,  but  of  enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were  indis- 
putable, even  though  a  dangerous  monopoly  was  being  established,  not  merely  through 
the  enormous  advantages  inseparable  from  Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  de- 
struction of  all  those  commercial  centers  which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason 
of  favored  situation  or  old  traditions  of  trade. 

But  far  more  serious  was  the  patent  fact,  that  neither  the  Roman  people  nor  their 
HENCE   IT   RESULTED   TH.\T  THE   COMMON   PEOPLE   DEGENERATED 

RAPIDLY  INTO  A   VULGAR  MOB,  PURSUING   SOLELY  ITS  M.\TERIAL  I23456789O 

pleasures,  and  the  dominant  classes, when  vast  Opportunities  of  wealth  i2345678go 

AEIOiJ  AeIoO        .  AEIOU  AEIOtj  AElOU  AEIOO  Q    N    C 

aeioii         aeiou         aeiou         aeioii         aelou         aeiou         f  n  c  n 
iieidU         detoA  aeioii         aeiou         deioH  dlidU         f  n    " 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  14? 


MONOTYPE 

SEVEN   POINT    NO.    THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Uke  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quests in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the 
third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  repubhc.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many 

[Leaded] 
hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work 
and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural 
limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby 
the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  con- 
ceived it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius, 
but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for 
Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of 
securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of 
PhiUp's  Macedonia  ? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics, 
AN  OPTIMIST  OR  A  FATALIST.      THERE  WAS,  NO  DOUBT,  THE 

MANIFEST  GAIN  OF  A  GREAT  PEACE  THROUGHOUT  THE  WORLD,      I  234567800 

of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an  umpire   1234567800 

aeiSu         5  n  6 
aeida        Q  n  Q  a, 


aeioii 

aeiou 

aeiou 

aeiou 

aeiou 

aetdU 

aeidii 

aetou 

aeiou 

aeiou 

148  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

EIGHT   POINT   NO.    THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  .law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unHke  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Ale.xander,  with  all  the  resources  of 
Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  liis  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler 
repubUc.  And  if  the  reahzation  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his 
work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

[Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  hmits,  exchanging  the  \'irgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination. 
But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had 
failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly, 
unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the 
ANY      POLITICAL     THINKER      WTIO      WITNESSED      THIS 

MIGHTY     OUTCOME     OF     HALF    A    CENTURY    MIGHT         I23456789O 

indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  m       i2j4j6y8Q0 

AEJiOU        AEIOU        AEIOU        AEIOU        AEIOU        AEIOU        C    N    C 

aeiou  aeiou  aeioii  aeioii  aelou  aei5u  5  n 
d'eioU  detotl  aeiou  deidii  aeioii  aeioii  q  n 
TDK       HHH    SSST     ddhhh        HS     dhst     ksttss     dhms 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  149 

MONOTYPE 

NINE   POINT    NO.    THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Cornith,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one 
of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law, 
by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome; 
for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter 
to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 

[Leaded] 

The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult 
Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his 
giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler 
republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was 
hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each 
for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor, 
hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world 
by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
DROP  ALMOST  SUDDENLY,  UNEXPECTEDLY,  BY  THE 

FORCE,  NOT  OF  GENIUS,  BUT  OF  CIRCUMSTANCES,  I   23456789O 

into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  byi2j4j6y8QO 

AEIOiJ        AEIOU        AEIOU        AEIOTJ        AEIOIJ        AEIOU         C  N  C 

aeioii       aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       aeioii       5  n 
deidii       aeiou       aeioii        aeioii       aeiou       aewil      i  n  C 
A  HST        dst  HST        dhsti 


150  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

TEN   POINT   NO.    THIRTY-ONE 

ISolid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  diflS- 
cult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of 
the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most 
A  WORLD-EMPIRE,  INCLUDING  ALL  THE  LANDS 

AND     NATIONS    ABOUT    THE    MeDITER-       123456789O 

ranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North      i  2j4j6y8QO 

AEIOiJ      AEIOU      AEIOU      AEIOU      AEIOU      AEIOU      ^   ?  N 

aeioii     aeiou      aeioii      aeioii      aeiou      aeioii      f  a  n  6 
a'eidU     dHoU      aeidii     aeioii     deidii      aeiou  Q  ^  a  n  0 
D  HH  SS  T  K     d  hhh  k  sU 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  1 51 

MONOTYPE 

ELEVE^f   POINT   NO.    THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civihzed  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law, 
by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unUke  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander 
ASPIRED  TO  BE  HIS  SOLE  SUCCESSOR,  HOPING 

TO  COMPLETE  HIS  WORK  AND  REGEN-    I234567890 

erate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  i2j4j6'^8go 

AEIOiJ  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU     fN    C^HST   A 

aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aelou    aeiou      g  n  dhst 
aeiou   aeiou   aeiou    aeiou    deidU   dcioU     ^n^ 
HST     A    dhst 


152  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

TWELVE    POINT   NO.    THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fail  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at 
variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts 
in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the 
predominance  of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult 
matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
YOUNGER  AND  FEEBLER  REPUBLIC.    AND 

IF   THE   REALIZATION   OF    THE     I    23456789O 

conqueror's  dreams  was  hin-      i2j4j6y8go 

AEIOtJ   AEIOU   AEIOU   AEIOU   AEIOU   AEIOU   g   N        f 

aeioii    aeiou    aeiou    aeioii    aelou    aeiou     g  fi    ^  q 
dewii    aeiou    aeibu    aeiou    aeiou    deloii  dknhhhsst 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  153 


MONOTYPE 

SIX     POINT     NO.     FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thouglrtful  Gre?ks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  fhc  world's  history.  Thcro  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all 
the  ei\ilizcHl  nations  liitlurlo  at  vaiiance,  or  at  war.  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  m;o\ crnment,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directeil  b>  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  prcdoniinanco  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  lirst  time  that  tills  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  yoimg  man,  returning 
from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources 
of  Asia  under  liis  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  tliird  century.  freMsh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Ah^xander,  with 
his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 
And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate 
the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

[Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reacliing  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  Umits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But 
wliile  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed, 
who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  vmexpectedly, 
by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a 
people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such 
national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sjiarta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled 
with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers, 
such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a 
century  might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  Uke  most 
of  the  Stoics,  an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest 
gain  of  a  great  peace  tliroughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of 
disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an  umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will; 
there  was  the  consequent  development  of  wide  commerce,  with  its  diffu.sion, 
not  only  of  wealth,  but  of  enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were 
indisputable,  even  though  a  dangerous  monopoly  was  being  established, 
NOT  MERELY  THROUGH  ENORMOUS  ADVANTAGES  INSEPARA- 
BLE FROM  Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  1234567S90 
destruction  of  all  those  commercial  centers  which                     123^567890 

aeioii       aeiofl       aeiou       aeioii       aelou       aeiou       q  aii  i)    a 
aeidii        Aelou        deidii         deioti        aeioii        diioH        g  d  n  6 


154  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

SEVEN  POINT   NO.    EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of 
Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler 
republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his 

[Leaded] 
work  and  regenerate   the  distracted  world   by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination. 
But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had 
failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly, 
unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the 
hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander, 
but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and 
respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever- 
widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's 
Macedonia  ? 
OF  THE   STOICS,   AN   OPTIMIST   OR   A   FATALIST.      THERE 

WAS,    NO    DOUBT,    THE    MANIFEST   GAIN    OF   A   GREAT  1234567890 

peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of       123456  7  890 

aelou       aeioii      aetod       a^loii       deiou       aeioii       q  a  n  6 
deiou      aeidu      deidH      ^elou      deldu      ixeioiX      g  a  fl  5 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  155 


MONOTYPE 

EIGHT   POINT  NO.    EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Poh'bius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of 
the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  tradition,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will 
of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  x\sia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century, 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the 
successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.     And  if  the  realization  of  the 

[Leaded] 

conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the 
early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be 
his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for 
the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very 
wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven 
for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it 
IT,  NOT  BY  THE  DIRECTION  OF  AN  ALEXANDER,  BUT 

BY   SUCH   NATIONAL   QUALITIES   AS   HAD   GAINED      1234567890 

for  Sparta  precedence  arid  respect,  coupled  with     1234567890 

aeioii  aeiou  aeioii  deiou  aeiou  5  a  fi  6 
aeloii  deioii  aeiou  aeioii  deloii  (and 
agiouiraeoelEHKSHSdhkstshoaS, 
QeiguAelouegieq;  t  4  hl<istsh,dody 


156  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

NINE    POINT   NO.    EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car- 
thage and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto 
at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradition,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of 
one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome;  ior  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 

[Leaded] 

under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the 
conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of 
the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired 
to  be  his  whole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and 
regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about 
the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the 
OF  AN  ALEXANDER,  BUT  BY  SUCH  NATIONAL  QUAL- 
ITIES AS  HAD  GAINED  FOR  SPARTA  PRECE-  1234567890 

dence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  123Jf.567890 

aeioii    deiou    aeiou    d,ei6u    aeiou    aeiSu    g  a  h  o  a 
deioiX     deidu     dcioii     aeiou     deidu     aeiou     q  an  o 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  157 

MONOTYPE 

ELEVEN  POINT   NO.   EIGHT 
[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  hke  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system 
of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far 

[Leaded] 

East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unhke  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes 
of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexg^nder, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger 
and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
QUEROR'S   DREAMS   WAS   HINDERED   BY   HIS 

EARLY  DEATH,  MOST  OF  THE  EARLY  1234567890 

Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-  1234367890 


aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     a  o  a  g  n 
de'idu     aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     delou     aeiou     Q  z  a  and 


158 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

SIX   POINT    GUSHING    NO.    TWENTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the 
world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in 
the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that 
of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difiicult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Sam- 
nite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his 
giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if 
the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of 

[Leaded] 
the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole 
successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the 
potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  ex- 
changing the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was 
therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and 
striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop 
almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances, 
in<-o  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander, 
but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect, 
coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers, 
such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics,  an 
optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great  peace 
throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an 
umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will;  there  was  the  consequent  development  of 
wide  commerce  with  its  diffusion,  not  only  of  wealth,  but  of  enlightenment.  These 
material  gains  were  indisputable,  even  though  a  dangerous  monopoly  was  being 
established,  not  merely  through  the  enormous  advantages  inseparable  from 
Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  destruction  of  all  those  commercial  centers 
which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason  of  favored  situation  or  old  traditions 
of  trade. 

BUT  FAR   MORE   SERIOUS  WAS   THE  PATENT  FACT,   THAT   NEI 

1234567890 
aeioii        aeiou        aeioii        aeiou        aeiou        f 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


159 


MONOTYPE 

SEVEN  POINT   CUSmNC   NO.    TWENTY-FIVE 

[So!! J] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Mke  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by 
reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 

[Leaded] 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regen- 
erate the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination. 
But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had 
failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly, 
unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the 
hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander, 
but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and 
respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever- 
widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  PhiHp's 
Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a 
century  might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most 
of  the  Stoics,  an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest 
gain  of  a  great  peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of 
disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an  umpire  with  power  1234567890 
TO  ENFORCE  HIS  WILL;    THERE  WAS  THE  CONSEQUENT  DE- 


i6o  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

EIGHT  POINT  GUSHING  NO.   TWENTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as 
very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century, 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the 
successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.     And  if  the  realization  of  the 

[Leaded] 

conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the 
early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his 
sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  cultm-e. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the 
long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild 
imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for 
it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should 
drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but 
of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by 
the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had 
gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive 
wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-  1234567890 

OF  WEALTH,  BUT  OF  ENLIGHTENMENT.   THESE  MATERIAL 

aeioii    aeiou    aeioti    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    5 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  i6i 


MONOTYPE 

NINE  POINT   CUSniNG   NO.   TWENTY-FIVE 

l,s-„//,/l 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of 
a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.     The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small 

[Leaded] 

army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  arma- 
ments, against  the  younger  and  feebler  repubUc.  And  if 
the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for 
many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor, 
hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations 
about  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North 
and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  Umits,  1234567890 
EXCHANGING  THE  VIRGIN  ORES  OF  SPAIN  FOR  THE 


l62  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

TEN   POINT    GUSHING   NO.   TWENTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of 
a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.     The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small 

[Leaded] 

army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  arma- 
ments, against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if 
the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for 
many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor, 
hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  1234567890 
LANDS     AND     NATIONS     ABOUT     THE     MEDITER- 

aeibii       aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       aeioii      $ 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  163 

MONOTYPE 

ELEVEN   POINT  GUSHING  NO.   TWENTY-FIVE 

[SoU,!] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civiUzed  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts 
in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predom- 
inance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.     When  Alexander  was 

[Leaded] 

yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the 
Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his 
hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small 
army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century, 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and 
feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
queror's dreams  was  hindered  by  1234567890 
ALL    THE    LAND    AND    NATIONS    ABOUT    THE 

aeioii     aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     aei5u     aeiou     c 


1 64         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
MONOTYPE 

TWELVE   POINT  GUSHING   NO.   TWENTY-FIVE   (ll  PT.  FACE) 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have 
felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at 
variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law, 
by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as 

[Leaded] 

very  near,  an  empire  not  imlike  that  of  Rome,  for 
the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  dif- 
ficult matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of 
Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the 
third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alex- 
ander, with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments, 
AGAINST  THE  YOUNGER  AND  FEES  JE(E 
1234567890  1234567890  AAA  EE  66  U  Q  N  C 
aeioU  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  fiiyy  aeoe 
(12  pt.  face)  laieiu  sh 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  165 

MONOTYPE 

TEN  POINT  SCOTCH   ROMAN   NO.   THIRTY-SIX 

WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  S 
1234567890 


TWELVE  POINT  CASLON   NO.   THREE  HUNDRED   AND   THIRTY-SEVEN 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
1234567890      &$ 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
I  2  J  4  _5  6  y  8  ^  o         M  (E  cB  (£        ^$ 
aaaaaa     eeeeee     iii     606666     uiiuuiiu 
add  a  ad  a     ee'ee     'it  t 
a  aaoe  fis  t  h  5  1 4V  h 


EIGHT   POINT   ITALIC    NO.    T\VENTY-FI\'^   K 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of 
the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  lon- 
$    1234567890  JE  (E  x  oe      & 

TEN    POINT    ITALIC    NO.    TWENTY-FIVE   K 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 

$    12  3  45  67  890    JE  (E  x  oz    & 
Ten  Point — also  cast  on  Eleven-Point  Body 

TWELVE   POINT    ITALIC    NO.    TWENTY-FIVE   K 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have 
$    12  34567  890    M  (E  x  Oi    & 


1 66         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT   POINT 
[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  popula- 
tion, in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will 
of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a 
common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the 
world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in 
the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  &mpire  not  unlike  that 
of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alex- 
ander, with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  repub- 

[Leaded] 
lie.      And  i^  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to 
be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits, 
exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest, 
was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and 
striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop 
almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances, 
into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander, 
but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect, 
coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers, 
such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics, 
an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great 
PEACE   THROUGHOUT   THE    WORLD,    OF   THE    REAL   SETTLE- 

.MENT  OF  DISPUTES  BY  THE  ARBITRATION  OF  AN  I23456789O 

umpire  ivith  poiver  to  enforce  his  ivill;  there  I2J^j6'^8qo 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  167 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

TEN   POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander, 
with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.      The  successes  of 

[Leaded] 

Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have 
been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  arma- 
ments, against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  reali- 
zation of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death, 
most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  as- 
pired to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and 
regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
culture. 

A  world- empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for 
THE  LONG-SOUGHT  SPICES  OF  ARABY  THE  BLEST, 

WAS   THEREFORE   NO   WILD   IMAGINATION.  I      23456789O 

But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it         I2J4^6y8QO 


1 68         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

TWELVE    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult 
matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
WITH  HIS  GIANT  GENIUS  AND  ARMA- 

MENTS,  AGAINST  THE  YOUNGER       I23456789O 

and  feebler  republic.     And  if       i2j4^6'/8go 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  169 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 

[Leaded] 

now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of 
the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter 
TO    ALEXANDER,  WITH    ALL    THE 

RESOURCES   OF  AsiA  I    23456789O 

under  his  hand,      This        I2J4^6'j8go 


lyo         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


SCOTCH  ROMAN 


[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civil- 
ized nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts 
in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predomi- 
nance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  n  jnung  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quests in  the  Far  F^ast,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not 
unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquests  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  diffi- 
cult matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the 
successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many 
hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work 
and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural 
limits,  exchanging  tlie  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby 
the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  tliose  that  had 
conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  liave  imagined 
that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius, 

[Leaded] 

but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for 
Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise 
of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides 
of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics, 
an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great 
peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitra- 
tion of  an  umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will;  there  was  the  consequent 
development  of  wide  commerce,  with  its  diffusion  not  only  of  wealth,  but  of 
enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were  indisputable,  even  though  a  danger- 
ous monopoly  was  being  established,  not  merely  through  the  enormous  advan- 
tages inseparable  from  Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  destruction  of  all 
those  commercial  centers  which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason  of  favored 
situation  or  old  traditions  of  trade. 

But  far  more  serious  was  the  patent  fact,  that  neither  the  Roman  people 
NOR  THEIR  RULERS  HAD  RECEIVED  ANY  EDUCATION  TO  FIT  THEM 

FOR  AN  IMPERIAL  POLICY,  MATERIAL  PLEASURES,  AND  THE  1234567890 

dominant  classes,  when  vast  opportunities  of  wealth  12  3U567890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 171^ 

SCOTCH  ROMAN 

EIGHT  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoug:htful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  historj'.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitiierto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of 
the  West  woidd  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all 
the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus.  with 
his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  tlie  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  suc- 
cesses of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 

[Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for 
the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very 
wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven 
for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should 
drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but 
of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it.  not  by 
the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had 
gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive 
wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as 
those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half 
a  century  might  indeed  feel  uneasj'  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like 
HENCE   IT    RESULTED    THAT    THE    COMMON     PEOPLE 

DEGENERATED  HAPIDLY  INTO  A  VI  LGAR  MOB  12345678  9  0 

pursuing  solely  its  material  pleasures,  and  the  12  34567890 


172  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

SCOTCH  ROMAN 

TEN    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a 
young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East, 
men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not 
unlike  that   of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 

[Leaded] 

have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pjrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 
And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  earlj-  Diadochi  had  each  for 
many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor, 
hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about 
MEDITERRANEAN  SEA,  REACHING  THE  FROZEN 
North  and  the  torrid   South  as  1234567890 

natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  1234567  890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE       i73 
SCOTCH  ROMAN 

ELEVEN   POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thouclitful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  conti-asts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  b}'  the  influence  of  one  system 
of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  AMien  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,   returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far 

[Leaded] 

East,  men  nmst  have  anticipated,  as  ver}-  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  diflicult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes 
of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  3-ounger 
and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
queror's dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of 
the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
ASPIRED  TO  BE  HIS  SOLE  SUCCESSOR,  HOP- 
ING   TO    COMPLETE    HIS    WORK    AND  1234567890 

regenerate  the  distracted  world  by         l'2  3Jt,5  67  8d0 


174 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


SCOTCH  ROMAN 

TWELVE  POINT 
[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predomi- 
nance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  pros- 
pect had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.     When 

[Leaded] 

Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike 
that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  AVest 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alex- 
ander, with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his 
small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
THE  YOUNGER  AND  FEEBLER  Re- 
public.      AND  IF  THE  REAUIZA-    12  34567890 

tion  of  the  conqueror's  dreams     1^34^567890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  175 

SCOTCH  ROMAN 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

[.s-(-//</i 

When  thoug'htful  Greeks  like  Polyb- 
ius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Cor- 
inth, they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  pop- 
ulation, in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of 

[Leaded] 

one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language„ 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this 
grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a 
young  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quest in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not 
MATTER  TO  ALEXANDER,  WIT 
1234567890  all  the  resour  1224567890 


176 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

SIX  POINT 

[Solid] 

AVhen  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  'When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his 
conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquests  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the 
third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for 
many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural 
limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby 
the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had 
conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius, 

[Leaded] 

but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for 
Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise 
of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid 
strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia  ? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics 
an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great 
peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitra- 
tion of  an  umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will;  there  w/as  the  consequent 
development  of  wide  commerce,  with  its  diffusion,  not  only  of  wealth,  but  of 
enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were  indisputable,  even  though  a  dan- 
gerous monopoly  was  being  established,  not  merely  through  the  enormous 
advantages  inseparable  from  Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  destruction 
of  all  those  commercial  centers  which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason  of 
favored  situation  or  old  traditions  of  trade. 

But  far  more  serious  was  the  patent  fact,  that  neither  the  Roman  people 
nor  their  rulers  had  received  any  education  to  fit  them  for  an  imperial  policy, 
MATERIAL  PLEASURES,  AND  THE  DOMINANT  CLASSES,  WHEN  VAST 
iA     (7Vl     Kj     y    r     We     if  1234567890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  177 


BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT  POINT 
[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations,  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the 
West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  suc- 
cesses of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
queror's dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early 
Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole 

[Leaded] 
successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagi- 
nation. But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it 
consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop 
almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genins,  but  of 
circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
directions  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had 
gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive 
wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as 
those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia  ? 
THE  MANIFEST  GAIN  OF  A  GREAT  PEACE  THROUGHO 
cA     oTVI     Rj)rr'®esr  1234567890 


178  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

TEN  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  w^as  no  longer  any  doubt  that 
all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  gov- 
ernment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  di- 
rected by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  lan- 
guage. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  W^hen  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an 
empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the 
West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander, 

[Leaded] 

with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the 
adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments, 
against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the 
realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each 
for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  suc- 
cessor, hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
NORTH  AND  THE  TORRID  SOUTH  AS  ITS  NAT- 
Oi-  <l7VI  Kd  r  yr  We  ^  1234567890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


179 


BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

TWELVE    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world  s  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect    had    been    held    forth   to  the  world. 

[Leaded] 

When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the 
W^est  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his 
small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
AGAINST  THE  YOUNGER  AND  FEEB 
cA  cTVI  Ro  r  y-  t^e  gf  1234567890 


i8o  THE  XJNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

PORSON  GREEK 

SIX  POINT 
TdSe  &e  fxoi  Trai'Ttos,  «</»),  Kpottre,  Xi^ov  7ru)S  affoj3e'|8r)K6  ra  ix  ToO  ev  AeK<f>ol^  XPV- 
(TTrjpiOV  '  (Toi  yo.p  Sij  \ey€Tai  Trdvv  ye  reOefjanGvadat  6  * AnoKKoiV  Kai  ce  ndvTa  e/cetVo* 
neid6iJ.evov  TTpaTTeiv.  'E^ovkoixrjv  df,  u)  KOpe,  oiiTws  eX*"'  '  '''^''  ^^  JrarTa  TavacTi'a 
eufli/S  ef  dpxv^  TrpdrTior  ■npo<ni)ve\6rjV  toj  'AttoAAwi'i.  His  fie;  €(^r)  6  Kvpos  "  SiSaijKf  • 
irdvv  yap  napdSo^a  Ae-yetg.  'Ort  TTptuTOi'  /acV,  e(/)TJ,  a/xeA^tTa?,  epttiTav  TOi'  ^ebc  et  Tt  e5e6- 
fjiTji',  aTrcTretpoJju.Tji'  avTOu  ct  SuratTO  dATj^eueti'. 

EIGHT  POINT 

TdSe  5^  /xoi  irdvrus,  e(pr],  Kpotcre,  "K^^ov  irds  airo^^^rjKe  ra  iK  tov  4v 
Ae\4>oli  xPV'^'''VP^ov  ■  ffol  yap  dr]  X^yerai  irdvv  ye  TeOepaTrevudat  6  A.TrbWu>v 
Kal  ae  irdvra  iKelvif  Treidd/xepov  irpaTTeiv.  ''E^ovXd/xrjv  (Lv,  (3  KOpe,  oiJtcos 
f-j^civ    vvv  bk  trdvTa  rdvavrla  evdiis  i^  dpxv^  irpdrruv  irpoffTjvix^V  ''"'f 

TEN   POINT    (on   nine-  OR    TEN-POINT   BODY) 

TaSe  8e  fioc  iravTOJs,  €<j>r],  Kpoicre,  Xi$ov  Trws  a7ro/3i/3r]Ke  to.  Ik 
TOV  Iv  A€\(f>oi<i  ^pr)<TTr}pLov  aol  yap  8r]  Xeyerai  -rrdw  ye  T€$cpa- 
irevadaL  6  'AttoAAwj/  Kai  0"e  iravTa  iKetvio  TretOo/Jievov  TrpaTTCiv. 
'^^ovXofiTjV  av,  w  Kvpe,  outojs  e^^eiv    vvv  8c  iravra  rdvavrta    6  c  C 

ELEVEN   POINT 

TaSe  he  fioc  7rdvT(0<;,  e(f)T],  Kpottre,  Xe^ov  ttco?  airo^e^rjKe 
TO,  m  TOV  ev  Ae\(f>ol'i  'X^priaTrjptov-  aol  fyap  Sr)  Xeyerai  Trdvv 
<ye  TeOepaTrevaOaL  6  ^AiroWcov  Kai  ae  iravTa  eKeivo)     t  C  Q 

TWELVE   POINT 

TctSe  8e  /Aot  iravTcos,  e(f)r],  Kpoicre,  Xe^ov  ircoq  diro- 
^e^TjKe  ra  eK  tov  iv  Ae\(f)o2<;  '^p'r)(TTiqpiov    aoi  yap 
Srj  XeyeTaL  Trdvv  ye  TeOepaTrevcrdai  6  'AttoXXwi/   /cat 
MONOTYPE 

ELEVEN   POINT   MONOTYPE 

TaSe  be  p.oi  irdvTCCs,  e(f)r],  Kpoicre,  Xe^ov  xcos  airo^e^-qKe 
TO,  Ik  tov  ev  Ae\4)ols  xp^o'rrjptof  aol  yap  5?)  XeyeTai  -kolvv 
ye  TedepaTrev(^dai  6  'AwoXkwv  /cat  <re  rravTa  eKeivo)  ireidbixevov 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  i8i 

ANTIQUE  GREEK 

EIGHT   POINT 

TdSe  Si  \LOi  irdvTtos,  «'<t>Ti,  Kpoio-e,  X^^ov  irois  arro^i^r^Ki  to.  €k  tov 
Iv  AcX<t>ois  XP'T'"''"nP'°^  ■  ""o^  "Y^p  St]  Xe^trai  irdw  -yc  TtOepatrtvo-Oai  6 
'AiroXXtov  Ktti  o-€  irdvTa  CKeivu  TreiGojitvov  irpdrrtiv.  'EPovX6(at)v  dv,  a> 
Kvpc,  oiirws  «X"''' '  ''^''  S*  irdvTtt  rdvavTia  €vi6\)S  e|  dpxfjs  irpdrxajv  irpoor- 
t]v€\9t|v  TO)  'AiroXXwvi.     IIws  StJ    €<j)T]  6  Kiipos  ■    8£5acrK€*    irdw  -ydp 

ELEVEN  POINT 

Td6€  8€  (xoi  irdvTcos,  <i<\>T],  Kpoicre,  X€|ov  ttcos  diropePiiKe 
Td  €K  TOV  cv  A€X4)ois  xP'n<'"^^P^°^  *  ^°^  V^^P  S^  Xe-yexaL 
Trdvv  y€  T€0€pair€vo-6aL  6  '  AttoXXwv  Kai  ce  irdvTa  €K€iv(o 
Tr6i6d|i€vov  TTpdTT€iv.     '  Epoi)X6|iT|v  dv,  w  K-Ope,  outws 

INSCRIPTION  GREEK 

TEN    POINT 

PH^ANTA^YI^PA4>YAAEA0TA 
TTANpA  i<ipY  PA4>YAAI  NT  A 
TAMie¥^ANTAAEKATr?f;TZY5ANTA||l^ 
QPAMMATEY^ANTAKAITHC<J>IAO^EBA5T0Y 

HEBREW 

SIX   POINT 

■j'^nn^  "ip^^^  n^Dn  nsnb  tbi^niiji  -jbia  ni'i-jn  nb'biij  ^b©^^ 
rnb    :D''^Ta^^  i:EtJ^^  p-;?  bsian  np^'a  nnpb    :nrn  '^n^x 
■jihsn  npb  aci;;'!  DDn  ypiri   :  nizx'a^  nr^.  nybb'  n^iy  D''.«nsb 

NINE   POINT 

^c^^j^  n?jsn  n3?nb  :  bao^L^  "nV^  ^i^-p  mb-jj  "b^'a 

AT  _JT    :    T  ~_i~T  I-      T     :      •  IV  A*  T         I  V  _J  :  *•      :      ■'^ 

mm  pi2  bsisn  ^c^^j  nnpb    :nrn  ^n:^^^  rhnb 
^m-"  :  n^"j^  TO^  n:?bb  n^jnj?  o^^^nsb  nnb  ;  u^^m^ 


I»2 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


NESTORIAN  SYRIAC 

NINE   POINT 


P            ••     •                _  V                                                         •  P            >>.••       V  P    V 

P    "  ^V           V          V  P     •                                                        V  ...t? 

],    ■*  P?3.SLP     .]1)_^^--^  \-iJl2^    llU^    jV^jSO  >C^^^.t4,2  ,_.t^£w^9    |-t.Cll>0 

•P>v  p          V                            -.                         •  ^f 


ARABIC 

NINE   POINT 


,^    ^  ^       f  ^        ,^^       w  _^  - 

»ji\.*S^  ^'.l  |2^'*  ^^  <3^5  y^  *-^'  J^  dlJjJ.  JUawJI 

ETHIOPIC 

NINE    POINT 

OcHH  :  a(DhSt. :  X7aA'nrh,C  :  Xfttro  ;  fiJiCbh  :  hCfl+ft  :  -tttk  : 
ffD^-Jfc  :  ^Ai^ :  HhH-tCM  :  ttP'P  :  C\<i\  :  XlH  :  X7RS>nrh. 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  183 

MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNS 

SIX  POINT 
EIGHT  POINT 

=  +  -| ^X±:  ::■^f±<A□±^■l/f•'•°'"#52^0© 

NINE  POINT 

=  +  -^X   <   ±   ±   =  :   ::-/<l]°'"-'^?nAi/f 

TEN  POINT 

y^  V  f  X  ±  =  ^  ^  ^  °  '  "  °  :  :  ^  /  d  Ir  s  <^ 
::    -:    Z    Z^  -  /  /    II     I    X  e 

ELEVEN  POINT 

=    +    -^X<An:::-±    ]/    r   /  <  ]] 
rrb  rb  q   J 

SEVEN   POIKT 
FIVE  POINT  =        +        —       -4-        X        °       '        '       #  TWELVE  POINT 

=    +    -  /*  °      '      "     :^ 


f  f  i  )  J   nI  V  V  V 

CANCELED  LETTERS  AND  FIGURES 

EIGHT    POINT 

x'fim^^m  mfimmn  inmnn 


1 84        THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE  MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNS. 
Six  Point 

o   e  ®  e     s  N 

Seven  Point 

+   -   X   -^   =   ±    > 

Eight  Point 
ZAAA\\DO(s)^^<>   =    ^4^^±m^    Z    <  > 

+  _x^  =  ±°'?.'r<  •  •V%*tt§lHHIflHI 

Nine  Point 

+  -x^  =  ±°'?.'r|/%*tt§1IiHiHHH;£$ 

J*    )     <    >  d    h   m    s  M 

*  8  point  on  9  point. 
Ten  Point 

+  _  X  ^  =  ±  •  <>  ? .'  :'  ° '  I  /  %  *  1 1  §  H  H  f  H I 

i^  |ll|^       dhmmgM  «         n  ^   2V 

Eleven  Point 

3./"       dhmsmgM        <^     \. 

Twelve  Point 

+  -X  =  -^-  /°'    *tt§11    iHJftHH 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


OLD   STYLE 


Six  Point 

abcdefghijklmnopqrstu 


i»5 


MONOTYPE  SUPERIOR  AND  INFERIOR 
LETTERS  AND  FIGURES 


Seven  Point 

IJ3<S'7890 

Eight  Point 

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 
1234567890 


1234567890       a/376«f77 


Nine  Point 

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz         1234567890 

1234567890 

Ten  Point 

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw        a  b  c  d  e  f  g  It  i  j  k  I  mn  0  p  q  r  s  t  u  v  w 
xyz       ab  c  defghij  klmno  pqrs        ^^^       1234567890       a /3  7  5  t  f  .; 
I  uvv!  X  y  z      123456-890 


Eleven  Point 

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv 

wxyz      1234567890 


1234567890        a  fi  y  b  ti  n 


SXIPERIOR 
Six  Point 

1234567890 

Seven  Point 

1231567G90 

Eight  Point 

1234567890 

Nine  Point 

1234667  890 

Eleven  Point 

123456  7  890 


1234  66  7  890 


1234567890 


1234567890 


MODERN 

Ten  Point 

SUPERIOR 
1234567890     ^ — ±  X -^  =  •  (]°'?!-;:.. 

INFERIOR 

abcdefghijklmtiopqrs  t  u  v  w 
xyz       1234567890       +  -  ±  x -^ 


2  3  4567890 


i86  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When   thoughtful   Greeks   like    1234 
THE  FIRST   TIME   THAT   THE 


TWENTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gr  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY    POINT 


When  thoughtful  3456 
THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thoug  7890 
THE  FIRST  TIM 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  187 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

FORTY-EIGHT   POINT 


When  th  1234 
THEFIRST 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 


IV hen  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Pol  1 2^4. 
THE  FIRST  TIME   THAT  THE 


TWENTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  56  j8 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  goi2 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


THIRTY  POINT 


JVHEN  thoughtfu  3456 


1 88  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

NO.  8  OLD  STYLE 

TWENTY-TWO   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Gre  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


TWENTY-FOITR   POINT 


When  thoughtful  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO   POINT 


When  thoug90l2 
THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  th  345 
THE  FIRST 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  189 

NO.  8  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

TWENTY-TWO   POINT 

H^hen  thotiglitftLl  Gr  12J4 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thou  go  12 
THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-FOUR  POINT 


THE  FIRST 


ELZEVIR  ITALIC 

TEN   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  ^  T)  €M  (K  %  ^^345 


I90  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CONDENSED  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD     12345 

NINE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  H   67890 

TEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS  12345 

TWELVE   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G     67890 

SIXTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THATTHEG    1234 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T  5678 

TWENTY   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T  9012 

TWENTY-TWO  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIMET  3456 

TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIM  7890 

TWENTY-EIGHT   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TI  1234 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  191 

CONDENSED  OLD  STYLE 

THIRTV-TWO  POINT 

THE  FIRST  5678 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


THE  FIRS  9012 


FORTY   POINT 


THE  FIR  3456 


EXTENDED  OLD  STYLE 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thought  123 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO   POINT 


When  tho  45 
THE  FIRST  1 


192  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

EXTENDED  OLD  STYLE 

FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 

When  78 
THE   FIR 


FRENCH  OLD  STYLE 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth  12345 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH 

SEVEN  POINT 

WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Garth  12345 
WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  B 

TEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly  1234^ 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  193 

FRENCH  OLD  STYLE 

FOURTEEN   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  67890 

SIXTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE   1234 

TWENTY  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIMET  ^678 

TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  901 


THIRTY  POINT 


THE  FIRST  TI  234 

THIRTY-SIX  POINT 

THE  FIRST  56 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


TH§  FI  78 


SIXTY   POINT 


THg  901 


194         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


CHELTENHAM  OLD  STYLE 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  mu  1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  C  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Ca  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  f  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

ACCENTED  LETTERS — SIX  TO  TWELVE  POINT 

AAA    EEEE    III    ooo    000    g   isl 

aaaa     eeee     iiii     6666     iiuiiu     q     n 
CHELTENHAM  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

SIX   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  anJ  of  Corinth,  thev  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT  POINT 

IVhen  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  lih  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

TWELVE   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  th  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  QRAND  P 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  195 

CHELTENHAM  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

FOURTEEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyhius  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  T  THE  GR 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  5678 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greek  90 1 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY   POINT 


When  thoughtful  1908 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thought  1 90 


SPECIAL  CHARACTERS — ALL  SIZES 


ACCENTED  LETTERS — SIX  TO  TWELVE  POINT 

A    E    O    U    fl 

a  d  a  a     e  e  i     it  i     o  d  6  6     u  li  u  u     g     n 


196         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


CHELTENHAM  WIDE 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Co   1 2343 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 


EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fa   12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC 

TWELVE   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

FOURTEEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyb  1 234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 

EIGHTEEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  lik  5678 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Gr  90 1  2 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  197 

CHELTENHAM  WIDE 

THIRTY    POINT 

When  thoughtful  345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


When  though  678 

THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-T*0   POINT 


When  thou  90 

THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


When  tho  1 2 

ACCENTED    LETTERS — SIX   TO   TWELVE   POINT 

AAA    EEE    Hi    oo    uuu    gN 

aaaa     eee      ii     660     uuuii     9     fi 


1 98         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHIACGO  PRESS 


CHELTENHAM  CONDENSED 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyhius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  ha   12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  W 


EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  hke  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corint  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORT 

TEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  H 

FOURTEEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO 

EIGHTEEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Pol  67890 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 

TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  1 234 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  199 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD  EXTRA  CONDENSED 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poiybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  the  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WORLD.    WHEN  AL 


EIGHT   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeb  like  Poiybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WO 


TEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poiybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 

TWELVE   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poiybius  saw  the  fall  of  Cartha  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HE 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poiybius  saw  the  fal  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA 

EIGHTEEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poiybius  s  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO 


200         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CHELTENHAM  BOLD  EXTRA  CONDENSED 

TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Po  123 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 


THIRTY   POINT 


When  dioiightliil  Greeb  I  456 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE 


THIRTY-SIX   POINT 


When  thoughtiiil  Gr  789 
THE  HRST  TIME  THAT 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  20I 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD  CONDENSED 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  W 


EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Cor  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FOR 


TEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HELD  F 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  H 

FOURTEEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 


202  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD  CONDENSED 

TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


THIRTY    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gre  567 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thoughtful  890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  203 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  o  12345 
THE  HRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  F 

EIGHT    rOLNT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  C  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  t  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

TWELVE   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  s  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Po  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 

TWENTY-EOUR  POINT 

When  thoughtful  G  901 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


204         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CHELTENHAM  BOLD 

THIRTY  POINT 

When  thoughtf  234 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thoug  567 

THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thou  89 

THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-EIGHT   POINT 


When  th  23 

THE  FIRST 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  205 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD 

SIXTY    POINT 

When  14 
THE  FIR 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT 


When  5 

ACCENTED  LETTERS — SIX  TO  TWELVE   POINT 

AAA  EEEE  III  OOO  UUU  Q  N   aaaa  eeee  iiii   6660   uuuii   q  n 
CHELTENHAM  BOLD  CONDENSED 

SEVENTY-TWO   POINT 

When  6 


2o6         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CHELTENHAM  BOLD  CONDENSED 

NINETY-SIX  POINT 

Whe7 


ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY  POINT 


ThiO 


ONE-HUNDRED-AND-FORTY-FOUR  POINT 


Wil 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  207 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD  CONDENSED 

ONE-HUNDRED-AND-EIGHTY  POINT 


TWO-HUNDRED-AND-SIXTEEN  POINT 


2o8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD  ITALIC 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  a  1234S 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  C  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P 

FOURTEEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P 12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

EIGHTEEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 

TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 

When  thoughtful  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  209 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD  ITALIC 

THIRTY    I'OINT 

When  thought  345 
THE  FIRST  TIME 

THIRTY-SIX    POINT 

When  thou  678 
THE  FIRST  TI 

FORTY-TWO    POINT 

When  tho  90 
THE  FIRST 


FORTY-EIGHT   POINT 


When  th  12 
THE  FIRS 

ACCENTED   LETTERS — SIX   TO   TWELVE    POINT 

Add    e    i    Odd     U uu    N    n 


2IO         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


CLARENDON 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  an  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HEL 


NINE   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA 

ELEVEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO 

SEVEN    POINT    FIGURES 

1234567890 


IONIC 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car  12345 
THE  FIKST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT   HAD  B 


TITLE  GOTHIC 


SIX   POINT    NO.    SEVENTY-ONE 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN   HELD  FORT    12345 

SIX    POINT   NO.    SEVENTY-TWO 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN  67890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  21 1 

DELLA  ROBBIA 

SIX  poi>ir 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they   12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN   SET  FORTH 

EIGHT   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN   S 

TEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  o  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE   GRAND  PROSPE 

TWELVE    POINT 

\A/^hen  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  th  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybi  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  11  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


TWENTY-FOtJR   POINT 


When  thoughtful  G  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


212         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
DELLA  ROBBIA 

THIRTY   POINT 

When  thought  3456 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thou  789 
THE  FIRST  TI 


FORTY-TWO   POINT 


When  tho  123 
THE  FIRST  I 


FORTY-EIGHT   POINT 


When  th  45 

THE  FIRST 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  213 

GUSHING  OLD  STYLE 

FOURTEEN    POINT    NO.    ONE 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P 

FOURTEEN    POINT    NO.    TWO 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  1 1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 

T\\T;NTY-F0UR    POINT 

When  thoughtful  G  567 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY-SIX   POINT 


When  thoug  890 
THE  FIRST  TI 


FORTY-EIGHT   POINT 


When  tho  12 
THE  FIRST 


214  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CENTURY  EXPANDED 

SIX  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HEL  12345 

EIGHT  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  67890 

TEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO  12345 

ELEVEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  67890 

TWELVE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAN  12345 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  1234 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  5678 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  9012 


THIRTY  POINT 


THE  FIRST  TI  345 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  215 

POST  OLD  STYLE 

SIX  POINT 

\irben  tHou^Htftil  GreeKs  like  Polybitis  sa'w  12345 
TH£  FIR.f  T  TIME,  THA.T    THB   GR.AND    PROSPE 

EIGHT  POINT 

Wlxen  tHoue'Ktful  OreeKs  liKe  Poly  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

TEN  POINT 

AVhen  tl\o\ig'l\tful  GreeKs  liK  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

TWELVE   POINT 

WKen  tHoug'Htful  Greeks  0789O 
THE    FIRST    TIME    THAT   THE 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  1234 
THE  FIR^T  TIME  TH 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

When  thoug'  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When   THO 

SPECIAL  CHARACTERS — ^ALL  SIZES 


2i6         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

PACKARD 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  C  12345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN 

TEN  POINT 

WKen  tKougKtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  tke  fall  of  Ca  678QO 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 

TWELVE  POINT 

WKen  tKougKtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  tKe  fall  12345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

WKen  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Pol37Dius  s  67890 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

WKen  tKougKtful  Greeks  like  P  1^345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greek  67890 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


THIRTY  POINT 


When  thoughtful  G  1^3 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 217 

PACKARD 

THIRTY-SIX  POINT 

WKen  tKought  4567 

THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


WKen  tho  890 

THE    FIRST 


SPECIAL  CHARACTERS — ALL  SIZES 


ni  ^  ^  &  $ 


CLOISTER  BLACK 


TWELVE  POINT 


OTfjen  tfjougfjttul  (greeks;  lifee  ^olpb  1234567890 


2i8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

DE  VINNE 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoutrhtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  o  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  B 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  12345 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyb  67890 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greek  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

When  thoughtful  567 
THE  FIRST  TIME  T 

THIRTY  POINT 

When  though  890 
THE   FIRST  TIM 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  219 

DE  VINNE 

THIRTY-SIX   POINT 

When  thou  13 
THE  FIRST  S 


FORTY-TWO  POINT 


When  th  34 
THE  FIRST 


SIXTY  POINT 


When  15 
THE   FI 


2  20         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


DE  VINNE 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT 

Whei6 
THE  F 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT   A 


Wh7 
VISE 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  221 


DE  VINNE 

NIMETY-SIX    POINT 


Oh  8 
HIM 


ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY  POINT 


Bel 


2  22  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

DEVINNE  CONDENSED 

SEVENTY-TWO   POINT 

Whenl 


NINETY-SIX   POINT 


The 


ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENrY  POINT 


His  3 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  223 


JENSON  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


THEthoug56 


BOLD-FACE  ITALIC 


SIX   POINT 


Witen  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poli/hius  sate  the  fall  of  Cfii-fha  12343 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  I'ROSI'ECT  HAD  SEEN 


NINE   POINT 

lllien  thoughtful  Cr^reeks  like  Polyhius  saw  the  07890 
THE  FIBST  TI3IE  THAT  THE  GRAND  PBOSPE 


224         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
SCOTCH  ROMAN 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  123 


TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 


When  thoughtful  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  T 

When  thoughtful  Gr  1 


THIRTY    POINT 


When  thought  901 
THE  FIRST  TIM 


THIRTY-SIX   POINT 


When  thou  456 

THE  FIRST  T 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 225 

SCOTCH  ROMAN 

FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 

When  th  78 

THE  FIRS 


SIXTY    POINT 


When  90 

THE  FI 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT 


Whel2 

THEF 


226  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


LIGHT-FACE  GOTHIC 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they    12345 
THE    FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN    HELD  FORTH  TO 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  67890 
THE    FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN    HE 

SIX   POINT  COMBINATION  GOTHIC  NO.  ONE  HUNDRED  AND  SIXTY-THREE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WORLD  12345 


GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  th  1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  TH 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthag  67890 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN    HE 

TEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa  6789 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 

TWENTY-TWO    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  227 


COPPERPLATE 

SIX  POINT 
NO.   ONE 

THE  FIRST   TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN     HELD   FORTH   TO  THE  WOR   12345 

NO.    TWO 
THE    FIRST    TIME    THAT    THE    GRAND    PROSPECT    HAD    BEEN     HELD    FORTH   67890 

NO.    THREE 

THE   FIRST  TIME   THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN    H  12345 

NO.   FOUR 

THE    FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE   GRAND    PROSPECT   67890 

TWELVE  POINT 
NO.   ONE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR    12345 

NO.  TWO 

THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  67890 


WHITTIER 

TWELVE  POINT 
NO.   THREE 


THE    FIRST  TIME   THAT    12345 

NO.   FOUR 

THE   FIRST  TIME  T  6789 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 
NO.    ONE 


THE  FIRST  TIM  1234 

NO.  TWO 

THE  FIRST  T  1678 

BLACK  GOXmC 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corin  67890 


228         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
LINING  GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

SIX   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WORL  1234567890 

EIGHT  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WOR  12345 

TEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  67890 

TWELVE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  12345 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA  6789 

EIGHTEEN   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS  1234 

TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  5678 

THIRTY   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T  9012 

THIRTY-SIX  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH  3456 

FORTY-TWO    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  789 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  229 

LINING  GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

FORTY-EIGHT   POINT 

THE  FIRST  Tl  123 


SIXTY  POINT 


THE  FIRST  145 


SEVENTY-TWO   POINT 


THE  FIRST  6 


MONARCH 

SIXTY  POINT 


When  12 
THE  FIR 


230         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
INTERCHANGEABLE  GOTHIC 

SIX  POINT 
NO.   ONE 

THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE   GRAND    PROSPECT    HAD    BEEN     HELD    FORTH    TO   THE  WORLD     12345 

NO.   TWO 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  67890 

NO.    THREE 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN   HELD     12345 

NO.   FOUR 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE  67890 

NO.   FIVE 

THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE     12345 

EIGHT  POINT 

THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P  67890 

TEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR    1234 

TWELVE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  567 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

THE    FIRST  TIM   89 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

THE   FIRST  3 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  231 


ENGRAVER'S  BOLD 

SIX   POINT 

NO.    ONE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRANn  PROSPEfT  IIAI>  BEEN   HELD  FORTH  TO    THE    \\*OR     Isa-lS 

NO.   TWO 
TUE    FIRST    TIME    THAT    THE    GRAND    PRO.SPECT    HAD    HEEN     HELD     FORTH     0T800 

NO.  THREE 
THE     FIRST    TIME    THAT    THE    GRAND    PROSPECT     HAD     BEEN      ISS-IS 

NO.   FOUR 

THE    FIRST    TIME    THAT    THE    GR^VND    PROSPECT    67890 

NO    FIVE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAXD  PR  12345 

TWELVE  POINT 
NO.   ONE 

THE    FIRST   TIME   THAT   THE    G7890 

NO.    TWO 

THE   FIRST  TI>^LE    THA   1234 

NO.  THREE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  S6T8 


ADVERTISING  FIGURES 

EIGHTEEN    POINT    NO.    ONE 


1234567890 

EIGHTEEN  POINT   NO.   TWO 

12    3    4    5    6    7    8    9    0 

THIRTY    POINT 

1234567890 

THIRTY   POINT   OUTLINE 


232  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


LITHO  ROMAN 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like   Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Cart  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 


EIGHT   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius    saw  the    67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyb  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 

TWELVE   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  1  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 

EIGHTEEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  G  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

When  though  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  233 

CONDENSED  TITLE 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  C  1908 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  B 

TEN   POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR  1908 


MAC  FARLAND 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC 


FOURTEEN    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE    1234 


PAUL  REVERE 

EIGHT   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carth  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  123456 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

NINE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fa  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 


234         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


REPRODUCING  TYPEWRITER 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning— points  in  the  world's 
history.   There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FOR 


NEW  MODEL  ELITE  REMINGTON  TYPEWRITER 

TEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius 
saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  t  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 


REMINGTON  TYPEWRITER 

TWELVE   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
bius saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  gr  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 


NEW  MODEL  REMINGTON  TYPEWRITER 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
loius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  235 

BRADLEY  TEXT 

TEN    POINT 

mbcn  tboudbtful  6mk$  like  Polybius  saw  m  fall  of  12M5 

TWELVE   POINT 

Vjm  tboudMful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  tb  12345 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

Ulben  tbougbtful  Greeks  like  Pol  12M 

TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 

mben  tboudbtful  Greek  567$ 

TUDOR  BLACK 

SIX   POINT 

TWlben  tbougbtful  Orecfts  Ufte  ipol^bfus  saw  tbc  fall  of  Cartbage  an^  of  Cor  12345 

EIGHT   POINT 

TKHben  tbougbttul  ©reehs  like  polsbtus  saw  tbe  fall  67890 

TEN   POINT 

Mben  tbouGbttul  (5ree[?s  like  pol^bius  X2345 

TWELVE   POINT 

Mben  tbougbttul  (BrccF^s  line  pol^  07890 

EIGHTEEN   POINT 

Mben  tbouQbtful  (Breeks  1234 

TWENTY  POINT 

Mben  tbougbtful  (3  5678 

THIRTY-SIX   POINT 

mnben  tbou  9012 


236         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
PRIORY  TEXT 

EIGHT   POINT 

Wbtn  tboufibtful  <©reeft|j  lifte  polpbiuiS  ^ato  tbe  fan  of  ^artbage  12345 

TEN   POINT 

Wbtn  tbottffbtftti  Wrecks  Iilic  J)oIpfaia6  sato  tl)e  fall  of  67890 

TWELVE   POINT 

^lien  tljougljtful  (Sreefesi  libe  pol^biu0  fiato  t^  12345 

FOURTEEN   POINT 

Wlitn  tl^ougl^tful  (Butfi^  lifee  |0ol^  6789 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

Wlftn  tbousbtful  Greeks  life  1234 

TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 

W\)tn  t!)ciug|)tful  (Bxtt  5678 

THIRTY    POINT 

W])tn  t!)Oug:J)tful  90X2 


THIRTY-SIX   POINT 


Witn  tljoug  3456 


SIX  POINT  BLACK   NO.  THIRTEEN 

SiSSfjrn  tljougijtful  ffircclis  like  Polgfiius  sato  tijc  fall  oC  CartJ)age  anB  of  Connt  123»,5 


TWELVE   POINT   ENGLISH 


Wif^m  ti)ougi)tful  (greeks  litz  ^polgtiuis  sato 


SPECOIENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 237 

CHAUCER  TEXT 

FOURTEEN    I'OINT 

W^tn  ti)oti0l)tful  (BrnU  Wit  Pol^liius  stilii    t2345 


EIGHTEEN    POINT 

^Itfit  tbouglitful  (gmfts  lil^r  Pole  6780 


TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 

^I)fn  tlioiigljtful  (gmU  12345 


THIRTY  POINT 


Mitn  mnW^l  (S  6789 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


mtn  \WM  (d  34 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


m¥n  tall  1 2 


2^8         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
WEDDING  TEXT 

SIX   POINT 
^Ijcjt  tljtmgllrtul  OSrecfes  like  ^olgbiua  aato  fl]C  fall  of  QZartljage  anb  of  Coruttfi,  tJ;eg       12345 

EIGHT    POINT 

PSlfcn  tI|ougIitfitI  (Jirceks  like  ^olgbiua  sa&i  tl|e  MI  of  Cartljage  atib    B7890 

TEN    POINT 

ti\  ti]cu3l|tful  Circeka  like  ^olgbius  safe  tljc  fall  of    12345 

TWELVE    POINT 

en  ti^ou^Ijtfxtl  (BvBsks  iikt  ^olobtus  safe  tijc    fi7S90 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

Ijett  ti|0U3l|tfuI  Greeks  like  Polgbms  sa6i  12345 


EIGHTEEN    POINT 
NO.    ONE 


[I|gtt  tl]0u_gl|tful  dreeks  like  Polglitus  6780 


EIGHTEEN    POINT 
NO.    TWO 


m  tlfouglitful  Cir^^ks  likt  P^Ig  0123 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 
NO.    ONE 


l^tn  tljau^lftful  (Bxttk^  likt    4567 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 
NO.    TWO 


l^tn  lI|0U3l|tful  dr^^ks  Itk  890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  239 

ENGRAVER'S  OLD  ENGLISH 

SIX   POINT 

mttcit  ttfouglftful  (grrrka  likr  Polubtua  aauitl^efaUaf  QIartttagr  an&  of  Cdnr  12345 

EIGHT   POINT 

]lt;i>n  tliaiuilttful  QlrrrkB  likt  l^alybiua  sahi  tl)r  fall  of  (HattifaQe  67890 

TEN  POINT 

liljptt  tl|n«gl|tf«l  (^rrpka  likr  Palgbiua  Bate  tl|p  fall  12345 

TWELVE   POINT 

m  tljouglitful  (Srrpks  Itk^  Polybiua  Ham  BTBaO 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

m  tl|0ugl|tful  Oi^rrfka  Itk?  Pnl^btua  1234 

EIGHTEEN   POINT 

^n  tlf0ugl]tf«l  ®r^0kH  Itkr  SfifB 

TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 

Mljm  tl|au9l|tful  <Sr?  HflU 

THIRTY   POINT 

\\m  tI|nu0l|tM  345H 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


\^m  ttj0«g  ?89fl 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


\\m  tho  1 23 


240         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
TIFFANY  SCRIPT 

FOURTEEN   POINT 
EIGHTEEN  POINT 

W/ien  mof{^/imcl  cZ-yeeK^  UKe  iLyo/imiti^  &am  me   €7890 


TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 


i^ie^t   iLij/d/ai  ^w/i    Me    'Mi  ^2345 


THIRTY   POINT 


en 


TIFFANY  UPRIGHT 

TWELVE  POINT 
l:0Ln    tfiou^Rtl'uF  Qx^Ja    f.L   9^of.,gi«A    ^a^^  igc    faff  of  Caatfta^e     123*5 


FOURTEEN   POINT 


IS^cn   iga«^gt|'uf  @x..L    fcL    ^ofygiuA   ^a.^    f(?c   faff  of  C    67890 

EIGHTEEN   POINT 

(1/licn   iliQuaJiOut   rJ\'Q.<iviS    lilcc    c/oliioiuA   <ia\^    -123-V 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  241 


TIFFANY  UPRIGHT 

TWICNTY-FOUR   POINT 
NO.    ONE 

(JL/Ii<jn    tl>ouabtiut    orccIcA    lilcc    <Jaluli     5678 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 
NO.  TWO 


Xdfna    iUujfdfJ  §rc.L  Mc  9  9012 


THIRTY   POINT 


UJwa  tliaualitJuL  oteelcA  l  3^56 


TIFFANY  SHADED 

FOURTEEN   POINT 


tOfwn   tfxau^^ijJ    Q^L   (iL   d^XjkuS   6u^i   tft«  /aff  «/    12345 

EIGHTEEN   POINT 

XdLn  titau^kfii  QxeeL  ilL  S^JijkuA  A     67890 


TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 
NO.   ONE 


WLu  tLu^k^J  QteJL  ilL  d^JijI^  67890 


TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 
NO.    TWO 


dLn  Aau^kfd  QxeeL  ilL  £P  12345 


242         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CAXTON  INITIALS 

THIRTY-SIX   POINT 


INITIALS 


8=^^:^)^=^:?:^ 


A 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


243 


INITIALS 


FORTY-KIGTIT   POINT    BURFORO 


^^-ij 

* 

^^ 

P? 

—5 

^ 

"^ 

1 

•T 

M 

i 

1 

M 

i 

p 

244         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


INITIALS 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT  BtTRFORD 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


245 


INITIALS 


SEVEMTY-TWO   POINT   BURFORD 


FORTY-EIGHT   POINT   DELLA    ROBBIA 


1 

1 

1    "" — ^ 

^^3 

' — r  \'^ 

W^i 

246         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


INITIALS 

FORTY-EIGHT   POINT  DELLA  ROBBIA 


SEVENTY-TWO   POINT   DELLA    ROBBIA 


m  .\m!m$M 

1 

SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


247 


INITIALS 


SEVENTY-TWO   POINT   DELLA    ROBBIA 


248         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


INITIALS 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT  DELLA   ROBBIA 


SIXTY    POINT   ROYCROFT 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


249 


INITIALS 

SIXTY  POINT   ROYCROFT 


250 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


INITIALS 

THIRTY    POINT    JENSON 


H  B  S  H  ■  H 

^mi^  ^P  ^a  '^M  \^M  i^ 


BH  B@HB 


■  ■H 


■ 


1^ 


MISCELLANEOUS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


25T 


INITIALS 


MISCELLANEOUS 


252         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
INITIALS 


MISCELLANEOITS 


15 


M 


16 


WS^9 


17 


18 


19 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


253 


INITIALS 

MISCELLANEOUS 


254  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  COAT-OF-ARMS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


255 


BRASS  CIRCLES 


256  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


257 


ORNAMENTS 


28 


258  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

ORNAMENTS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


259 


ORNAMENTS 


^^  ej^^< 


# 


48 


m 


W 


49 


26o         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


.U'^. 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  261 


ORNAMENTS 


^♦"     *   1?  ^   -^  #  tf  •.'• 

68  69  70  71  72  73  74        75 

POST 


76  77  78  79  80  81  82 

POST  JENSON 


89  90 

■     GiaiiiHllQBllS] 

96    97     98    99    100    101    102     103     104     105 

■  iisisiiD-n 

106      107     108      109      110      111      112      113 


119  118 


+  .t 


* 


122      123   124     125/     126      127      128     129 


262         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


130  131- 


132 


133 


134 


w^ — «1 

135 


136 


jllb-^^^^'^^<C7-4]L 


137 


138 


139 


140  141 


142  143 


144  145 


146 


147  148  149  150  151 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


263 


ORNAMENTS 


152 


155 


156 


157 


264         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


SPECBIENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


265 


ORNAMENTS 


f       T       ^1 


SI?  S«  X  #   i 

164  165  166  167  168 


161 


169 


170     171 


173 


174     175 


176 


^^m^p 


d-^dS 


m 


160 


179 


180 


266         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


182 


^.% 


SPECIMENS  OF  T\TES  IN  USE 


267 


ORNAMENTS 


193 


268  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


^\M/h 


^AAAAAAXAAAAAAAAAXAAAXAAAAAXAAAAAAAAa27 


196 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


269 


ORNAMENTS 


203 


204 


205 


206 


207 


211 


270  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

BRASS  RULE  FACES 

HAIRLINE    (on    one-  and    TWO-POINT   BODY) 

DOTTED    (on   one-point    BODY) 

DOTTED    (on  two-point   BODY) 

HAIRLINE    PARALLEL   (ON   TWO-POINT   BODY) 

half-point  SIDE   FACE   (ON  TWO-POINT   BODY) 

ONE-POINT   SIDE    FACE    (ON   TWO-  AND   THREE-POINT   BODY) 

TWO    POINT 

THREE    POINT 

FOUR    POINT 

SIX    POINT 

EIGHT    POINT 

TEN    POINT 

TWELVE    POINT 


PRESCRIPTION  SIGNS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


271 


BORDERS 

TWO    POINT 
NO.  ONE 


THREE   POINT 
NO.   TWO 


NO.    THREE 
■I.IJ.I,I.I.I  IJ  »H  1 


FOUR   POINT 
NO.    FOUR 


DiiiiiiiniiiiiiiiiigiiiiiiiiiiH 


SIX   POINT 
NO.    FIVE 


lJJJJJJ.M.a^^JJJJ.!JJJJJJX^L^^Ji■!J,A^J.^^.!J.!J■^^^^^^!J.^^.!aJJJJ.!.L^l.u.^llJJ.^l.^ 


NO.    SEVEN 


PI  IC 


NO.    EIGHT 

HI     II  ini — ini  II — ir 


""  in 


EIGHT   POINT 
NO.    TEN 


NO.    ELEVEN 
**************************** 


NO.    TWELVE 


Hm'^'WiWmm!mwjmmmm3mmmmmm!mmiW.mmmi^^^^ 


272  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


BORDERS 

TWELVE   POINT 
NO.   THIRTEEN 


NO.    FOURTEEN 


NO.  FIFTEEN 


NO.  SIXTEEN 


NO.   SEVENTEEN 

.•i*.  tif,  rif,  t'ift »'!'.  ."t*.  t'i'.  ."t*.  .'♦'«  .'t*.  .'t*.  .'t*.  ."j?.  ."t*.  .*♦*.  ."t*.  .'♦'.  »*!*.  .*!*.  .*♦•.  .4'. 
•X*  '+*  '•♦>'  '+*  '+'  •+'  •+'  ••♦'' '+'  '•♦•'  '♦'  '+*  •+'  •+' '+'  " '  '•♦•' '+' '+'  •+*  •<♦•' 


NO.   EIGHTEEN 


NO.   NINETEEN 


KKKKKKSKKKKKKKKKKKKS8 


TWENTY-FOUR   POINT 
NO.   TWENTY 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


273 


BORDERS 


THIRTY  POINT 


NO.  TWENTY-ONE 


******** 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 
NO.  TWENTY-TWO 


NO.  TWENTY-THREE 


NO.  TWENTY-FOUR 


NO.  TWENTY-FOUR  A 


mwwjww 


a 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 
NO.  TWENTY-FIVE 

N 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE  275 

MONOTYPE  ACCENTS— MODERN 

11-POINT  NO.  8— LOWER  CASE  ITALIC 
a        a         a         a         q         a         a 
d        e     S         e        ^      e     e         e         g 

VI       fh       n         n        n        n      n       6 
r    r       f         s       s       (    t     u       u       u 


a      c 

c 

Q 

1       c     e 

e 

2 

I 

I 

0       6 

2£ 

0 

6 

u       u 

u 

u 

^        y      y      y      ^  ^  Foundry  Accents 

Ct       CB      &       d       ^       b       d         These  accents  are  cast  from  foundry  matrices 

1!^"  add  ee  h    i    0    u  it    6  p 

a         e        %         6         ii  d         e         i         6         u 

a         e         i         0         u  d         e         I         0         u 

a         e        i         0         u  a         e         I         6         a, 

11-POINT  NO.  8— ITALIC  CAPS 

AEIOU    AEIOU    AEIOU    AEIOU    AEIOU    AEIOU 

A     K     Q    N 

11-POINT  NO.  8— ROMAN  LOWER  CASE 
a      a      9(3      a      hhknos      sttyp 
aei'dii  aeiou 

^eioti  aeioti 

aeiou  aeiou 

11-POINT  NO.  8— ROMAN  CAPS 

AEIOU    AElOtJ    AElOtJ    IfilOt    AElOU    AfilOtJ 
SSgHKQAgN 

11-POINT  NO.  8— ROMAN  SMALL  CAPS 

5  H  H  I  MS  T  T  y 

A  i  17  A  E  O  U 

AEIU  t  1  6  t! 


276         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE  ACCENTS— MODERN 

9-POINT  NO.  8— LOWER  CASE  ITALIC 
a    a    g    e     e     §     g      i     k     n     0     q     0     s      s      t     u     v 

d  e  i  6  u 

a  e  I  6  u 

a  e  I  6  u 

9-POINT  NO.  8— ITALIC  CAPS 
E        E        E        ^        K       N         0         Q        S        S        T 

9-POINT  NO.  8— ROMAN  LOWER  CASE 
aaagdg      i      nnnftorsuv> 


a 

e 

I 

0 

u 

a 

e 

I 

6 

H 

a 

e 

i 

0 

u 

a 

e 

1 

0 

u 

a 

e 

1 

6 

u 

a 

e 

i 

6 

u 

a 

e 

i 

0 

u 

a 

e 

i 

6 

u 

a 

e 

i 

6 

XI 

9-POINT  NO.  8— ROMAN  CAPS 
S  J* 


9-POINT  NO.  8— ROMAN  SMALL  CAPS 
EEiiootJuy 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE  277 

MONOTYPE  ACCENTS— MODERN 

8-POINT  NO.  8— LOWER  CASE  ITALIC 

adQadci  f  ddeetteee  h  h  i  {ii    /;  fin  od^qq  r  ^§stt  uuu  y  ^ 

d  e  i  6  u  a  e  i  6  u 

d  i  I  6  H  a  e  I  6  u 

d  e  I  o  u  a  ^  I  5  u 

8-POINT  NO.  8— ITALIC  CAPS 
A    A    A    A     QDDEE^HHKO     S    S  &   T   U 

8-POINT  NO.  S— ROMAN  LOWER  CASE 

a&aaSa  gdegegeehhiikmnnoooooooorsstttii  uQnu  z  5  J) 

a  e  i  6  li  a  e  I  6  u 

4el6u  aelou 

8-POINT  NO.  8— ROMAN  CAPS 
lAAgEEHHKSST 

8-POINT  NO.  8— ROMAN  SMALL  CAPS 
None 


278         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE  ACCENTS— MODERN 

7-POINT  NO.  8— LOWER  CASE  ITALIC 

&  &  Q  n  5 

a  e  i  o  u  del 

d  e  i  d  U  del 


7-POINT  NO.  8— ROMAN  LOWER  CASE 

a  &  5  n  6 

eioii  delofl 

etofl  aeiou 

dioti  aeioQ 

No  Accented  Caps,  Small  Caps,  or  Italic  Caps,  in  Seven  Point 


]VIANU.\L  OF  STYLE  279 

MONOTYPE  ACCENTS— MODERN 
6-POINT  NO.  o— LOWER  CASE  ITALIC 

dfCdighlib        i        1^        n        o        6        0        r      i      s  t      U       y 

a                e              I              o              il                      d                e              i  6              li 

d                S              t              6              a                      a                e              i  6              u 


6-POINT  NO.  5— ITALIC  CAPS 

D     H     H    5    Q     I<: 

6-POINT  NO.  5— ROMAN  LOWER  CASE 
a  c  d  1 


6-POINT  NO.  5— ROMAN  CAPS 
K 

6-POINT  NO.  5— ROMAN  SMALL  CAPS 


None 


6-POINT  NO.  1— ROMAN  LOWER  CASE 
a     6     u        No  Accented  Caps  or  Small  Caps 


No  italic  accents 


28o        THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Six 

a  e  i  6  1 
a  e  t  6  ( 
a  e  i  6  i 
a,  6i  6  \ 
a  e  i  6  I 
a  e  i  o  I 


MONOTYPE  ACCENTS— OLD  STYLE 
Point  Seven  Point  Eight  Point 


a  e  t  0  u 
d  e  i  o  a 
a  e  i  d  u 
a  e  i  6  u 
a  e  i  o  u 
a  e  id  u 
i  n 


A  E  I  o  u 
A  E  t  6  u 
A  E  i  6  u 

A  E  f  6  U 

i  E  I  6  u 
A  £  I  6  u 


Nine  Point 


ii  e  1  6  ii 

a  e  i  o  ii 

a  e  i  0  ii 

a  e  i  6  u 

a  e  i  6  ii 

a  e  i  6  ii 

a  e  i  6  11 

a  6  i  6  ia 

aei6u 

a  e  f  6  ii 

a  e  i  o  ii 

a  eio  u 

a  e  1  6  ii        se 

a  e  1  6  u 

a  e  i  6  ii          ae 

a  e  1  6  ii        oe 

g  n  5  a  a        oe 

Ciiacc0ar§th30 

a  e  I  6  u 

3S})isssuz 

agiS  u      « 
Smsssu)?     ce 

eoycaouICSP 

=  Library  Cards 

a'e'i  0  ii 

d&idu 

d  e  i  6  ii 

a  e  i  6  ii 

a  e  i  0  a. 

^      ii     ^      A.      A. 

a  el  d  ii 

a  ct  6  u 

a  ei  0  u 

a&iou 

d  e  i  6  u 

allou 

a  e  I  0  u 

d  e  i  6  u 

S  e  i  d  ii          cB 

a  e  i  0  a        ce 

a  e  i  0  u 

(  n  0  a  a         ce 

q^cgins'sss^i 

d  el  0  u       (B 

■ieia 

finsssu        oe 

MqiOsss 

losssiiu^ 

uiJ 

A  E  i  O  U 

A  E  i  6  u 

A  E  t  6  U 

Aitou 

A  E  i  O  U 

A  E  f  6  U 

A  E  i  O  U 

A  E  i  O  U 

A  E  f  6  U 

AEio  U 

A  E  i  O  U 

fN 

Afif  5  & 

CEOuAi 

N5 

§ss  u 

Aciiossu 

sy 

S  H  K  S  § 
DT  H  H  H 

k  h  d  f  sd  t h 

HTSA 

s  s  s  h 

HTShf^t 

d  h  ni  s     H  S 

dstf'  ■ 

MANUAL  OF  STYLE 


2»I 


MONOTYPE  ACCENTS-^OLD  STYLE 


Ten  Point 

a  e  i  o  u 
a  e  i  6  <i 
a  e  1  o  u  c 
a  e  1  6  u  c 
a  e  i  o  u 
a.  e  i  6  li 
fnaoacel^S 


Eleven  Point 


a  e  t  0  li 
a  e  t  6  H 
a  e  i  d  u 
a  e  I  6  a 
a  e  i  0  u  CB 
a  e  I  d  u  ce 
QpodnQP 


A  E  I  o  u 
AE  t  6  U 

A  E  i  6  u 

A  E  I  6  U 
A  E  i  O  tJ 
A  E  I  6  U 

N 


CA 


K  k  H  h6 
hTtDHd 
S  3  S  S  h 


a  e  1  o  u 
a  e  1  6  u 
a  e  i  o  u 
a  e  i  6  li 
a  e  I  o  u  ae 
a  e  i  6  u  oe 


sssuep 


a  e  z  0  ti 
a  e  i  6  tl 
a  e  I  b  u 
a  e  i  6  u 
a  e  I  0  u 
a  e  I  6  u  a 
grndssti'Sce 

pis^sug 


A  E  I  O  U 

A  E  i  6  U 

A  E  i  O  U 

A  E  i  6  U 

A  E  i  O  U 

A  E  i  6  u 
N^gAEO 

ISSS 

TSHdsth 
HTSAdht 

St 


Twelve  Point 

ii  e  i  o  ii 
a  e  i  6  u 
a  e  i  o  u 

^     ^    ^     ^     ^ 

a  e  1  o  u 
a  e  i  0  u 
aeiou   ae 


a  e  t  0  u 
a  e  t  3  u 
a  e  I  0  u 
d  e  I  6  il 
a  e  i  0  11(2 
aei 6 u  ce 
gnQCOV 


AEIOU 
A  E  i  6  U 
AEIOU 
AEIOU 
AEIOU 

AEIOUNg 
k  S  h  h  t 


Twelve  Point 

a  o  u  c  ea 
o  cyyYik 
6  u  ia  ie  m 
]7"5dlszfa 

laieiu  }  pd 
dccelfzy 

AeiOu 
Aeiou 

AOUG 
CS0 

=  Lib.  Cards 


282         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Six  Point 

a  e  i  o  ii 

a  e  i  o  fi 

li  e  i  6  VI 

a  e  i  6  u 

a  e  i  0  u 

a  e  i  5  u 


Seven  Point 


a  e  1  o  u 
a  e  i  6  u 
a  e  I  o  u 
a  e  J  6  u 
a  e  i  0  u 
a  e  i  6  uf 


MONOTYPE  ACCENTS— GUSHING 

Eight  Point  Ten  Point 

a  e  i  o  u  a  e  i  o  ii 

^eiofi  ,.*.*» 

.vv.v  aeiou 
a  e  1  o  u 

aei66      ae  aeiou 

aeioufoe  aeiou    ae 

aeiou  cb 
aeiou? 

hkhss 

AEiOAEE 

CSHH 

=  Diclionary 


Nine  Point 
a  e  i  o  ii 
a  e  i  6  li 
a  e  i  o  ii     ae 
aeiou     ce 
a  e  i  6  ii 
a  e  i  6  ii  f 


Eleven  Point 
a  e  i  o  ii 
aeiou 
a  e  1  6  u  ae 
a  e  i  6  u  oe 
aeiou 
a  e  i  6  u  5 


Twelve  Point 

a  e  i  o  ii 
aeiou 
aeiou 
aeiou 
a  e  i  o  ii 
a  e  i  6  ii 
g  flyy  sh 
la  ie  iu 
AO  U    ae 
AE  6    oe 
Ae  6 
gNC 

=  Library  Cards 


MISCELLANEOUS  MONOTYPE 

NO.    TWENTY-SIX 

1234567890       1234567890  1234567890 


S  T  U  V    s  T  u 


V 


r    1    i 
f  1  c   3 


SIX  POINT  NO.  6F 

1234567^90 


MONOTYPE  COMBINATION  BRACES  6,  8,  g,   lO,   II,   AND    12  POINT 


INDEXES 


INDEX  TO  MANUAL 


(The  numbers,  unless  otherwise  indicated,  refer  to  sections) 


'A"  and  "an":    use  of,  before  h  and  u. 

114;  spacing  of,  268. 
"a-"  (negative  particle),  compounds  with, 

Abbreviations:  in  literary  references,  no. 
237  (cf.  37);  no  space  between  elements 
of,  52,  103;  not  to  be  divided,  219; 
of  academic  titles.  22;  of  biblical  and 
apocryphal  books,  list  of,  log;  of  names 
of  states,  106;  of  technical  terms,  list 
of,  in;  of  titles  of  publications,  omis- 
sion of  period  after  initials  used  for, 
123;  rules  for,  106-11;  use  of  apos- 
trophe in,  123;    of  period  after,  123a. 

"-able"  and  "-ible,"  in  divisions,  224. 

Academic  degrees,  abbreviation  and  capi- 
talization of,  21-22. 

Accents,  retention  of,  in  foreign  words 
incorporated  into  English,  59. 

Acquired,  limited,  or  special  meaning, 
words  having,  capitalization  of,  25. 

Acts,  juridical,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
18. 

A.D.  {anno  Domini):  spacing  of,  52,  219; 
use  of  small  caps  for,  52. 

Address,  capitalization  of  titles  in  direct, 
21. 

Address  line:  at  end  of  letters,  etc.,  how  to 
set,  50;  at  opening  of  letters,  etc.,  how 
to  set,  64;  omission  of  comma  after,  161. 

Addresses,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Adjectives:  capitalization  of,  in  titles 
of  publications,  41;  compound,  183; 
capitalization  of,  derived  from  proper 
nouns,  i;  ending  in  "-ical,"  how  to 
divide,  229;  omission  of  comma  between 
two,  147;  proper,  capitalization  of,  i 
(cf.  S,  S3)- 

Administrative  bodief.  capitalization  of 
names  of,  12. 

Adverbial  clauses,  150. 

Adverbs:  capitalization  of.  in  titles  of 
publications.  41;  ending  in  "-ly,"  not 
to  be  hyphenated  with  adjectives  or  par- 
ticiples, 183;  use  of  comma  in  connec- 
tion with,  145. 


<t,  rules  for  use  of,  115. 

Ages:  historical,  linguistic,  and  geological, 
capitalization  of,  14;  to  be  spelled  out, 
99. 

Algebraic  formulas:  letters  used  to  desig- 
nate unknown  quantities  in,  67;  spacing 
of,  273. 

Alignment:  in  columns  of  tables,  246; 
of  decimals  and  dollar  signs,  245;  quo- 
tation marks  to  be  "cleared"  in,  90. 

Alliances,  political,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  16. 

Alphabetizing  of  names,  rules  for.  240. 

AM.  {ante  meridiem):  52,219;  use  of  small 
caps  for,  52. 

American  system  of  divisions.  221. 

"Ampersand":  definition  of,  107;  when 
used,  107. 

And:  "short,"  107;  when  to  use  comma 
before,  143. 

Anglicized  derivatives  from  Latin  and 
Greek,  form  of  diphthongs  cb  and  a:  in, 
lis- 

"Angstrom  units,"  abbreviation  for,  23, 
III. 

"Ante."  compounds  with,  208. 

"Anti."  compounds  with,  208. 

Antithetical  clauses,  punctuation  of, 
149. 

Apocrypha:  list  of  abbreviations  for,  109; 
titles  of,  to  be  set  in  roman,  60. 

Apostles,  omission  of  "St."  in  connection 
with  names  of,  108. 

Apostrophe:  rules  for  use  of.  163-65;  use 
of,  in  contractions,  123ft,-  to  form 
plural  of  numerals,  165;  to  form  pos- 
sessive, 164  (cf.  113);  to  mark  omis- 
sion of  figures  or  letters,  163  (cf.  1236). 

Appositional  clauses,  punctuation  of,  150. 

Arabic  numerals,  spacing  of,  at  beginning 
of  lines,  271;  in  headlines,  spacing  of, 
.  271. 

Art,  titles  of  works  of,  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  84. 

Article:  definite,  not  to  be  used  in  connec- 
tion   with    "Rev."    and    "Hon.,"    92; 


285 


286 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


not  to  be  treated  as  part  of  title  of  peri- 
odicals, 43;  indefinite,  form  of,  before  eu, 
sounded  It,  "one,"  etc.,  and  long  u.  114. 

Articles,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Artificial  noun-formations,  plural  of,  165. 

Artistic  schools,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  9. 

"As  follows,"  use  of  colon  in  connection 
with,  132. 

Asterisk,  use  of,  for  footnote  index,  232. 

Astronomical  terms:  capitalization  of,  48; 
italics  not  used  for,  71. 

Astrophysical  Journal:  connecting  num- 
bers in.  173,  note;  metric  symbols  in, 
123,  note;  style  for  footnotes  in,  239, 
note;  use  of  comma  with  figures  in, 
ISO,  note. 

Authors:  hints  to,  pp.  121-24;  names  of, 
if  in  text,  not  repeated  in  footnotes, 
235- 

Averages  and  generalizations,  columns 
of,  in  tables,  sometimes  in  distinctive 
type,  241,  250  (Table  III). 

Bastard  title.     See  Half-title. 

B.C.  ("before  Christ"):  spacing  of,  52, 
219;  use  of  small  caps  for,  52;  hundreds 
to  iDe  repeated  with,  173. 

"  Bi-,"  compounds  with,  197. 

Bible:  books  of,  abbreviations  for,  109; 
capitalization  of  names  for,  29;  titles 
of  books  of,  to  be  capitalized,  31;  to  be 
set  in  roman,  60;  versions  of,  abbrevia- 
tions for,  109;    capitalized,  30. 

Biblical:  books,  abbreviations  for,  109, 
and  capitalization  of  names  of,  31; 
parables,  capitalization  of,  32;  terms, 
miscellaneous,  capitalization  of,  33. 

Bills,  legislative,  capitalization  of,  i8. 

Biological  terms,  use  of  capitals  in,  46. 

Black  face.     Set  Bold-face  type. 

Blank  verse,  indention  of,  275. 

Blanks,  use  of  leaders  for,  in  ruled  columns 
of  figures,  245;  in  open  tables,  see 
specimen  tables  in,  250. 

Blocks,  capitalization  of  names  of,  8. 

Bodies:  legislative,  judiciary,  and  admin- 
istrative, capitalization  of  names  cl,  12; 
military,  numbers  of,  to  be  spelled 
out,  100. 

Bold-face  type:  defined,  255;  how  indi- 
cated, 255. 

"Book,"  compounds  of,  186. 


Books:  biblical,  abbreviation  of,  109,  and 
capitalization  ot.  31;  capitalization  of 
titles  of,  41;    italics  for  titles  of,  60. 

Botanical  Gazette:  exception  to  n.de  for 
capitalization  ol  titles  ot  publications 
in,  41,  note;  to  hyphenization  ol  com- 
pounds of  "co-,"  etc.,  203,  note;  to  rule 
for  italics,  60,  note;  to  rule  for  quotation 
marks,  82,  note;  metric  symbols  in, 
123,  note;  footnotes  in,  239,  note;  thou- 
sands in,  159,  note. 

Botanical  terms:  use  of  capitals  in,  46; 
of  italics,  46,  71. 

Bourgeois,  explained,  252. 

Box-heads:  defined,  282;  how  to  set, 
242;  illustrated,  250;  omission  of 
period  after,  125;    use  of  capitals  in,  41. 

Brackets,  rules  for  use  of,  178-79. 

Break,  or  change,  in  sentence,  to  be  indi- 
cated by  dash,  166. 

Breakline:    defined,  217;    spacing  of,  267. 

Brevier,  explained,  252. 

"Brother,"  compounds  of,    190. 

"Brothers,"  forming  part  of  name  of 
firm,  107. 

Buildings,  capitalization  of  names  of,  8. 

But-clauses,  use  of  comma  in  connection 
with,  144. 

"By-,"  compounds  with,  202. 

C,  soft,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 

Capitalization:  of  abbreviations  of  aca- 
demic degrees,  celestial  objects,  etc., 
22;  of  adjectives  derived  from  proper 
nouns,  I,  42;  of  adjectives  and  nouns 
designating  definite  geographical  regions, 
5;  of  books  of  the  Bible  and  other 
sacred  books,  31;  botanical  terms.  46; 
of  church  fathers,  27;  of  conventions, 
congresses,  expositions,  etc.,  17;  of 
creeds  and  confessions  of  faith,  19; 
of  Egyptian  dynasties,  13;  epithets, 
used  as  proper  names,  2;  of  exclama- 
tions "O"  and  "Oh,"  40,  117;  of 
familiar  names  applied  to  particular 
persons,  21;  of  first  words,  34-36,  38, 
39;  of  feast  days  and  civic  holidays,  20; 
of  geographical  names,  4-5;  of  geo- 
logical epochs,  14,  46;  of  governmental 
departments,  12;  of  Greek  and  Latin 
poetry,  38;  of  historical  epochs.  14;  of 
important  events,  15;  of  legislative, 
judiciary,  and  administrative  bodies,  12; 
of  linguistic  and  literary  periods,  14,  123; 
of  miscellaneous  terms,  9,  16,  33;  of 
monastic  orders,  10;  of  names  for  the 
Bible,  29;  of  names  of  regiments,  13; 
of  names  and  epithets  of  peoples,  races, 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:    INDEX 


287 


and  tribes,  47;  of  names  of  bodies  of 
solar  system.  48;  of  "nature,''  etc.,  and 
abstract  ideas,  personified.  26;  of  nouns 
and  adjectives  used  to  designate  the 
Supreme  Being,  or  any  member  of  the 
Trinity.  24;  of  nouns  followed  by  a 
numeral.  37;  of  organizations  and 
institutions.  11-12;  of  particles  (in 
French.  Dutch.  German  names),  3;  of 
periods  in  history  or  literature,  14; 
of  philosophical,  literarj',  and  artistic 
schools,  g;  of  poetry.  34;  of  political 
alliances.  16;  of  political  divisions.  6-7; 
of  political  parties,  g.  16;  of  principal 
words.  41;  of  pronouns  referring  to  the 
Supreme  Being.  24;  of  proper  nouns 
and  adjectives,  i,  5,  34.  53;  of  regions 
or  parts  of  world,  s;  of  terms  applied 
to  groups  of  states,  5;  of  religious 
denominations  and  edifices,  g,  28; 
of  scientific  names  of  divisions,  orders, 
genera,  species,  etc.,  46;  of  sessions  of 
Congress,  13;  of  thoroughfares,  parks, 
squares,  blocks,  buildings,  etc.,  8;  . 
of  titles,  academic  degrees,  orders 
(decorations),  etc..  21  (cf.  4g);  of  titles 
of  publications.  41;  of  titles  of  manu- 
scripts. 44;  of  treaties,  acts,  laws,  bQls. 
etc.,  18;  of  versions  of  the  Bible.  30; 
of  words  with  an  acquired,  limited,  or 
special  meaning,  i,  25;  of  zoological 
and  paleontological  matter,  46;  verbs 
derived  from  proper  names  and  having 
a  specialized  meaning,  not  capitalized, 
i;   rules  for,  1-57;   word-lists,  4. 

Capitals:  how  indicated.  257;  rules  for 
use  of,  i-4g. 

Capitals  and  small  capitals,  rules  for  use 
of,  5°,  SI- 

Caps.     See  Capitals. 

Catalogues,  designation  of  celestial  ob- 
jects in,  71. 

Center-heads:  defined.  27g;  illustrated, 
27g;  use  of  capitals  in.  41. 

"Centigrade.  "  abbreviation  for,  in. 

Centuries,  numbers  of,  to  be  spelled  out, 
100. 

Cf.,  to  be  set  in  roman,  61. 

Chapters,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted. 
82. 

Chemical  symbols,  how  to  treat,  71,  123. 

Christian  names,  to  be  spelled  out,  g3. 

''Church,"  when  capitalized,  28. 

Church  fathers:  omission  of  "St."  in  con- 
nection with  names  of,  108;  when  capi- 
talized, 27- 


Citations:  from  different  authors  follow- 
ing each  other  uninterrupted  by  any 
intervening  original  matter,  75;  of  pas- 
sages in  author's  own  words,  74  (cf. 
85);  rules  for  reduction  of,  85-87;  for 
punctuation  of,  112. 

Civil  titles,  capitalization  of,  21. 

Classical  references,  rules  for  punctuation, 
237- 

Clauses,  punctuation  of:  adverbial,  150; 
antithetical,  i4g;  appositional,  150; 
complementary,  i6g;  conjunctive,  144; 
parenthetical,  150,  167,  i6g,  177; 
participial,  148;   summarizing,  170. 

"Cleared,"  definition  of,  go. 

"Co-,"  compounds  with.  203. 

Colon:  definition  and  illustration  of  use 
of,  131;  rules  for  use  of.  131-36;  use 
of,  after  salutatory  phrase  at  beginning 
of  letters,  133;  between  place  of  publi- 
•  cation  and  publisher's  name,  135;  in 
connection  with  introductory  remarks 
of  speaker.  133;  to  emphasize  close 
connection  between  two  clauses,  131; 
to  introduce  statement,  extract,  etc., 
131;  to  separate  chapter  and  verse  in 
Scripture  passages.  134;  to  separate 
volume  and  page  references,  134;  clause 
from  illustration  or  amplification,  131; 
hours  and  minutes  in  time-indications, 
134- 

Columns  of  figures,  spacing  of,  245. 

Combination  of  words  into  one  adjective 
preceding  noun,  use  of  hyphen  for, 
183. 

Comma:  definition  and  illustrations  of 
use  of.  141;  omission  of,  between  two 
adjectives,  147;  in  signatures  and  after 
author's  name  at  beginning  of  articles, 
161;  use  of,  after  digits  indicating 
thousands,  i5g;  before  "and,"  "or," 
and  "nor,"  143;  before  "of"  in  con- 
nection with  residence  or  position,  157; 
omission  of.  between  consecutive  pages, 
etc.,  158;  between  month  and  year,  160; 
in  connection  with  adjectival  phrases, 
152;  omitted  before  "rather,"  146; 
with  adverbial  clauses,  150;  with  anti- 
thetical clauses,  i4g;  with  appositional 
clauses,  150;  with  brief  quotations  or 
maxims,  156;  with  clauses  ending  in 
different  prepositions,  153;  with  con- 
junctions, 144;  with  conjunctions, 
adv'erbs,  connective  particles,  and 
phrases,  145;  with  parenthetical  clauses, 
150;  with  participial  clauses,  148;  to 
indicate  omissions,  155;  to  separate 
identical,  or  similar,  words,  151;  to 
separate    numbers,    154;     to    separate 


288 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


proper  nouns,   142;     rules  for   use   of, 
141-62. 

Commercial:  firms,  how  to  treat  titles  of, 
107;  organizations  and  institutions, 
capitalization  of  names  of,  11. 

"Company,"  to  be  abbreviated  when 
forming  part  of  name  of  firm,  loj. 

Complementary  clauses,  use  of  dashes  in 
connection  with,  i6q. 

Component  elements,  omission  of,  in 
compound  words,  211. 

Compound  adjectives,  183. 

Compound  words,  etymological  division 
of,  221;  omission  of  element  common 
to  two  or  more,  to  be  indicated  by 
hyphen,  211. 

Compounds:  hyphenated,  capitalization 
of  nouns  constituting  parts  of,  in  titles, 
45;  of  "book,"  "house."  "mill," 
"room,"  "shop,"  "work,"  186;  of 
"father,"  "mother,"  "brother,"  "sister," 
"daughter,"  "parent,"  and  "foster," 
190;  of  "feDow,"  189;  of  "god,"  19s; 
of  "half,"  "quarter,"  etc.,  196;  of 
"life"  and  "world,"  192;  of  "maker" 
and  "dealer,"  187;  of  "master,"  194; 
of  present  participles  with  nouns  or 
prepositions,  185;  of  "self,"  198;  of 
"skin,"  193;  of  "store,"  188;  with 
"ante,"  "infra,"  "inter,"  "intra," 
"post,"  "sub,"  "super,"  "supra,"  and 
"anti,"  208;  with  "by-,"  202;  with 
"co-,"  "pre-,"  and  "re-,"  203;  with 
"extra,"  "pan,"  and  "ultra,"  209; 
with  "fold,"  199;  with  "great,"  in  lines 
of  descent,  191;  with  "like,"  200;  with 
negative  particles  "un-,"  "in-,"  il-," 
"im-,"  and  "a-,"  205;  with  "non-," 
20s;  with  "over"  and  "under,"  207; 
with  "quasi-,"  206;  with  "semi-," 
"demi-,"  "tri-,"  "bi-,"  etc.,  197;  with 
"vice,"  "ex-,"  "elect,"  "general,"  and 
"lieutenant,"  in  titles,  201. 

Confessions    of    faith,    capitalization    of 

names  of,  19. 
Congress:     capitalization    of    names    of 
houses  of,  12;   of  sessions  of,  13;    mem- 
bers of,  to  be  lower-cased,  21;   numbers 
of  sessions  of,  to  be  spelled  out,  100. 
Congresses,  capitalization  of  names  of,  17. 
Conjunctions,  use  of  comma  in  connection 

with,  145. 
Connective   particles,    use   of   comma   in 

connection  with,  145. 
"Continued":   after  headlines,  to  be  set  in 
italics,  73;   at  end  of  articles,  etc.,  to  be 
placed  between  brackets,  and  in  reduced 
type,  179- 


Contraction  of  word,  use  of  apostrophe  in, 
122,  163. 

Conventions,  capitalization  of  names  of,  17. 

Copyholders,  hints  to,  pp.  130-32. 

Creeds,  capitalization  of  names  of,  19. 

Cut-in-heads:  defined  and  illustrated, 
281;  omission  of  period  after,  125;  use 
of  capitals  in,  41. 

Cycles  of  poems,  titles  of:  capitalization 
of  principal  words  in,  41;  to  be  itali- 
cized, 60. 

"Czar,"  when  capitalized,  21. 

Dagger,  use  of,  for  footnote  index,  232. 
Danish  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  42c. 

Dashes:  definition  and  illustrations  of  use 
of,  166;  different  sizes  of,  explained, 
261;  illustrated,  261;  rules  for  use  of, 
166-75;  use  of.  at  end  of  word  or  phrase 
implied  at  beginning  of  each  of  succeed- 
ing paragraphs,  171;  for  emphasis,  168; 
in  connection  with  literary  references, 
174;  with  other  points,  175;  with 
parenthetical  clauses,  168-69;  with 
complementary  clauses,  169;  to  connect 
numbers,  173;  to  denote  break,  stop, 
transition,  or  change  in  sentence,  166; 
to  precede  summarizing  clauses,  170. 

Dates:  hundreds  repeated,  when  and 
when  not,  173;  of  publications,  to  follow 
volume  numbers  in  references  to  periodi- 
cals, 238;  si,  d,  and  th  to  be  omitted 
from,  102;  use  of  comma  between 
month  and  year  in,  160. 

"Daughter,"   compounds  of,   190. 

"De,"  rule  for  treatment  of,  240c. 

"Dealer,"  compounds  of,  187. 

Decades,  references  to,  to  be  spelled  out, 

lOI. 

Decorations,  capitalization  of  names  of,  21. 

Degrees,  academic,  abbreviation  and  capi- 
talization of,  21-22. 

"Demi-,"  compounds  with,  197. 

Denominations,  religious,  capitalization 
of  names  of,  9. 

Departments:  governmental,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  12;  of  University  of 
Chicago,  49. 

Derivation,  division  according  to,  to  be 
avoided,  221. 

Derivatives:  from  Greek  and  Latin,  115; 
from  proper  names,  53;  English,  from 
scientific  names  not  capitalized,  46;  from 
words  ending  in  /,  how  to  divide,  227. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:    INDEX 


289 


Diagrams,  letters  referring  to,  68. 
Digraphs.     See  Ligature. 

Dimensions,  punctuation,  isg. 

Diphthongs,  to  be  treated  as  one  letter  in 
divisions,  226. 

Divided  word  to  be  avoided:  at  end  of 
next  to  last  line  of  paragraph,  217;  at 
boitom  of  recto  page,  217. 

Division  of  words:  rules  for,  215-31; 
systems  of,  221;  use  of  hyphen  to  indi- 
cate, 182;  avoidance  of  unnecessary, 
215;  on  two  letters,  to  be  avoided,  216; 
of  foreign  words,  231. 

Divisional  mark  in  middle  of  sentences, 
not  to  be  put  at  end  of  line,  220. 

Divisions  of  publications,  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  41 ;  to  be 
roman-quoted,  82. 

Divisions,  political:  capitalization  of 
names  of,  6-7;  numbered,  to  be  spelled 
out,  100. 

Divisions  of  the  University  of  Chicago, 
capitalization  of  names  of,  49. 

Documents,  titles  of:  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized, 
60  (cf.  18). 

Double  dagger,  use  of,  for  footnote  index, 
232. 

Double  rules,  use  of,  in  tables,  247. 

Doubt,  use  of  interrogation  point  to  ex- 
press, 129. 

Drop-folio,  defined,  2qi. 

Dutch  names,  capitalizing  of  "Van"  and 
"Ten"  in,  3;  indexing  of,  240<;;  titles  of 
publications,  use  of  capitals  in,  4.2d. 

Dynasties,  Egyptian:  capitalization  of 
names  of,  13;    to  be  spelled  out,  100. 

Editions:  number  of,  indicated  by  superior 
figure  within  punctuation,  237  (n.  6). 

Editors,  hints  to,  pp.  121-24. 

Educational  organizations  and  institu- 
tions, capitalization  of  names  of,  11. 

E.g.,  to  be  set  in  roman,  61. 

"Elect,"  suffixed  to  titles,  201. 

Ellipses:  rules  for  use  of,  180-81;  to  be 
treated  as  part  of  quotation,  88,  181; 
use  of,  to  indicate  omissions,  180. 

Em,  defined,  261. 

Em  dash:  defined,  261;  illustrated.  261; 
use  of,  for  "to"  in  time-indications, 
173- 

Emphasis:  use  of  dashes  for,  168;  of 
exclamation  points,  127;   of  italics,  58. 


Em  quad:  defined,  261;  illustrated,  261. 
En  dash:  defined,  261;  illustrated,  261; 
use  of,  instead  of  comma  between  con- 
secutive pages  in  literary  references,  158 
(cf.  173);  instead  of  hyphen,  in  com- 
pounds, 183;  for  "to"  connecting  two 
words  or  figures,  173. 
English:  equivalent  of  foreign  word  or 
phrase,  to  be  quoted,  78;  system  of 
division,  221;  titles  of  publications,  use 
of  capitals  in,  41. 

En  quad:  defined,  261;  illustrated,  261. 

Enumerations,  use  of  parentheses  in  con- 
nection with  letters  or  figures  used  to 
indicate  subdivisions  in,  176. 

Epigrammatic  turn,  use  of  dash  to  indi- 
cate, 166. 

Epithets,  capitalized,  when  used  as  proper 
names,  2. 

Epochs,  historical  and  geological,  capitali- 
zation of  names  of,  14. 

Equivalent,  English,  of  word  or  phrase 
from  foreign  language,  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  78. 

Errata,  for  and  read  italicized  in,  62. 

Essays,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41 ;  to  be  italicized,  60. 

Etc.:  use  of  comma  before,  143;  when 
to  be  treated  as  part  of  quotation,  88. 

Etymology,  division  according  to  {Eng- 
lish system),  221. 

en.  form  of  indefinite  article  before,  114. 

Even  spacing,  importance  of,  265. 

Events,  important  historical,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  15. 

"Ex-,"  preti.xed  to  titles,  201. 

Exclamation  point,  rules  for  use  of,  127- 
28. 

Exclamatory  "Oh,"  117. 

Explanation:  of  technical  terms,  251-94; 
use  of  brackets  for.  178. 

Expositions,  capitalization  of  names  of,  17. 

"Extra,"  compounds  with,  209. 

Extracts,  rules  for  punctuation  of,  112. 

P.,  £f.   (=" following"):    spacing  of,  269; 

use  of,  no. 
Face,  defined,  256. 
"Fahrenheit,"  abbreviation  for.  iii. 
"Farther"  and  "further,"  differentiation 

of,  116. 
"Father":     compounds    of,    190;     when 

capitalized,  27. 


290 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Feast  days,  capitalization  of  names  of,  20. 

"Fellow,"  compounds  of,  189. 

Figures:  columns  of,  in  tables,  245;  rules 
for  use  of,  94-98. 

Figures  (illustrations)  in  text,  letters  re- 
ferring to,  68. 

Firms,  names  of  commercial:  abbrevia- 
tion of,  107;  capitalization  of,  II. 

First  words:  after  a  colon,  when  capital- 
ized, 35;  following  "Whereas"  and 
"Resolved"  in  resolutions,  capitali- 
zation of,  39;  in  sections  of  enumera- 
tion, when  capitalized,  36;  in  titles  of 
publications,  capitalization  of,  41;  of 
citations,  when  capitalized,  38  (cf.  131); 
of  lines  of  poetry,  capitalization  of,  34; 
of  quotations,  when  lower-case  is  used 
for,  57  (cf.  131);  of  sentences,  capitali- 
zation of,  34. 

Five-em  space,  defined,  261. 

"Flush,"  defined,  280. 

"Fold,"  combinations  with,  199. 

Folio,  defined,  291. 

Font,  defined,  257. 

Footnotes:  exceptions  to  general  style 
for,  237,  239,  note;  general  style  for, 
237;  indexes  for  references  to,  232; 
numbering  of,  239;  placing  of  index 
figure,  236;  rules  for,  232-39;  samples 
of,  237;    to  tables,  234. 

Foreign  institutions  and  organizations, 
capitalization  of  titles  of.  11. 

Foreign  languages:  division  of  words  in, 
231;  English  translation  accompany- 
ing word,  phrase,  or  passage  cited  from, 
to  be  quoted,  78;  sentences  and  passages 
quoted  from,  how  to  treat,  59.  85;  words 
and  phrases  from,  use  of  italics  for.  59; 
words  and  phrases  borrowed,  from  in- 
corporated into  English,  how  to  treat,  59. 

Foreign  titles  of  publications,  capitaliza- 
tion of,  42. 

"Format"  of  books  (4to,  Svo,  etc.),  not 
10  be  treated  as  abbreviations,  i2sc. 

Formulas,  spacing  of,  273. 

"Fort,"  to  be  spelled  out,  104. 

"Foster,"  compounds  of,  190. 

Foul  proof,  defined,  288. 

Foundry-proof,  defined,  287. 

Four-em  space,  defined.  261. 

Fractions,  use  of  hyphen  in,  210. 
.  French:   titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  426;    use  of  ligatures  a  or  a;  in, 
nS;    words,  division  of,   231. 


"Furthei"  and  "farther,"  differentiation 
of,  n6. 

G,  soft,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 
Galley,  defined.  285. 
Galley-proof,  defined,  285. 
"General,"  combined  with  title,  201. 
Geographical  names,  capitalization  of,  4, 

5,6. 
Geological  terms,  capitalization  of,  14,  46; 

italicizing  of,  71. 
Geometry,  letters  used  to  designate  lines, 

etc.,  in,  67. 
German  names  with  umlaut,  indexing  of, 

24orf;     titles    of    publications,    use    of 

capitals  in,  42c;  words,  division  of,  231. 
Given  names.     See  Christian  names. 
'God,"  compounds  of,  195. 
Governmental  departments,  capitalization 

of  names  of,  12. 
Grain,  abbreviation  for,  iii. 
Gram,  abbreviation  for,  in. 
"  Great,"  compounds  of,  191. 
Greek  words,  division  of,  231. 

H,  form  of  indefinite  article  before 
sounded,  114. 

Hair-space,  defined,  261. 

Hair-spacing,  tabooed,  266. 

"Half,"  combinations  of,  with  nouns, 
196. 

Half-title,  defined,  292. 

Hanging  indention:  defined  and  illus- 
trated, 279,  284;   indention  in,  274. 

Headings,  described,  279-83. 

Headlines:  of  tables,  how  to  set,  249; 
omission  of  period  after,  125;  spacing 
of,  271;  word  "continued"  following, 
to  be  set  in  italics,  73. 

Heads.     See  Headings,  Headlines. 

Historical:  epochs,  capitalization  of  apel- 
lations  for,  14;  events,  capitalization  of, 
is;  terms  of  special  significance,  capi- 
talization of,  16. 

Holidays.     See  Feast  days. 

Honorary  titles,  capitalization  of,  21. 

"Horse-power,"  abbreviation  for,   in. 

"House,"  compounds  of,  186. 

Hyphen  leader,  defined,  244. 

Hyphenated  words:  division  of,  to  be 
avoided,  225;   list  of,  214. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:    INDEX 


291 


Hyphens:  number  of  consecutive,  allow- 
able at  ends  of  lines,  217;  lules  for  use 
of,   182-214. 

Ibid.,  use  of,  233. 

Ideas,  abstract,  capitalization  of,  when 
personified,  26. 

I.e.,  to  be  set  in  roman,  61. 

If-clauses,  use  of  comma  in  connection 
with,  144. 

Illustrations,  letters  referring  to  parts  of, 
68. 

Implication  of  word  or  phrase,  to  be  indi- 
cated by  dash,  171. 

Importance,  use  of  italics  for,  58. 

"In-"  (negative  particle),  compounds 
with,  205. 

Indentation.     Sec  Indention. 

Indention:  explained,  274;  of  poetry, 
27s;    rules  for,   274-76. 

Inde.x  figure,  placing  of,  236. 

Indexes  for  footnote  references:  how  to 
number,  240;  placing  of.  236;  sequence 
of,  232;    what  to  use  for,  232. 

Indexing:  italicizing  of  "See,"  "See  also" 
in  cross-references.  62;  rules  for,  240; 
treatment  of  prefi.xes  and  particles  in 
proper  nouns,  240. 

Industrial  organizations  and  institutions, 
capitalization  of  names  of,  11. 

''Infra,"  compounds  with.  208. 

Initials:  of  titles  of  publications,  use  of, 
123;  separation  of,  in  different  lines,  to 
be  avoided,  2ig. 

Institutions:  capitalization  of  names  of, 
11;    use  of  roman  type  for  foreign,  5q. 

"Inter,"  compounds  with,  208. 

Interpolations,  use  of  brackets  for,  178. 

Interrogation  point,  use  of,  129-30. 

"Intra,"  compounds  with,  208. 

Ironical  word  or  phrase:  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  77;  use  of  exclamation 
point  for,  127. 

-ise  and  -ize,  differentiation  between,  as 
terminations,  120. 

Italian  titles  of  publications,  use  of 
capitals  in,  42A;  words,  division  of.  231. 

Italics:  defined,  254;  how  indicated,  254; 
need  not  be  used  in  lengthy  biblio- 
graphical lists,  60;  rules  for  use  of, 
58-73. 

Italicizing:  of  address  lines,  64;  of  astro- 
nomical names,  71;  of  letters  designating 
unknown  quantities,  67;  of  letters  refer- 


ring to  letters  in  illustrations,  68;  of 
names  of  genera  and  species,  71;  of 
initial  word,  Resolved,  72;  of  names  of 
catalogues  of  planets,  constellations,  and 
stars,  71;  of  symbols  indicating  sub- 
divisions, 66;  of  symbols  for  shillings  and 
pence,  70;  of  titles  or  position  after  sig- 
natures, 65;  of  titles  of  books  and  other 
works,  60;  of  titles  of  legal  causes  and 
proceedings,  63;  of  titles  of  newspapers, 
to  include  name  of  city  where  published, 
when,  60;  of  words  for  and  read  in 
errata,  62;  of  words  "See"  and  "See 
also"  in  cross-references  in  indexing,  62; 
of  words  and  phrases  to  which  emphasis 
is  to  be  given.  58;  of  words  and  phrases 
from  foreign  languages,  59;  of  words 
used  in  literary  references,  61;  of  words 
representing  continuation  of  article  or 
chapter,  73. 

J,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 

Journals.     See  Periodicals. 

Judiciary  bodies,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  12. 
Juridical  acts,  laws,  bills,  capitalization  of 

names  of,  18. 
"Justification,"  defined,  264. 

Kern,  defined,  256. 

Lanston.     See  Monotype. 

Last  words,  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
publications,  41. 

Latin:  non-uses  of  ligatures  ce  and  cb  in, 
lis;  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in.  42a;  words,  division  of,  231. 

Laws,  juridical,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  18. 

''Leaded,"  defined,  277. 

Leaders:  definition  and  use  of,  244;  in 
tables,  245,  250. 

Leads,  defined,  277. 

Lectures,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Legends,  omission  of  period  after,  125. 

Legislative  bodies,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  12. 

Letters:  in  text  or  legends  referring  to 
corresponding  letter  in  accompanying 
illustrations  (diagrams),  68;  references 
to  particular,  to  be  set  in  italics,  69. 

"Lieutenant,"  combined  with  other  title, 

20I. 

"Life,"  compounds  of,  192. 
Ligatures  cb  and  oe,  use  of,  nS- 


292 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


"Like,"  adjectives  ending  in,  200. 

Linguistic  periods:  abbreviation  of  names 
for,  123;    capitalization  of,  14. 

Linotype  maciiine  (Mergenthaler):  de- 
scribed, 294;  liow  to  number  footnotes 
in  matter  set  on,  239;   spacing  on,  260. 

List:  of  hyphenated  words,  214;  of  words 
of  more  than  one  spelling,  119. 

Literary  references:  abbreviations  in,  54, 
107,  no,  237;  words  representing  divi- 
sions, when  capitalized,  37;  list  of 
phrases  and  abbreviations  used  in,  61. 

Literary  schools,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  9. 

Loc.  cil.,  use  of,  233. 

Long  primer,  explained,  252. 

Lower  case:  defined,  257;  for  English 
derivatives  from  scientific  names,  46; 
rules  for  use  of,  53-57. 

Machines,  typesetting,  different  styles 
of,  293-94. 

Magazines.     See  Periodicals. 

"Maker,"  compounds  of,  187. 

Make-up,  defined,  290. 

''Manuscript,"  abbreviation  for,  44,  123. 

Manuscripts,  titles  of:  to  be  set  in  roman, 
60;   use  of  capitals  in,  44. 

"Master,"  compounds  of,  194. 

Mathematical  signs,  spacing  of,  273. 

Measurement,  units  of,  spelled  with  lower- 
case initial  letter,  55. 

Measures,  metric,  how  to  designate,  in. 

Medical  terms,  capitalization  of,  46;  use 
of  italics  in,  to  be  avoided,  71. 

"Mac,"  "Mc,"  "M',"  rule  for  treatment 
of,  240. 

Merganthaler.     See  Linotype. 

Metric:  symbols,  how  to  treat,  123c;  spa- 
cing of,  269;  system,  designation  of 
weights  and  measures  in,  in. 

Military  titles,  capitalization  of,  21. 

"Mill,"  compounds  of,  186. 

Minion,  explained,  252. 

Miscellaneous    terms,    capitalization    of, 

as- 
Monastic  orders,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  10. 

Monetary  symbols,  spacing  of,  270. 

Money,  sums  of,  how  to  treat,  97. 

Monotype  machine  (Lanston):  described, 
293;   spacing  on,  259. 


Months,   names  of,   when   to   be   spelled 

out,  102. 
"Mother,"  compounds  of,  190. 
Mottoes:  capitalization  of  principal  words 

in,  41;    to  be  roman-quoted,  82. 
"Mount,"  to  be  spelled  out,  104. 
Movements,   historical,   capitalization   of 

names  of,  16. 

"Namely,"  use  of  colon  in  connection 
with,  132. 

Names:  alphabetization  of,  240;  Chris- 
tian, to  be  spelled  out,  93;  familiar, 
applied  to  particular  persons,  to  be 
capitalized,  21;  proper,  capitalization 
of,  I. 

Nature,  personified,  capitalization  of,  26. 

Negative  particles  "un-,"  "in-,"  "il-," 
"im-,"  and  "a-,"  compounds  with,  205. 

Newspapers,  titles  of:  the  article  not  to  be 
treated  as  part  of,  43;  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized, 
60. 

New  Testament  books,  list  of  abbrevia- 
tions for,  109. 

Nobility,  capitalization  of  titles  of,  21. 

"Non-,"  compounds  with,  205. 

Nonpareil,  explained,  252. 

"Nor,"  when  comma  is  used  before,  143. 

"Not,"  use  of  comma  before,  in  anti- 
thetical clauses,   149. 

"Note"  introducing  note  not  a  footnote, 
use  of  cap  and  small  caps  for,  51. 

"Nothing,"  not  to  be  divided,  230. 

Nouns:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of  pub- 
lications, 41;  combination  of,  standing 
in  objective  relation  to  each  other,  184; 
ending  in  a  sibilant,  formation  of  plural 
of,  165;  followed  by  numeral,  capitali- 
zation of,  37  (cf.  no);  proper,  capi- 
talization of,  I  (cf.  5,  53). 

Numbered  political  divisions,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  7. 

Numbers:  commencing  a  sentence,  to  be 
spelled  out,  96;  consecutive,  treatment 
of,  159,  173;  in  connected  groups  to  be 
treated  alike,  94;  in  groups  of  six  or 
more  closely  connected,  to  be  set  in 
figures.  94;  of  less  than  three  digits,  to 
be  spelled  out  in  ordinary  reading- 
matter,  94;  round,  treatment  of,  95; 
use  of  comma  after  digits  indicating 
thousands,  159;  use  of  comma  to  sepa- 
rate, 154;  use  of  dash  for  "to"  con- 
necting, 173. 


I^IANUAL  OF  STYLE:    INDEX 


293 


Numerals:  Arabic,  at  beginning  of  lines 
and  in  headlines,  spacing  of,  271; 
Roman,  at  beginning  of  lines  and  in 
headlines,  spacing  of,  271;  omission  of 
period  after,  124. 

"O"  and  "Oh":  capitalization  of,  40; 
differentiation  in  use  of,   117. 

Occupations,  compounds  denoting,  187. 

ce.  rules  for  use  of,  115. 

Officers:  titles  of,  to  be  lower-cased,  21; 
of  University  of  Chicago,  to  be  capi- 
talized, 4g. 

Offices,  capitalization  of  names  of,  12,  21. 

Old  Testament  books,  list  of  abbreviations 
for,  109. 

Omission:  of  comma  after  signatures,  etc., 
161;  of  figures  in  numbers  or  letters 
in  middle  of  word,  use  of  apostrophe 
for,  163;  of  period  after  headlines,  etc., 
125;  after  Roman  numerals,  124;  of  s, 
(1,  and  th  in  dates,  102;  of  word  or  words, 
indicated  by  comma,  155;  use  of  brack- 
ets for.  178;   of  ellipsis,  180. 

"One,"  "once,"  etc.,  form  of  indefinite 
article  before,  114. 

Op.  cil.,  use  of,  233. 

Open  tables:  headlines  for.  242;  how  to 
set.  241;    specimens  of,  250. 

"Or,"  when  comma  is  used  before,   143. 

Orders  (decorations),  capitalizaton  of 
names  of,  21 

Orders,  monastic,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  10. 

Ordinals:  when  capitalized.  13;  when 
not,  45. 

Organizations,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
II. 

Outcry,  use  of  exclamation  point  after.  127. 

''Over,"  compounds  with,  207. 

Pages,  etc.,  omission  of  comma  with  four 

digits,  when,  159;    symbol  "p."  to  be 

used,  when,  237;  use  of  en  dash  between 

consecutive,  158  (cf.  173). 
Page-proof,    defined,   286;     rules   for   use 

in,  217,  and  pp.  127-29. 
Paleontological  terms:    use  of  capitals  in, 

46;   italics  not  used  in,  71. 
Pamphlets,    titles    of:     capitalization    of 

principal  words  in,  41;    to  be  italicized, 

60. 
Papers  (addresses),  titles  of:    capitalizar 

tion  of  principal  words  in,  41;    to  be 

roman-quoted,  82. 


Parables,  biblical,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  32. 
Paragraph  mark:   spacing  of,  269;   use  of, 

for  footnote  inde.x,  232. 
Paragraphs:   explained,  284;   first  lines  of, 

in  quoted  prose  matter  to  begin  with 

quotation  marks,  89;   indention  of,  274; 

styles  of,  276  (cf.  284). 
Parallel  mark,  use  of,  for  footnote  index, 

232. 

"Parent,"  compounds  of,  190. 

Parentheses:  rules  for  use  of,  176-77; 
use  of,  for  parenthetical  clauses,  177 
(cf.  ISO,  177);  in  connection  with  figures 
or  letters  indicating  subsections,  176; 
within  parentheses,  use  of  brackets  for, 
178. 

Parenthesis,  placing  of  period  in  connec- 
tion with,  126. 

Parenthetical  clauses:  use  of  commas  in 
connection  with.  150;  of  dashes,  167, 
169;   of  parentheses,  177  (cf.  150,  167). 

Parks,  capitalization  of  names  of,  8. 

Participial  clauses,  use  of  comma  in  con- 
nection with,  148. 

Participle:  omission  or  retention  of  final 
e  in  original  word,  when,  118;  present, 
united  with  noun,  or  with  preposition, 
185. 

Particles,  in  French.  Dutch,  and  German 
names,  capitalization  of,  3. 

Parties,  political,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  9. 

Parts  (of  books,  etc.),  titles  of:  capitali- 
zation of  principal  words  in,  41;  to  be 
roman-quoted,  82. 

Pause,  use  of  dash  to  indicate,  166. 

Pearl,  explained,  252. 

Pence.     See  Shillings. 

Peoples,  races,  and  tribes,  capitalization 
of  names  or  epithets  of,  47. 

Per  cent:  to  be  expressed  in  figures,  94; 
not  to  be  treated  as  an  abbreviation,  123. 

Percentages,  columns  of,  in  tables,  some- 
times in  distinctive  type,  241. 

Period:  placing  of,  in  connection  with 
quotation  marks,  126;  rules  for  use 
of,  122-26;  to  be  omitted  after  abbre- 
viations for  linguistic  epochs,  123;  after 
headlines  and  legends  for  cuts  and 
tables,  125;  after  initials  of  titles  of 
publications,  123;  after  MS  (=manu- 
script),  123;  use  of,  after  abbreviations, 
123;  at  end  of  sentence,  122  (cf.  125); 
in  classical  references,  237. 


294 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Period  leader,  defined,  244. 

Periodicals,  titles  of:  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41;  definite  article 
not  to  be  treated  as  part  of,  43;  to  be 
italicized,  60. 

Periods,  geological,  historical,  linguistic, 
and  literary,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
14. 

Personifications,  capitalization  of,  26. 

Philosophical  schools,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  g. 

Phrases:  adjectival,  use  of  comma  in  con- 
nection with,  152;  conjunctional,  etc., 
145- 

Pica,  explained,  252. 

Place  of  publication  and  publisher's  name, 
use  of  colon  between,  135. 

Place-names,  foreign,  how  to  treat,  sg. 

Plain  paragraph:  defined  and  illustrated, 
284;   indention  of,  274. 

Plate-proof,  defined,  287. 

Planets,  names  of,  how  treated,  71. 

Plays,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized,  60. 

Plurals:  formation  of,  165;  of  abbrevia- 
tions of  decades,  loi;  in  literary  refer- 
ences, how  formed,  no;  of  nouns,  not 
divisible  if  singulars  are  not,  228;  of 
numerals  and  of  rare  and  artificial  noun 
coinages,  formation  of,  165. 

P.M.  (post  meridiem):  spacing  of,  52; 
division  of,  2ig;  use  of  small  caps  for, 
52. 

Poems:  capitalization  of  first  word  of  each 
line  in  English,  34;  of  first  word  of  each 
paragraph  in  Greek  and  Latin,  34;  of 
principal  words  in  titles  of,  41;  titles 
of  shorter,  to  be  roman-quoted,  81  (cf. 
60);  titles  of,  when  set  in  italics  and 
when  in  roman,  60. 

Poetry:  capitalization  of  first  lines,  34; 
indention  of,  275;  quotations  from, 
when  to  reduce,  85;  when  to  run  into 
the  text,  85. 

Point  system,  explanation  of,  251-52. 

Political:  alliances,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  16;  divisions,  6-7;  organi- 
zations, 11;    parties,  g. 

"Pope,"  when  capitalized,  21. 

"Port,"  to  be  spelled  out,  104. 

Position,  use  of  comma  before  "of"  in 
connection  with,  157. 

Possessive  case,  how  formed,  113,  164. 

"Post,"  compounds  with,  208. 


"Pre-,"  compounds  with,  203. 

Preface,  etc.,  quotation  marks  to  be  omit- 
ted with,  82. 

Prefix  or  suffix  not  complete  in  itself,  to 
be  indicated  by  hyphen,  212. 

Prefixes  "co-,"  "pie-,"  and  "re-,"  how 
to  treat,  203. 

Prepositions:  formation  of  nouns  of  pres- 
ent participles  in  connection  with,  185; 
to  be  lower-cased  in  titles,  41;  use  of 
comma  in  connection  with  clauses  end- 
ing in  different,  153. 

"President,"  when  capitalized,  21,  4g. 

Principal  words:  capitalization  of,  in 
titles  of  publications,  41;  definition  of, 
41. 

Proceedings  (of  societies),  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  41;  to 
be  italicized.  60. 

Pronouns:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
publications,  41;   referring  to  Deity,  24. 

Pronunciation,  division  according  to 
(American  system),  221. 

Proofreaders:  hints  to,  pp.  i2S-2g;  marks 
of,  p.  123. 

Proofs,  description  of,  28s-8g. 

Proper  names:  capitalization  of,  i;  how 
to  form  possessive  of,  113;  verbs  and 
adjectives  derived  from,  use  of  lower 
case  for,  53. 

Proper  nouns:  capitalization  of,  i,  s; 
division  of,  to  be  avoided,  218;  when 
not  capitalized,  53. 

Prose:  extracts,  when  to  reduce,  85; 
when  to  run  into  text,  85;  indention  of 
paragraphs  in,  274. 

Publications:  period  to  be  omitted  after 
initials  used  as  abbreviations  for,  123; 
titles  of,  capitalization  of  principal 
words  in,  41;  titles  of  subdivisions  of, 
when  to  be  roman-quoted,  82;  use  of 
italics  for,  60;  when  to  be  spelled  out, 
105. 

Punctuation:  of  extracts  from  modern 
authors,  112;   rules  for,  1 21-214. 

Punctuation  marks:  omission  of,  in  clas- 
sical references,  237;  placing  of,  with 
reference  to  index  figures  in  text,  232; 
to  be  printed  in  same  type  as  word  or 
letter  preceding   them,   121. 

"Pyramid,"  explained  and  illustrated,  27g. 

Quad,  defined,  261. 
Quadrat.     S(C  Quad. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:    INDEX 


295 


■Quarter,"  compounds  of,  iq6. 

4to,  Svo,  etc.,  not  to  be  treated  as  abbre- 
viations, 123. 

"Quasi-,"  compounds  with,  206. 

Query,  use  of  interrogation  point  for,  i2g. 

Question  mark.     See  Interrogation  point. 

Questions:  direct,  to  be  followed  by  inter- 
rogation point,  i2q;  indirect,  not  to  be 
followed  by  interrogation  point,  129. 

Quotation  marks:  not  to  be  used  in  con- 
nection with  reduced  citations,  87; 
exception  to  this  rule,  75;  placing  of 
colon  in  connection  with,  1.56;  of 
comma,  162;  of  ellipsis.  181;  of  excla- 
mation point,  128;  of  interrogation 
point,  130;  of  period,  126;  of  semi- 
colon. 140;  rules  for  use  of.  74-91;  to  be 
omitted  in  references  to  Preface,  Index, 
etc.,  82;   use  of  double  and  single,  91. 

Quotations,  how  to  treat,  74-gi;  first 
word  of,  lower-cased  when  connected 
with  previous  sentence,  57. 

Races,  tribes,  and  peoples,  capitalization 
of  names  or  epithets  of,  47. 

"Railroad"  and  "Railway,"  to  be  spelled 
out,  104. 

"Re,"  compounds  with,   203. 

Reading-matter  in  columns  of  ruled  tables, 
how  to  set,  246,  250. 

Recto,  defined,  283. 

Reductions:  rules  for,  85-87,  179;  scale 
of,  86. 

Reference  indexes,  what  to  use  for,  232. 

References,  legal,  list  of  words  and  phrases 
used  in,  61;  literary:  list  of  words  to 
be  abbreviated  in,  no  (cf.  37,  54,  237); 
punctuation  of,  etc.,  237,  239,  note; 
use  of  dash  in  connection  with,  174. 

"Reformer,"  when  capitalized,  27. 

Regiments,  capitalization  of  names  of,  13. 

Regions  or  parts  of  the  world,  capitali- 
zation of  names  of,  5. 

Regular  paragraph.     See  Plain  paragraph. 

Religious:  denominations,  capitalization 
of  names  of,  g;   organizations,  11. 

Residence,  use  cf  comma  before  "of"  in 
connection  with,  157. 

Resolutions:  how  to  introduce  para- 
graphs in,  39,  SI1  72;  word  "Resolved" 
in,  how  to  set,  72;  word  "Whereas," 
SI- 

"Resolved,"  in  resolutions,  to  be  set  in 
italics,  72. 

Revise,  defined,  289. 


Rhymed  lines,  in  poetry,  indention  of, 
275- 

Roman  numerals:  at  beginning  of  lines, 
spacing  of,  271;  in  headlines,  spacing  of, 
271;    omission  of  period  after,  124. 

"Roman-quote,"  defined,   74.   253. 

Roman  type:  defined,  253;  illustrated,  257. 

"Room,"  compounds  of.  186. 

Round  numbers,  definition  and  treatment 
of,  95- 

Ruled  tables:  blanks  in,  how  expressed, 
245;  box-heads  for,  242;  reading- 
matter  in.  246;  size  to  set,  241;  space 
between  rules  and  type,  243 ;  specimens 
of,  250;  stub,  how  to  set,  244. 

Sacred  books,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
29. 

"Saint":  to  be  omitted  in  connection 
with  names  of  apostles,  church  fathers, 
etc.,  108;    when  abbreviated,   108. 

Salutatory  phrase  at  beginning  of  letters, 
rules  for  setting,  50. 

Scandinavian  titles  of  publications,  use  of 
capitals  in,  42. 

Schools,  philosophical,  literary,  and  artis- 
tic, capitalization  of  names  of,  9. 

Scientific  terms,  use  of  capitals  in,  46;  of 
italics  in,  71. 

Scripture  passages:  names  of  books  of 
Bible  to  be  abbreviated  in.  109;  punc- 
tuation of,  134,  139;   spacing  of,  272. 

"Section,"  introducing  paragraphs  and 
followed  by  a  number,  use  of  cap  and 
small  caps  for,  51. 

Section  mark:  spacing  of,  269;  use  of,  for 
footnote  index,  232. 

Sects,  religious,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  9. 

See  and  See  also  italicized,  when,  62. 

"Self,"  compounds  of,  198. 

"Semi-,"  compounds  with,  197. 

Semicolon:  separatihg  two  or  more  dis- 
tinct clauses  in  enumerations,  36;  illus- 
tiation  of  use  of.  compared  with  that  of 
comma.  137;  placing  of,  in  connection 
with  quotation  marks,  140;  rules  for 
use  of.  137-40;  use  of.  in  enumerations, 
138;  to  mark  division  of  sentence,  137; 
to  separate  passages  in  Scripture  refer- 
ences containing  chapters,  139. 

Sequences:  of  footnote  indexes,  232;  of 
subdivisional  numberings,  r76;  of  three 
or  more  links,  use  cf  comma  before 
"and,"  "or,"  and  "nor"  in,  143. 


296 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Series  titles,  to  be  roman-quoted,  80. 

Series,  use  of  comma  before  final  "and," 
"or,"  and  "nor"  in,  143. 

Sermons,  titles  of,  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Shank,  defined,  256. 

Shillings  and  pence,  how  to  treat  abbre- 
viations for,   70. 

Ships,  names  of,  to  be  roman-quoted,  83. 
"Shop,"  compounds  of,  186. 
"Short  and":    definition  of,   107;    when 
used,  104,  107. 

Short  words:  avoidance  of  divisions  of, 
216;    spacing  of,  268. 

Shoulder,  defined,  256. 

Side-heads:  defined,  280;  omission  of 
period  after,  125;  use  of  dash  in  con- 
nection with,  172;  use  of  lower  case 
in,  56  (cf.  172). 

Signatures  at  end  of  letters  or  articles: 
omission  ot  comma  after,  161;  of  period, 
12s;    rules  for  setting  of,  50,  65. 

"  Sister,"  compounds  of,  igo. 

Sizes  of  type,  in  ordinary  use,  samples  of, 
252. 

"Skin,"  compounds  of,  1Q3. 

Slug,  defined,  278. 

Small  caps:  defined,  257;  how  indicated, 
257;  use  of,  52;  in  tabular  work.  242, 
249;   in  headings,  279. 

Small  pica,  explained,  252. 

Social  organizations,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  n. 

Soft  c  or  g,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 

Solar  system,  capitalization  of  names  of 
bodies  in,  in  works  on  astronomy,  48. 

"Solid,"  defined,  277. 

Space  omitted  between  components  of 
certain  abbreviations,  22,  52,  103,  163. 

Spaces:  different  sizes  of,  explained,  259. 
261;  specimen  of  lines  spaced  with 
different  sizes  of,  261. 

Spacing:  in  breakline,  266-67;  in  foundry 
type  (and  general)  composition.  261-64; 
in  linotype  composition,  260;  in  mono- 
type composition,  259;  its  effect  on  ety- 
mological divisions.  221;  of  divisional 
signs,  269;  of  figure  columns  in  tables, 
24s;  of  formulas,  273;  of  headlines,  271; 
of  metric  symbols,  269;  of  monetary 
symbols,  270;  of  numerals  at  beginning 
of  paragraphs,  271;  of  rules  in  tables, 
243;  of  Scripture  passages,  272;  of  short 


words,  268;  rules  for,  258-73;  standard, 
262;  what  is  considered  good,  262; 
with  different  sizes  of  spaces,  samples  of, 
261. 

Spanish  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  426;  words,  division  of,  231. 

Species,  scientific  names  of:  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  46;    of  italics,  71. 

Specimen  tables,  250. 

Spelled  out,  words,  phrases,  and  titles 
which  are  to  be,  92-105. 

Spelling:  list  of  words  of  more  than  one, 
119;  of  ages,  99;  of  books  of  Bible,  109; 
of  centuries,  100;  of  Christian  names, 
93;  of  "Company"  and  "Brothers" 
in  names  of  firms,  107;  of  decades,  loi; 
of  Egyptian  dynasties,  100;  of  extracts 
from  modern  authors,  112;  from  Old 
English,  112;  of  indefinite  article  before 
/;,  u,  etc.,  114;  of  metric  symbols,  in; 
of  names  of  months,  102;  of  names  of 
publications,  105;  of  names  of  regi- 
ments, 100;  of  numbers  commencing 
a  sentence,  96;  of  numbers  of  less  than 
three  digits,  94;  of  possessives  of  proper 
names  ending  in  a  sibilant,  113;  of 
"Railroad"  and  "Railway,"  104;  of 
round  numbers,  95;  of  "Saint,"  108; 
of  sessions  of  Congress,  100;  of  states 
and  territories,  106;  of  sums  of  money, 
97;  of  time  of  day,  98;  of  titles,  92; 
of  "United  States,"  103;  of  words 
denoting  subsections,  in  literary  refer- 
ences, no;    rules  for,  92-120. 

Squares,  capitalization  of  names  of,  8. 

"St.,"  indexing  of  names  with,  240a. 

Standard:  of  measurement  in  typography, 
252;  space  used  to  separate  words,  261. 

Stars,  names  of,  how  treated,  71. 

"State,"  when  capitalized,  28,  note. 

States  and  territories:  list  of  abbrevia- 
tions for,  106;  to  be  abbreviated  when 
following  those  of  towns,  106;  names  of 
groups  of,  when  capitalized,  5. 

Statistics,  treatment  of  numbers  in,  94. 

"Store,"  compounds  of,  188. 

Stub:  brace,  when  used  in,  244;  definition 
of,  242;  head  for,  242;  leaders,  when 
used  in,  244. 

Styles  of  type,  253-57. 

"Sub,"  compounds  with,  208. 

Subdivisions:  in  literary  references,  use 
of  lower  case  for,  54  (cf.  no,  237); 
letters  used  to  indicate,  to  be  set  in 
italics,  66;  use  of  parentheses  in  con- 
nection with,  66;    of  publications,  capi- 


IHANUAL  OF  ST\XE:    INDEX 


297 


talization  of  principal  words  in  titles  of, 
41;  titles  of.  to  be  roman-quoted,  or 
capitalized  without  quotation  marks,  82. 

Suffix  or  prefix,  indicated  by  hyphen,  212. 

Summarizing  clauses,  use  of  dashes  in 
connection  with,  170. 

"  Super,"  compounds  with,  208. 

Superior  figures,  use  of,  for  reference 
indexes,  232,  234;  for  number  of  edi- 
tion, 237  (n.  6). 

Superscriptions,  omission  of  period  after, 

125. 
"Supra,"  compounds  with,  208. 

Supreme  Being,  capitalization  of  names 
for,  and  pronouns  referring  to,  24. 

Syllabi,  scheme  of  notation  and  inden- 
tion of  subdivisions  in,  176. 

Syllables,  hyphen  used  to  indicate,  213. 

Symbols:  chemical,  treatment  of,  71,  123; 
metric,  spacing  of,  269;  treatment  of, 
III,  123;  monetary,  spacing  of,  270; 
of  measurement,  abbreviation  of,  in; 
as  reference  indexes,  232. 

Tables:  blanks  in,  245  (but  see  250,  open 
tables);  columns  representing  totals, 
percentages,  etc.,  frequently  set  off  by 
different  type,  241;  continued,  247, 
248,  250;  footnotes  to,  232,  234,  249; 
headlines  of,  how  to  set,  249;  of  two 
columns,  to  be  set  as  open,  248;  of  more 
than  two,  as  ruled,  248;  open,  headlines 
for  columns  in,  242;  open,  how  to  set, 
241;  ruled,  box-heads  for,  242;  ruled, 
how  to  set,  241;  rules  for  setting  of,  241- 
50;  rules  for  use  of  rules  in,  243,  247; 
specimen,  250;  use  of  braces  in,  244 
(and  see  specimen  tables,  250);  use  of 
leaders  in,  244,  24s  (and  open  tables, 
250)- 

Tabular  work,  rules  for,  241-50  (see 
Tables). 

Technical:  terms,  explanation  of  typo- 
graphical, 251-94;  words  or  phrases, 
use  of  quotation  marks  for,  77. 

"The"  not  to  be  treated  as  part  of  title  of 
newspapers  or  magazines,  43. 

Thick  space,  defined,  261. 

Thin  space,  defined,  261. 

Thin-spacing,  where  to  avoid,  265. 

Thoroughfares:  capitalization  of  names 
of,  8;  numbers  forming  part  of  names 
of,  to  be  spelled  out,  100. 

Thousands,  use  of  comma  after  digits 
indicating,  159. 


Three-em  dash:  defined,  261;  illustrated, 
261. 

Three-em  quad,  defined,  261. 

Three-em  space,  defined,  261. 

Time:  indications,  how  to  punctuate,  134; 
of  day,  how  to  treat,  g8. 

Titles:  academic,  to  be  abbreviated,  22; 
civil  and  military,  capitalization  of,  21; 
honorary,  21;  in  direct  address,  21;  of 
nobility,  21;  preceding  names,  to  be 
spelled  out,  92;  list  of  exceptions,  92; 
"vice,"  "ex-,"  "elect."  "general,"  and 
"lieutenant,"  constituting  parts  of,  how 
to  treat,  201. 

Titles  of  legal  causes  and  proceedings, 
italicized,  63. 

Titles  of  publications:  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41;  use  of  capitals 
in:  English,  Latin,  French,  Italian, 
Spanish,  Scandinavian,  German,  Dan- 
ish, Dutch,  42;  use  of  italics  for,  60; 
of  roman-quoted,  80,  81,  82;  to  be 
correctly  quoted,  112;  when  to  be 
spelled  out,  105;  of  addresses,  82;  of 
articles,  82;  of  books,  60;  of  chapters 
82;  of  cycles  of  poems,  60;  of  divisions 
of  books,  etc.,  82;  of  documents,  60; 
of  essays,  60;  of  lectures,  82:  of  news- 
papers, 60;  of  pamphlets,  60;  of  papers, 
82;  of  periodicals,  60;  of  plays,  60; 
of  poems,  printed  in  separate  volume,  60; 
of  poems,  short,  81  (cf.  60);  of  proceed- 
ings of  societies,  60;  of  series,  80;  of 
tracts,  60;  of  transactions  of  societies, 
60;  of  treatises,  60. 

To,  use  dash  in  place  of  word,  158,  173. 

Toasts,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

"  To  be  continued,"  at  end  of  articles,  how 
to  set.  73,  179. 

"Today,"  "tonight,"  "tomorrow,"  hy- 
phen to  be  omitted  with,  119,  204,  note. 

Totals,  columns  of,  in  tables,  sometimes 
in.  distinctive  type,  241. 

Town  and  state,  names  of,  in  date  line, 
how  to  set,  50. 

Tracts,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized.  60. 

Transactions  (of  societies),  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  41; 
to  be  italicized,  60. 

Transition,  use  of  dash  to  indicate,  166. 

Translation  of  foreign  words  or  phrases, 
quoted,  78. 

Treaties,  capitalization  of  names  of,  18. 


298 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Treatises,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;    to  be  italicized,  60. 

"Tri-, "  compounds  with,  197. 

Tribes,  races,  and  peoples,  capitalization 
of  names  and  epithets  of,  47. 

Trinity,  Christian,  capitalization  of  names 
of  members  of,  24. 

Two-column   tables,   to   be   set   as   open' 

248. 

Two-em  dash:  defined,  261;  illustrated 
261. 

Two-em  quad,  defined,  261. 

Two-letter  syllables,  avoidance  of,  in 
divisions,  216. 

Type:  different  parts  of  body  of,  ex- 
plained, 256;  names  for  different  sizes 
of,  252;   styles  of,  253-57. 

Typesetting  machines,  293-94. 

Typographical  terms,  explanation  of. 
251-94. 

U,  long,  form  of  indefinite  article  before, 
114. 

"  Ultra,"  compounds  with,   209. 

Umlaut,  indexing  of  names  beginning  with, 
24od. 

"Un-, "  compounds  with,  205. 

"Under,"  compounds  with,  207. 

Unit,  typographical,  explained,  251;  on 
monotype  machine,  259. 

Units  of  measurement,  abbreviations  for, 
in;  spelled  with  lower-case  initial  let- 
ter, 55. 

"United  States":  when  to  be  spelled  out, 
103;   when  to  be  abbreviated,  103. 

University  of  Chicago:  capitalization  of 
special  terms  dealing  with  organization, 
administration,  and  curricula  of,  49; 
of  titles  of  divisions,  departments,  offi- 
cers, and  courses  and  units  of  study,  in 
official  work  dealing  with,  49. 


Unusual  word  or  phrase,  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  77. 

"Van,"  rule  for  treatment  of,  3,  240c. 

Verbs:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of  pub- 
lications, 41;  derived  from  proper 
names,' how  to  treat,  si. 

Verse  or  page,  letter  affixed  to  number  of, 
to  denote  fractional  part:  to  be  set  in 
italic,  66;   spacing  of  (see  example),  66. 

Versions  of  Bible:  abbreviations  for,  109; 
capitalization  of,  30. 

Verso,  defined,  283. 

Versus  (v.,  vs.),  59  (word-list),  61. 

"Vice,"  prefixedtotitles,  how  to  treat,  201. 

Vocative,  "O,"  117. 

"Vol,"  "chap.,"  "p.,"  etc.,  in  literary 
references:  use  of  numerals  with,  237; 
when  omitted,  237. 

"Von,"  rule  for  treatment  of,  3,  240c. 

Vowel:  divide  on,  whenever  possible,  224; 
single,  forming  separate  syllable  in 
middle  of  word,  to  be  put  in  first  line 
in  dividing,  224. 

Weights  and  measures,  metric:  how  to 
designate,  iii;  punctuation  in,  159; 
spacing  of,  269. 

"Whereas,"  in  resolutions,  use  of  cap  and 
small  caps  for,  51. 

Wide  spacing,  where  to  avoid,  265. 

Word  or  phrase:  accompanied  by  its  defi- 
nition, to  be  quoted,  76;  to  which 
attention  is  directed,  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  79. 

Words:  hyphenated,  list  of,  214;  of  more 
than  one  spelling,  how  to  spell,  119. 

"Work,"  compounds  of,  186. 

Works  of  art,  titles  of,  to  be  roman-quoted, 
84. 

"World,"  compounds  of,  192. 

Zoological  terms;  use  of  capitals  in,  46; 
of  italics,  71. 


INDEX  TO  TYPES,  ETC. 


Advertising  figures,  231. 
Antique  Greek,  i8i. 
Arabic,  182. 

Black  Gothic,  227. 

Body  Type  (for  hand  composition): 
Modern:  five  point  No.  sixty-seven.  137, 
five  point  No.  five  hundred  twenty- 
seven,  137;  six  point  No.  fifty-seven, 
138;  seven  point  No.  fifty-seven,  i3q; 
eight  point  No.  fifty-seven,  140;  nine 
point  No.  fifty-seven,  141;  eleven 
point  No.  sixty-five,  142;  six  point 
Scotch  Roman,  170;  eight  point  Scotch 
Roman,  171;  ten  point  Scotch  Roman, 
172;  eleven  point  Scotch  Roman,  173; 
twelve  point  Scotch  Roman,  174; 
fourteen  point  Scotch  Roman,  175. 
Old  Style:  five  point  No.  eight,  143; 
fourteen  point  No.  eight,  144;  eighteen 
point  No.  eight,  145 ;  eight  point  Caslon, 
166;  ten  point  Caslon,  167;  twelve 
point  Caslon,  168;  fourteen  point 
Caslon,  169;  six  point  Bookman,  176; 
eight  point  Bookman,  177;  ten  point 
Bookman,  178;  twelve  point  Bookman, 
179. 

Bold-Face  Italic,  223. 

Bookman:  on  six-,  eight-,  ten-,  and 
twelve-point  body,   176-79. 

Borders,  271-73. 

Bradley  Text,  235. 

Brass  Circles,  255. 

Brass  Rule  Faces,  270. 

Canceled  letters  and  figures,  183. 

Caslon  Old  Style:  monotype,  165; 
foundry  type,  186,  187. 

Century  Expanded,  214. 

Chaucer  Text,  237. 

Coat-of-Arms,  University  of  Chicago,  254. 

Cheltenham:  Bold,  203-5;  Bold  Con- 
densed, 201-2,  205-7;  Bold  Extra 
Condensed,  199-200;  Bold  Italic,  208-9; 
Condensed,  198;  Old  Style,  194;  Old 
Style  Italic,  194-95;   Wide,  196-97. 

Clarendon,  210. 


Cloister  Black,  217. 
Condensed  Title,  233. 
Copperplate,  227. 

Cushing:  foundry  type,  213;  modern 
figures  with,  164;   monotype,  158-64. 

Delia  Robbia,  211-12. 

DeVinne,  218-21. 

DeVinne  Condensed,  222-23. 

Elzevir  Italic,  189. 
Engraver's  Bold,  231. 
Engraver's  Old  English,  239. 
Ethiopic,  182. 

Gothic:  Black,  227;  Condensed,  226; 
Interchangeable,  230;  Lining  Con- 
densed, 228-29;  Lightface,  226;  Title, 
210. 

Gothic  Condensed,  226. 
Gothic  Title,  210. 

Hebrew,  181. 

Inferior  letters  and  figures,  monotype,  185. 
Initials:    Burford,  243-45;    Caxton,  242; 

Delia    Robbia,    245-48;     Jenson,    250; 

Miscellaneous,    242,    250-53;  Roycroft, 

248-49. 
Inscription  Greek,  181. 
Interchangeable  Gothic,  230. 
Ionic,  210. 
Italic:   Bold-Face,  223; 

187;       Cheltenham 

Cheltenham  Old  Style,  194-95;  Elzevir, 

189;    Jenson  Old  Style,   223;    K,   No. 

twenty-five,  165;    Old  Style  No.  eight, 

189;     Scotch    Roman,    175;    also    see 

body  types. 

Jenson,  Old  Style  Italic,  223. 

Lightface  Gothic,  226. 

Lining  Gothic  Condensed,  228-29. 

Lithe  Roman,  232. 


Caslon  Old  Style, 
Bold,       208-209; 


299 


300 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Macfarland,  233. 

Miscellaneous  Signs:  foundry  type,  183; 
monotype,  184. 

Monarch,  22Q. 

Monotype;  Modern:  six  point  No.  one, 
138;  six  point  No.  five,  153;  seven 
point  No.  eight,  154;  eight  point  No. 
eight,  155;  nine  point  No.  eight,  156; 
eleven  point  No.  eight,  157;  Gushing 
figures  No.  twenty-five,  164;  ten  point 
Scotch  Roman  No.  thirty-six,  165; 
twelve  point  Caslon  No.  three  hundred 
thirty-seven,  165;  eight  point  italic 
No.  twenty-five  K,  165;  ten  point 
italic  No.  twenty-five  K.  165;  twelve 
point  italic  No.  twenty-five  K,  165; 
eleven  point  Porson  Greek  (also  on 
ten-point  body),  180;  miscellaneous 
signs,  on  six-,  seven-,  eight-,  nine-,  ten-, 
eleven-,  and  twelve-point  body,  184; 
superior  letters  and  figures  (Old  Style 
and  Modern  on  six-,  seven-,  eight-, 
nine-,  ten-,  and  eleven-point  body),  185; 
inferior  letters  and  figures  (Old  Style 
on  six-,  seven-,  eight-,  nine-,  ten-,  and 
eleven-point  body  and  Modern  on 
ten-point  body),  185.  Old  Style:  six 
point  No.  thirty-one,  146;  seven  point 
No.  thirty-one,  147;  eight  point  No. 
thirty-one,  148;  nine  point  No.  thirty- 
one,  149;  ten  point  No.  thirty-one,  150; 
eleven  point  No.  thirty-one,  151; 
twelve  point  No.  thirty-one,  152;  six 
point  Gushing  No.  twenty-five,  158; 
seven  point  Gushing  No.  twenty-five, 
159;  eight  point  Gushing  No.  twenty- 
five,  160;  nine  point  Gushing  No. 
twenty-five,  161;  ten  point  No.  twenty- 
five,  162;  eleven  point  No.  twenty-five, 
163;  twelve  point  No.  twenty-five 
(eleven-point  face,  and  accents  with 
twelve-point  face),  164. 

Monotype  accents  and  special  char- 
acters, 275-84. 

Nestorian  Syriac,  182 

New  Model  Elite  Typewriter,  234. 


Old  Style:  No.  eight,  143-4S  (body  type), 
188;  No.  eight  Italic,  189;  Gondensed, 
190-91;  Extended,  191-92;  French, 
192-93;  Cheltenham,  194;  Cheltenham 
Italic,  194-95;  monotype,  146-52; 
Jenson  Italic,  223;    Post,  215. 

Ornaments,  256-69. 

Packard,  216-17. 
Paul  Revere,  233. 
Porson  Greek,  180. 
Post  Old  Style,  215. 
Prescription  Signs,  270. 
Priory  Text,  236 . 

Remington  Typewriter,  234. 
Reproducing  Typewriter,  234. 

Scotch  Roman:  body  type  (foundry),  170- 

75;   (monotype),  165;  job  type,  224-25. 
Script:     Tiffany,    240;     Tiffany    Shaded, 

241;   Tiffany  Upright,  240-41. 
Special   characters:     foundry   type,    183; 

monotype,  184,  275-84. 
Superior  letters   and   figures,   monotype, 

185. 
Syriac,  Nestorian,  182. 

Text:  Bradley,  235;  Chaucer,  237; 
Priory,  236;  Wedding,  238;  Engraver's 
Old  English,  239;    English,  236. 

Tiffany  Script,  240. 

Tiffany  Shaded,  241. 

Tiffany  Upright,  240-41. 

Title  Gondensed,  233. 

Title  Gothic,  210. 

Tudor  Black,  235. 

Typewriter:  New  Model  Elite  Reming- 
ton, 234;  New  Model  Remington,  234; 
Remington,  234;    Reproducing,  234. 

Wedding  Text,  238. 
Whittier,  227. 


CENTRAL  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 

University  of  California,  San  Diego 


DATE  DUE 

rf  e  9  5  iqpn 

*"  **  w  ^   igQjj 

0  39 

UCSD  Libr. 

:  souTHi  m  HI  cKiNAi  Lii'R'^f^^f  ^[^'^'{L 


AA    000  909  471     5 


